UAG2100 - VPN Firewall/Router ZYXEL - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL UAG2100 ZYXEL

Unified Access Gateway

Version 4.00

Edition 1, 08/2014

User's Guide

Default Login Details

LAN IP Address	http://172.16.0.1 (LAN1) http://172.17.0.1 (LAN2)
User Name	admin
Password	1234

IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

Screenshot and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.

Related Documentation

• Quick Start Guide

The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the UAG and access the Web Configurator wizards. (See the wizard real time help for information on configuring each screen.) It also contains a package contents list.

• CLI Reference Guide

The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) to configure the UAG.

Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the UAG.

Web Configurator Online Help

Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information.

Contents Overview

Introduction 18

Hardware Installation and Connection 32

Printer Deployment 36

Installation Setup Wizard 44

Quick Setup Wizards 52

58

Monitor 68

Registration 99

Wireless 102

Interfaces 106

Trunks 146

Policy and Static Routes 154

Zones 164

DDNS 168

NAT 173

VPN 1-1 Mapping 180

HTTP Redirect 185

SMTP Redirect 189

ALG 193

UPnP 195

IP/MAC Binding 202

Layer 2 Isolation 207

IPnP 211

Web Authentication 213

Firewall 232

Billing 246

Printer Manager 262

Free Time 269

SMS 273

Bandwidth Management 275

User/Group 285

AP Profile 299

314

Services 319

Schedules 324

AAA Server 328

Authentication Method 332

Certificates 335

ISP Accounts 351

System 354
Log and Report 395
File Manager 410
Diagnostics 421
Packet Flow Explore 429
Reboot 437
Shutdown 438
Troubleshooting 439

Table of Contents

Contents Overview 3

Table of Contents 5

Chapter 1 Introduction 18

1.1 Overview 18
1.2 Default Zones, Interfaces, and Ports 18
1.3 Management Overview 19
1.4 Web Configurator 20

1.4.1 Web Configurator Access 20
1.4.2 Web Configurator Screens Overview 21
1.4.3 Navigation Panel 24
1.4.4 Tables and Lists 28

1.5 Stopping the UAG 31

Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 32

2.1 Wall Mounting 32
2.2 Front Panel 33

2.2.1 Front Panel LEDs 34

2.3 Rear Panel 34

Chapter 3 Printer Deployment. 36

3.1 Overview 36
3.2 Attach the Printer to the UAG 36
3.3 Set up an Internet Connection on the UAG 36
3.4 Allow the UAG to Monitor and Manage the Printer 37
3.5 Turn on Web Authentication on the UAG 39
3.6 Generate a Free Guest Account 41

Chapter 4 Installation Setup Wizard 44

4.1 Installation Setup Wizard Screens 44

4.1.1 Internet Access Setup - WAN Interface 44
4.1.2 Internet Access: Ethernet 45
4.1.3 Internet Access: PPPoE 46
4.1.4 Internet Access: PPTP 48
4.1.5 Internet Access - Finish 49

4.2 Device Registration 50

Chapter 5

Quick Setup Wizards 52

5.1 Quick Setup Overview 52
5.2 WAN Interface Quick Setup 52

5.2.1 Choose an Ethernet Interface 53
5.2.2 Select WAN Type 53
5.2.3 Configure WAN IP Settings 54
5.2.4 ISP and WAN Connection Settings 54
5.2.5 Quick Setup Interface Wizard: Summary 56

Chapter 6

58

6.1 Overview 58
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 58

6.2 The Dashboard Screen 58

6.2.1 The CPU Usage Screen 63
6.2.2 The Memory Usage Screen 64
6.2.3 The Active Sessions Screen 64
6.2.4 The DHCP Table Screen 65
6.2.5 The Number of Login Users Screen 66

Chapter 7

Monitor 68

7.1 Overview 68
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 68
7.2 The Port Statistics Screen 69
7.2.1 The Port Statistics Graph Screen 70

7.3 The Interface Status Screen 71
7.4 The Traffic Statistics Screen 73
7.5 The Session Monitor Screen 75
7.6 The DDNS Status Screen 77
7.7 The IP/MAC Binding Monitor Screen 78
7.8 The Login Users Screen 79
7.9 The UPnP Port Status Screen 80
7.10 The USB Storage Screen 81
7.11 The Dynamic Guest Screen 82
7.12 The AP List Screen 84

7.12.1 Station Count of AP 85

7.13 The Radio List Screen 86
7.13.1 AP Mode Radio Information 88
7.14 The Station List Screen 89

7.15 The Printer Status Screen 90
7.16 The VPN 1-1 Mapping Status Screen 91

7.16.1 VPN 1-1 Mapping Statistics 92

7.17 The Log Screen 92

7.17.1 View AP Log 95
7.17.2 Dynamic Users Log 97

Chapter 8

Registration 99

8.1 Overview 99

8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 99
8.1.2 What you Need to Know 99

8.2 Registration Screen 100
8.3 Service Screen 100

Chapter 9

Wireless 102

9.1 Overview 102
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 102

9.2 Controller Screen 102
9.3 AP Management Screen 103

9.3.1 Edit AP List 104

Chapter 10

Interfaces 106

10.1 Interface Overview 106

10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 106
10.1.2 What You Need to Know 106

10.2 Port Role Screen 108
10.3 Ethernet Summary Screen 109

10.3.1 Ethernet Edit 111
10.3.2 Object References 117
10.3.3 Add/Edit DHCP Extended Options 118

10.4 PPP Interfaces 120

10.4.1 PPP Interface Summary 120
10.4.2 PPP Interface Add or Edit 122

10.5 VLAN Interfaces 126

10.5.1 VLAN Interface Summary Screen 127
10.5.2 VLAN Interface Add/Edit 128

10.6 Bridge Interfaces 133

10.6.1 Bridge Interface Summary 135
10.6.2 Bridge Interface Add/Edit 136

10.7 Virtual Interfaces 140

10.7.1 Virtual Interfaces Add/Edit 141
10.8 Interface Technical Reference 142

Chapter 11

Trunks 146

11.1 Overview 146

11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 146
11.1.2 What You Need to Know 146

11.2 The Trunk Summary Screen 149

11.2.1 Configuring a User-Defined Trunk 150
11.2.2 Configuring the System Default Trunk 152

Chapter 12

Policy and Static Routes 154

12.1 Policy and Static Routes Overview 154

12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 154
12.1.2 What You Need to Know 154

12.2 Policy Route Screen 156

12.2.1 Policy Route Edit Screen 158

12.3 IP Static Route Screen 161
12.3.1 Static Route Add/Edit Screen 162
12.4 Policy Routing Technical Reference 163

Chapter 13

Zones 164

13.1 Zones Overview 164

13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 164
13.1.2 What You Need to Know 164

13.2 The Zone Screen 165

13.2.1 Zone Edit 166

Chapter 14

DDNS 168

14.1 DDNS Overview 168

14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 168
14.1.2 What You Need to Know 168

14.2 The DDNS Screen 169

14.2.1 The Dynamic DNS Add/Edit Screen 170

Chapter 15

NAT 173

15.1 NAT Overview 173

15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 173

15.1.2 What You Need to Know 173
15.2 The NAT Screen 174
15.2.1 The NAT Add/Edit Screen 175
15.3 NAT Technical Reference 178

Chapter 16

VPN 1-1 Mapping 180

16.1 VPN 1-1 Mapping Overview 180

16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 180
16.1.2 What You Need to Know 180

16.2 The VPN 1-1 Mapping General Screen 181
16.2.1 The VPN 1-1 Mapping Edit Screen 182

16.3 The VPN 1-1 Mapping Profile Screen 183

Chapter 17

HTTP Redirect 185

17.1 Overview 185

17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 185
17.1.2 What You Need to Know 185

17.2 The HTTP Redirect Screen 186

17.2.1 The HTTP Redirect Edit Screen 187

Chapter 18

SMTP Redirect 189

18.1 Overview 189

18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 189
18.1.2 What You Need to Know 189

18.2 The SMTP Redirect Screen 190

18.2.1 The SMTP Redirect Edit Screen 191

Chapter 19

ALG 193

19.1 ALG Overview 193

19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 193
19.1.2 What You Need to Know 193
19.1.3 Before You Begin 194

19.2 The ALG Screen 194

Chapter 20

UPnP 195

20.1 Overview 195
20.2 What You Need to Know 195
20.2.1 NAT Traversal 195

20.2.2 Cautions with UPnP 196
20.3 UPnP Screen 196
20.4 Technical Reference 197
20.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example 197
20.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access 199

Chapter 21

IP/MAC Binding 202

21.1 IP/MAC Binding Overview 202

21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 202
21.1.2 What You Need to Know 202

21.2 IP/MAC Binding Summary 203

21.2.1 IP/MAC Binding Edit 203
21.2.2 Static DHCP Edit 205

21.3 IP/MAC Binding Exempt List 205

Chapter 22

Layer 2 Isolation 207

22.1 Overview 207
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 207

22.2 Layer-2 Isolation General Screen 208
22.3 White List 208
22.3.1 Add/Edit White List Rule 209

Chapter 23

IPnP 211

23.1 Overview 211
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 211
23.2 IPnP Screen 212

Chapter 24

Web Authentication 213

24.1 Overview 213

24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 213
24.1.2 What You Need to Know 214

24.2 Web Authentication Screen 214

24.2.1 Creating/Editing an Authentication Policy 220
24.2.2 User-aware Access Control Example 221

24.3 Walled Garden Screen 227

24.3.1 Adding/Editing a Walled Garden URL 228
24.3.2 Walled Garden Login Example 228

24.4 Advertisement Screen 229

24.4.1 Adding/Editing an Advertisement URL 230

Chapter 25

Firewall 232

25.1 Overview 232

25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 232
25.1.2 What You Need to Know 232

25.2 The Firewall Screen 234

25.2.1 Configuring the Firewall Screen 235
25.2.2 The Firewall Add/Edit Screen 237

25.3 The Session Control Screen 239
25.3.1 The Session Limit Add/Edit Screen 240

25.4 Firewall Rule Configuration Example 241
25.5 Firewall Rule Example Applications 243

Chapter 26

Billing 246

26.1 Overview 246

26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 246
26.1.2 What You Need to Know 246

26.2 The General Screen 247
26.3 The Billing Profile Screen 248

26.3.1 The Account Generator Screen 250
26.3.2 The Account Redeem Screen 253
26.3.3 The Billing Profile Add/Edit Screen 255

26.4 The Discount Screen 255
26.4.1 The Discount Add/Edit Screen 257
26.5 The Payment Service General Screen 257
26.5.1 The Payment Service Custom Service Screen 259

Chapter 27

Printer Manager 262

27.1 Overview 262
27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 262
27.2 The General Screen 262

27.3 The Printout Configuration Screen 264

27.3.1 Reports Overview 265
27.3.2 Key Combinations 265
27.3.3 Daily Account Summary 266
27.3.4 Monthly Account Summary 266
27.3.5 Account Report Notes 267
27.3.6 System Status 267

Chapter 28

Free Time 269

28.1 Overview 269
28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 269
28.2 The Free Time Screen 269

Chapter 29

SMS 273

29.1 Overview 273
29.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 273
29.2 The SMS Screen 273

Chapter 30

Bandwidth Management 275

30.1 Overview 275

30.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 275
30.1.2 What You Need to Know 275

30.2 The Bandwidth Management Screen 279
30.2.1 The Bandwidth Management Add/Edit Screen 281

Chapter 31

User/Group 285

31.1 Overview 285

31.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 285
31.1.2 What You Need To Know 285

31.2 User Summary Screen 287
31.2.1 User Add/Edit Screen 288
31.3 User Group Summary Screen 291
31.3.1 Group Add/Edit Screen 291

31.4 The User/Group Setting Screen 292

31.4.1 Default User Settings Edit Screens 295
31.4.2 User Aware Login Example 296

31.5 User /Group Technical Reference 297

Chapter 32

AP Profile 299

32.1 Overview 299

32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 299
32.1.2 What You Need To Know 299

32.2 Radio Screen 300
32.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile 302
32.3 SSID Screen 305
32.3.1 SSID List 305
32.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile 307
32.3.3 Security List 308

32.3.4 Add/Edit Security Profile 310
32.3.5 MAC Filter List 312
32.3.6 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile 313

Chapter 33

314

33.1 Overview 314

33.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 314
33.1.2 What You Need To Know 314

33.2 Address Summary Screen 314
33.2.1 Address Add/Edit Screen 315

33.3 Address Group Summary Screen 316

33.3.1 Address Group Add/Edit Screen 317

Chapter 34

Services 319

34.1 Overview 319

34.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 319
34.1.2 What You Need to Know 319

34.2 The Service Summary Screen 320
34.2.1 The Service Add/Edit Screen 321

34.3 The Service Group Summary Screen 322

34.3.1 The Service Group Add/Edit Screen 322

Chapter 35

Schedules 324

35.1 Overview 324

35.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 324
35.1.2 What You Need to Know 324

35.2 The Schedule Summary Screen 325

35.2.1 The One-Time Schedule Add/Edit Screen 326
35.2.2 The Recurring Schedule Add/Edit Screen 327

Chapter 36

AAA Server 328

36.1 Overview 328

36.1.1 RADIUS Server 328
36.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter 328
36.1.3 What You Need To Know 328

36.2 RADIUS Server Summary 329

36.2.1 Adding a RADIUS Server 329

Chapter 37

Authentication Method 332

37.1 Overview 332

37.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 332
37.1.2 Before You Begin 332

37.2 Authentication Method Objects 332

37.2.1 Creating an Authentication Method Object 333

Chapter 38

Certificates 335

38.1 Overview 335

38.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 335
38.1.2 What You Need to Know 335
38.1.3 Verifying a Certificate 337

38.2 The My Certificates Screen 338

38.2.1 The My Certificates Add Screen 339
38.2.2 The My Certificates Edit Screen 341
38.2.3 The My Certificates Import Screen 344

38.3 The Trusted Certificates Screen 345

38.3.1 The Trusted Certificates Edit Screen 346
38.3.2 The Trusted Certificates Import Screen 349

Chapter 39

ISP Accounts 351

39.1 Overview 351
39.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 351
39.2 ISP Account Summary 351
39.2.1 ISP Account Edit 352

Chapter 40

System 354

40.1 Overview 354
40.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 354
40.2 Host Name 355
40.3 USB Storage 355
40.4 Date and Time 356

40.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List 359
40.4.2 Time Server Synchronization 359

40.5 Console Port Speed 360
40.6 DNS Overview 361

40.6.1 DNS Server Address Assignment 361
40.6.2 Configuring the DNS Screen 361
40.6.3 Address Record 363
40.6.4 PTR Record 363
40.6.5 Adding an Address/PTR Record 363

40.6.6 Domain Zone Forwarder 364
40.6.7 Adding a Domain Zone Forwarder 364
40.6.8 MX Record 365
40.6.9 Adding a MX Record 365
40.6.10 Adding a DNS Service Control Rule 366

40.7 WWW Overview 367

40.7.1 Service Access Limitations 367
40.7.2 System Timeout 367
40.7.3 HTTPS 367
40.7.4 Configuring WWW Service Control 368
40.7.5 Service Control Rules 371
40.7.6 Customizing the WWW Login Page 372
40.7.7 HTTPS Example 376

40.8 SSH 383

40.8.1 How SSH Works 384
40.8.2 SSH Implementation on the UAG 385
40.8.3 Requirements for Using SSH 385
40.8.4 Configuring SSH 385
40.8.5 Secure Telnet Using SSH Examples 386

40.9 Telnet 388

40.9.1 Configuring Telnet 388

40.10 FTP 389

40.10.1 Configuring FTP 389

40.11 SNMP 390

40.11.1 Supported MIBs 391
40.11.2 SNMP Traps 392
40.11.3 Configuring SNMP 392

40.12 Language 394

Chapter 41

Log and Report 395

41.1 Overview 395
41.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter 395
41.2 Email Daily Report 395
41.3 Log Settings Screens 397

41.3.1 Log Settings Summary 398
41.3.2 Edit System Log Settings 399
41.3.3 Edit Log on USB Storage Setting 402
41.3.4 Edit Remote Server Log Settings 404
41.3.5 Log Category Settings Screen 406

Chapter 42

File Manager 410

42.1 Overview 410

42.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 410
42.1.2 What you Need to Know 410

42.2 The Configuration File Screen 412
42.3 The Firmware Package Screen 416
42.4 The Shell Script Screen 418

Chapter 43

Diagnostics 421

43.1 Overview 421
43.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 421
43.2 The Diagnostics Screen 421
43.2.1 The Diagnostics Files Screen 422
43.3 The Packet Capture Screen 423
43.3.1 The Packet Capture Files Screen 425
43.4 Core Dump Screen 426
43.4.1 Core Dump Files Screen 427
43.5 The System Log Screen 427

Chapter 44

Packet Flow Explore 429

44.1 Overview 429
44.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 429
44.2 The Routing Status Screen 429
44.3 The SNAT Status Screen 433

Chapter 45

Reboot 437

45.1 Overview 437
45.1.1 What You Need To Know 437
45.2 The Reboot Screen 437

Chapter 46

Shutdown 438

46.1 Overview 438
46.1.1 What You Need To Know 438
46.2 The Shutdown Screen 438

Chapter 47

Troubleshooting 439

47.1 Resetting the UAG 445
47.2 Getting More Troubleshooting Help 446

Appendix A Customer Support 447
Appendix B Legal Information 453
Index 459

Introduction

1.1 Overview

The UAG is a comprehensive service gateway. The UAG combines an IEEE 802.11n wireless access point, router, 4-port switch and service gateway in one box. If you have a "statement printer", such as SP350E, you can connect it directly to the UAG, allowing you to easily print subscriber statements. The UAG is ideal for offices, coffee shops, libraries, hotels and airport terminals catering to subscribers that seek Internet access. You should have an Internet account already set up and have been given usernames, passwords etc. required for Internet access.

You can use web authentication to allow guests to access the network only after they authenticate with the UAG through a specifically designated login web page. You can also forward the authenticated client's e-mail messages to a specific SMTP server.

The UAG also provides bandwidth management, NAT, port forwarding, policy routing, DHCP server and many other powerful features. The UAG's security features include firewall and certificates.

The UAG lets you set up multiple networks for your company. The UAG also provides two separate LAN networks. You can set ports to be part of the LAN1 or LAN2. Alternatively, you can deploy the UAG as a transparent firewall in an existing network with minimal configuration.

1.2 Default Zones, Interfaces, and Ports

The default configurations for zones, interfaces, and ports are as follows. References to interfaces may be generic rather than the specific name used in your model. For example, this guide may use "the WAN interface" rather than "P1".

Zones

Interfaces

Physical Ports

Figure 1 Zones, Interfaces, and Physical Ethernet Ports

1.3 Management Overview

You can manage the UAG in the following ways.

Web Configurator

The Web Configurator allows easy UAG setup and management using an Internet browser. This User's Guide provides information about the Web Configurator.

Figure 2 Managing the UAG: Web Configurator

Command-Line Interface (CLI)

The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the UAG. Access it using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet) or via the physical or Web Configurator console port. See the Command Reference Guide for CLI details. The default settings for the console port are:

Table 1 Console Port Default Settings

SETTING	VALUE
Speed	115200 bps
Data Bits	8
Parity	None
Stop Bit	1
Flow Control	Off

1.4 Web Configurator

In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:

• Use one of the following web browser versions or later: Internet Explorer 6.0, Firefox 8.0, Chrome 14.0, Safari 4.0.
• Allow pop-up windows (blocked by default in Windows XP Service Pack 2).
• Enable JavaScripts, Java permissions, and cookies.

The recommended screen resolution is 1024 × 768 pixels.

1.4.1 Web Configurator Access

1 Make sure your UAG hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.
2 In your browser go to http://172.16.0.1 or http://172.17.0.1. The Login screen appears.

3 Type the user name (default: "admin") and password (default: "1234").
4 Click Login. If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Update Admin Info screen appears. Otherwise, the dashboard appears.

5 Follow the directions in the Update Admin Info screen. If you change the default password, the Login screen appears after you click Apply. If you click Ignore, the Installation Setup Wizard opens if the UAG is using its default configuration; otherwise the dashboard appears.

1.4.2 Web Configurator Screens Overview

The Web Configurator screen is divided into these parts (as illustrated on page 21):

A - title bar
B - navigation panel
C - main window

1.4.2.1 Title Bar

Figure 3 Title Bar

The title bar icons in the upper right corner provide the following functions.

Table 2 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Logout	Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.
Help	Click this to open the help page for the current screen.
About	Click this to display basic information about the UAG.
Site Map	Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens.
Object Reference	Click this to check which configuration items reference an object.
Console	Click this to open a Java-based console window from which you can run command line interface (CLI) commands. You will be prompted to enter your user name and password. See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands.
CLI	Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator to the UAG.

About

Click About to display basic information about the UAG.

Figure 4 About

The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.

Table 3 About

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Boot Module	This shows the version number of the software that handles the booting process of the UAG.
Current Version	This shows the firmware version of the UAG.
Released Date	This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released.
OK	Click this to close the screen.

Site Map

Click Site MAP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screen's link to go to that screen.

Figure 5 Site Map

Object Reference

Click Object Reference to open the Object Reference screen. Select the type of object and the individual object and click Refresh to show which configuration settings reference the object.

Figure 6 Object Reference

The fields vary with the type of object. The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.

Table 4 Object References

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Object Name	This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click the object's name to display the object's configuration screen in the main window.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Service	This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a service's name to display the service's configuration screen in the main window.
Priority	If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration item's position in its list, otherwise N/A displays.
Name	This field identifies the configuration item that references the object.
Description	If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here.
Refresh	Click this to update the information in this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to close the screen.

CLI Messages

Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. Open the pop-up window and then click some menus in the web configurator to dislay the corresponding commands.

Figure 7 CLI Messages

Click Clear to remove the currently displayed information.

See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands.

1.4.3 Navigation Panel

Use the navigation panel menu items to open status and configuration screens. Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the panel or drag to resize it. The following sections introduce the UAG's navigation panel menus and their screens.

Figure 8 Navigation Panel

Dashboard

The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, licensed service status, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. See Chapter 6 on page 58 for details on the dashboard.

Monitor Menu

The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information.

Table 5 Monitor Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
System Status
Port Statistics		Display packet statistics for each physical port.
Interface Status		Display general interface information and packet statistics.
Traffic Statistics		Collect and display traffic statistics.
Session Monitor		Display the status of all current sessions.
DDNS Status		Display the status of the UAG's DDNS domain names.
IP/MAC Binding		List the devices that have received an IP address from UAG interfaces using IP/MAC binding.
Login Users		List the users currently logged into the UAG.
UPnP Port Status		List the NAT port mapping rules that UPnP creates on the UAG.
USB Storage		Display details about a USB device connected to the UAG.
Dynamic Guest		List the dynamic guest accounts in the UAG's local database.
Wireless
AP Information	AP List	Display information about the connected APs.
	Radio List	Display information about the radios of the connected APs.
Station Info	Station List	Display information about the connected stations.
Printer Status
Printer Status		Display information about the connected statement printers.
VPN 1-1 Mapping
VPN 1-1 Mapping		Display the status of the active users to which the UAG applied a VPN 1-1 mapping rule.
Statistics		Display statistics for each of the VPN 1-1 mapping rules.
Log		List log entries.
View Log		List log entries for the UAG.
View AP Log		Allow you to query connected APs and view log entries for them.
Dynamic Users Log		Display the UAG's dynamic guest account log messages.

Configuration Menu

Use the configuration menu screens to configure the UAG's features.

Table 6 Configuration Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
Quick Setup		Quickly configure WAN interfaces.
Licensing
Registration	Registration	Register the device and activate trial services.
	Service	View the licensed service status and upgrade licensed services.
Wireless
Controller	Configuration	Configure how the UAG handles APs that newly connect to the network.
AP Management	Mgmt. AP List	Edit wireless AP information, remove APs, and reboot them.
Network
Interface	Port Role	Use this screen to set the UAG's flexible ports as LAN1 or LAN2.
	Ethernet	Manage Ethernet interfaces and virtual Ethernet interfaces.
	PPP	Create and manage PPPoE and PPTP interfaces.
	VLAN	Create and manage VLAN interfaces and virtual VLAN interfaces.
	Bridge	Create and manage bridges and virtual bridge interfaces.
	Trunk	Create and manage trunks (groups of interfaces) for load balancing.
Routing	Policy Route	Create and manage routing policies.
	Static Route	Create and manage IP static routing information.
Zone		Configure zones used to define various policies.
DDNS		Define and manage the UAG's DDNS domain names.
NAT		Set up and manage port forwarding rules.
VPN 1-1 Mapping	General	Enable and configure VPN 1-1 mapping to assign a public IP address to each of users that match the rules.
	Profile	Configure a pool profile which defines the public IP address that the UAG assigns to the matched users and the interface through which the user's traffic is forwarded.
HTTP Redirect		Set up and manage HTTP redirection rules.
SMTP Redirect		Set up and manage SMTP redirection rules.
ALG		Configure SIP, H.323, and FTP pass-through settings.
UPnP		enable UPnP and NAT-PMP on your UAG.
IP/MAC Binding	Summary	Configure IP to MAC address bindings for devices connected to each supported interface.
	Exempt List	Configure ranges of IP addresses to which the UAG does not apply IP/MAC binding.
Layer 2 Isolation	General	Enable layer-2 isolation on the UAG and the internal interface(s).
	White List	Enable and configure the white list.
IPnP		Enable IPnP on the UAG and the internal interface(s).
Web Authentication	Web Authentication	Define rules to force user authentication for network access.
	Walled Garden	Create walled garden links that display in the login screen.
	Advertisement	Enable and set advertisement links.
Firewall	Firewall	Create and manage level-3 traffic rules.
	Session Limit	Limit the number of concurrent client NAT/firewall sessions.
Billing	General	Configure the general billing settings, such as the accounting method.
	Billing Profile	Configure the billing profiles for the web-based account generator and each button on the connected statement printer.
	Discount	Configure discount price plans.
	Payment Service	Enable online payment service and configure the service pages.
Printer Manager	General	Configure the printer list and enable printer management.
	Printout Configuration	Customize the account printout.
Free Time	Free Time	Allow users to get a free account for Internet surfing during the specified time period.
SMS	SMS	Enable the SMS service to send dynamic guest account information in text messages.
BWM	BWM	Enable and configure bandwidth management rules.
Object
User/Group	User	Create and manage users.
	Group	Create and manage groups of users.
	Setting	Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user sessions, and rules to force user authentication.
AP Profile	Radio	Create and manage wireless radio settings files that can be associated with different APs.
	SSID	Create and manage wirelessSSID, security, and MAC filtering settings files that can be associated with different APs.
Address	Address	Create and manage host, range, and network (subset) addresses.
	Address Group	Create and manage groups of addresses.
Service	Service	Create and manage TCP and UDP services.
	Service Group	Create and manage groups of services.
Schedule	Schedule	Create one-time and recurring schedules.
AAA Server	RADIUS	Configure the RADIUS settings.
Auth. Method	Authentication Method	Create and manage ways of authenticating users.
Certificate	My Certificates	Create and manage the UAG's certificates.
	Trusted Certificates	Import and manage certificates from trusted sources.
ISP Account	ISP Account	Create and manage ISP account information for PPPoE/PPTP interfaces.
System
Host Name		Configure the system and domain name for the UAG.
USB Storage	Settings	Configure the settings for the connected USB devices.
Date/Time		Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the UAG.
Console Speed		Set the console speed.
DNS		Configure the DNS server and address records for the UAG.
WWW	Service Control	Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication.
	Login Page	Configure how the login and access user screens look.
SSH		Configure SSH server and SSH service settings.
TELNET		Configure telnet server settings for the UAG.
FTP		Configure FTP server settings.
SNMP		Configure SNMP communities and services.
Language		Select the Web Configurator language.
Log & Report
Email Daily Report		Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to send.
Log Settings		Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers.

Maintenance Menu

Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and reboot or shut down the UAG.

Table 7 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
File Manager	Configuration File	Manage and upload configuration files for the UAG.
	Firmware Package	View the current firmware version and to upload firmware.
	Shell Script	Manage and run shell script files for the UAG.
Diagnostics	Diagnostics	Collect diagnostic information.
	Packet Capture	Capture packets for analysis.
	Core Dump	Connect a USB device to the UAG and save the UAG operating system kernel to it here.
	System Log	Connect a USB device to the UAG and archive the UAG system logs to it here.
Packet Flow Explore	Routing Status	Check how the UAG determines where to route a packet.
	SNAT Status	View a clear picture on how the UAG converts a packet's source IP address and check the related settings.
Reboot		Restart the UAG.
Shutdown		Turn off the UAG.

1.4.4 Tables and Lists

Web Configurator tables and lists are flexible with several options for how to display their entries.

Click a column heading to sort the table's entries according to that column's criteria.

Figure 9 Sorting Table Entries by a Column's Criteria

Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries. The options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples of what you can do:

• Sort in ascending or descending (reverse) alphabetical order
• Select which columns to display
• Group entries by field
• Show entries in groups
• Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text

Figure 10 Common Table Column Options

Select a column heading cell's right border and drag to re-size the column.

Figure 11 Resizing a Table Column

Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark displays next to the column's title when you drag the column to a valid new location.

Figure 12 Moving Columns

Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and control how many entries display at a time.

Figure 13 Navigating Pages of Table Entries

The tables have icons for working with table entries. You can often use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate.

Figure 14 Common Table Icons

Here are descriptions for the most common table icons.

Table 8 Common Table Icons

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry's position in the numbered list is important (features where the UAG applies the table's entries in order like the firewall for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Connect	To connect an entry, select it and click Connect.
Disconnect	To disconnect an entry, select it and click Disconnect.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to check which settings use the entry.
Move	To change an entry's position in a numbered list, select it and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that entry and press [ENTER] to move the entry to the number that you typed. For example, if you type 6, the entry you are moving becomes number 6 and the previous entry 6 (if there is one) gets pushed up (or down) one.

Working with Lists

When a list of available entries displays next to a list of selected entries, you can often just double-click an entry to move it from one list to the other. In some lists you can also use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries, and then use the arrow button to move them to the other list.

Figure 15 Working with Lists

1.5 Stopping the UAG

Always use Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or the shutdown command before you turn off the UAG or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.

Hardware Installation and Connection

2.1 Wall Mounting

You may need screw anchors if mounting on a concrete or brick wall.

Table 9 Wall Mounting Information

Distance between holes	206 mm
Self-tapping screws (Diameter: 3 mm)	Two
Screw anchors (optional)	Two

1 Select a position free of obstructions on a wall strong enough to hold the weight of the device.
2 Mark two holes on the wall at the appropriate distance apart for the screws.

Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws.

3 If using screw anchors, drill two holes for the screw anchors into the wall. Push the anchors into the full depth of the holes, then insert the screws into the anchors. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave a small gap of about 0.5cm .
If not using screw anchors, use a screwdriver to insert the screws into the wall. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave a gap of about 0.5cm .
4 Make sure the screws are fastened well enough to hold the weight of the UAG with the connection cables.
5 Align the holes on the back of the UAG with the screws on the wall. Hang the UAG on the screws.

Figure 16 Wall Mounting Example

2.2 Front Panel

This section introduces the UAG's front panel.

Figure 17 UAG Front Panel

1000Base-T Ports

The 1000Base-T auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports support 10/100/1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet so the speed can be 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps. The duplex mode is full at 1000 Mbps and half or full at 10/100 Mbps. An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100/1000 Mbps) and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device. An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or crossover Ethernet cable. The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the UAG are speed: auto, duplex: auto, and flow control: on (you cannot configure the flow control setting, but the UAG can negotiate with the peer and turn it off if needed).

USB 2.0 Ports

Connect a USB storage device to a USB port on the UAG to archive the UAG system logs or save the UAG operating system kernel to it.

2.2.1 Front Panel LEDs

The following tables describe the LEDs.

Table 10 Front Panel LEDs

LED	COLOR	STATUS	DESCRIPTION
PWR		Off	The UAG is turned off.
	Green	On	The UAG is turned on.
	Red	On	There is a hardware component failure. Shut down the device, wait for a few minutes and then restart the device (see Section 1.5 on page 31). If the LED turns red again, then please contact your vendor.
SYS	Green	Off	The UAG is not ready or has failed.
		On	The UAG is ready and running.
		Blinking	The UAG is booting.
	Red	On	The UAG had an error or has failed.
WLAN	Green	On	The wireless network is activated.
		Blinking	The UAG is communicating with other wireless clients.
		Off	The wireless network is not activated.
P1~P5	Green	On	This port has a successful link to a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet network
		Blinking	The UAG is sending or receiving packets to/from a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet network on this port
	Orange	On	This port has a successful link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network.
		Blinking	The UAG is sending or receiving packets to/from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network on this port
		Off	There is no connection on this port.

2.3 Rear Panel

The following figure shows the rear panel of the UAG. The rear panel contains a console port, a power switch and a connector for the power receptacle and four antennas.

Figure 18 Rear Panel
Radio 1 (2.4 GHz)

Console Port

Connect this port to your computer (using an RS-232 cable) if you want to configure the UAG using the command line interface (CLI) via the console port.

For local management, you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters:

• VT100 terminal emulation
  115200 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control

Connect the male 9-pin end of the RS-232 console cable to the console port of the UAG. Connect the female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.

Printer Deployment

3.1 Overview

This chapter shows you how to set up an external statement printer (SP350E for example) and deploy it in your network with the UAG.

In the following examples, you will:

• Attach the printer to the UAG.
• Set up an Internet connection on the UAG.
• Allow the UAG to monitor and manage the printer.
• Turn on web authentication on the UAG.
• Generate a free guest account.

3.2 Attach the Printer to the UAG

This section uses the SP350E as an example. Refer to the printer documentation for detailed information about paper loading.

1 Connect the Ethernet port of the printer to one LAN port of the UAG.
2 Connect the power socket of the printer to a power outlet. Turn on the printer.

The printer is acting as a DHCP client by default and will obtain an IP address from the connected UAG. Make sure the UAG is turned on already and the DHCP server is enabled on its LAN interface(s).

3.3 Set up an Internet Connection on the UAG

1 Connect the WAN port of the UAG to a broadband modem or router.
2 Connect your compurt to one of the available LAN port on the UAG.
3 Log into the UAG web configurator. See Section 1.4 on page 20 on how to access the web configurator.
4 Enter your Internet access information to set up a Internet connection. See Chapter 4 on page 44 for detailed information on how to use the setup wizard.

3.4 Allow the UAG to Monitor and Manage the Printer

Before you add the printer to the UAG's printer list, check the sticker on the printer's rear panel to see its MAC address.

1 Go to the Dashboard of the UAG web configurator.

2 Open the DHCP Table to find the IP address that is assigned to the printer's MAC address. Make sure the IP address is reserved for the printer. Write down the printer's IP address.

3 Go to the Configuration > Printer Manager screen. Click Add in the Printer List to create a new entry for your printer.

4 After the printer's IP address is added to the printer list, select the Enable Printer Manager checkbox and then click Apply.

5 Go to the Monitor > Printer Status screen to check if the UAG can connect to the printer (the printer status is sync success).

Note: You may need to wait up to 90 seconds for the UAG to synchronize with the printer successfully after you click Apply in the the Configuration > Printer Manager screen.

3.5 Turn on Web Authentication on the UAG

With web authentication, users need to log in through a designated web page before they can access the network(s).

1 Go to the Configuration > Web Authentication screen.

2 Set Authentication to Web Portal.
3 Select Internal Web Portal to use the default login page.
4 Click Add to create a new web authentication policy.

5 The Auth. Policy Add screen displays. Set Authentication to required and select Force User Authentication to redirect all HTTP traffic to the default login page.
6 Click OK to save your changes.

7 Click Apply the Configuration > Web Authentication screen.

3.6 Generate a Free Guest Account

You can use the buttons on the printer or web-based account generator to create guest accounts based on the pre-defined billing settings (see Section 26.3 on page 248).

1 Go to the Configuration > Free Time screen.
2 Select the Enable Free Time checkbox to turn on this feature. Click Apply.

3 Whenever a user tries to access a web page, he/she will be redirect to the default login page.
4 Click the link on the login page to get a free guest account.

5 A Welcome screen displays. Select the free time service. Click OK to generate and show the account information on the web page.

6 Now you can use this account to access the Internet through the UAG for free.

Welcome

You may now use the internet.

IMPORTANT! MAKE a note for your case-sensitive username and password for logging later. This will be your only opportunity to do so.

This is your account information, please keep this for your internet service.

Your username is ipuiip

Your password is 5x96kr

Your time period is 30 minutes

Login Now

Installation Setup Wizard

4.1 Installation Setup Wizard Screens

When you log into the Web Configurator for the first time or when you reset the UAG to its default configuration, the Installation Setup Wizard screen displays. This wizard helps you configure Internet connection settings and activate subscription services. This chapter provides information on configuring the Web Configurator's installation setup wizard. See the feature-specific chapters in this User's Guide for background information.

Figure 19 Installation Setup Wizard

• Click the double arrow in the upper right corner to display or hide the help.
• Click Go to Dashboard to skip the installation setup wizard or click Next to start configuring for Internet access.

4.1.1 Internet Access Setup - WAN Interface

Use this screen to set the WAN interface's type of encapsulation and method of IP address assignment.

The screens vary depending on the encapsulation type. Refer to information provided by your ISP to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you don't have that information.

Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you.

Figure 20 Internet Access: Step 1

• Encapsulation: Choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Otherwise, choose PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE) or PPTP for a dial-up connection according to the information from your ISP.
• First WAN Interface: This is the interface you are configuring for Internet access.
• Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection belong.
• IP Address Assignment: Select Auto if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select Static if the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.

4.1.2 Internet Access: Ethernet

This screen is read-only if you set the previous screen's IP Address Assignment field to Auto. Use this screen to configure your IP address settings.

Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as given to you by your ISP.

Figure 21 Internet Access: Ethernet Encapsulation

• Encapsulation: This displays the type of Internet connection you are configuring.
• First WAN Interface: This is the number of the interface that will connect with your ISP.
• Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection will belong.
• IP Address: Enter your (static) public IP address. Auto displays if you selected Auto as the IP Address Assignment in the previous screen.

The following fields display if you selected static IP address assignment.

• IP Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask for this WAN connection's IP address.
• Gateway IP Address: Enter the IP address of the router through which this WAN connection will send traffic (the default gateway).
• First / Second DNS Server: These fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. Enter a DNS server's IP address(es). The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The UAG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers.

4.1.3 Internet Access: PPPoE

Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as given to you by your ISP.

Figure 22 Internet Access: PPPoE Encapsulation

4.1.3.1 ISP Parameters

• Type the PPPoE Service Name from your service provider. PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server. You can use alphanumeric and -@@/. characters, and it can be up to 64 characters long.

• Authentication Type - Select an authentication protocol for outgoing connection requests. Options are:

• CHAP/PAP - Your UAG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by the remote node.

• CHAP - Your UAG accepts CHAP only.
• PAP - Your UAG accepts PAP only.
• MSCHAP - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP only.

• MSCHAP-V2 - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only.

• Type the User Name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -@@/. characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long.

• Type the Password associated with the user name. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except the [ ] and ? . This field can be blank.
• Select Nailed-Up if you do not want the connection to time out. Otherwise, type the Idle Timeout in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.

4.1.3.2 WAN IP Address Assignments

• First WAN Interface: This is the name of the interface that will connect with your ISP.
• Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection will belong.

• IP Address: Enter your (static) public IP address. Auto displays if you selected Auto as the IP Address Assignment in the previous screen.

• First / Second DNS Server: These fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. Enter a DNS server's IP address(es). The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The UAG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it.

4.1.4 Internet Access: PPTP

Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as given to you by your ISP.

Figure 23 Internet Access: PPTP Encapsulation

4.1.4.1 ISP Parameters

• Authentication Type - Select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:

• CHAP/PAP - Your UAG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by the remote node.

• CHAP - Your UAG accepts CHAP only.
• PAP - Your UAG accepts PAP only.
• MSCHAP - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP only.

• MSCHAP-V2 - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only.

• Type the User Name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -@@/. characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long.

• Type the Password associated with the user name. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except the [ ] and ? . This field can be blank. Re-type your password in the next field to confirm it.
• Select Nailed-Up if you do not want the connection to time out. Otherwise, type the Idle Timeout in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPTP server.

4.1.4.2 PPTP Configuration

• Base Interface: This identifies the Ethernet interface you configure to connect with a modem or router.
• Type a Base IP Address (static) assigned to you by your ISP.
• Type the IP Subnet Mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).
• Gateway IP Address: Enter the IP address of the gateway if any.
• Server IP: Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
• Type a Connection ID or connection name. It must follow the "c:id" and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP. This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your broadband modem or router. You can use alphanumeric and -_: characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long.

4.1.4.3 WAN IP Address Assignments

• First WAN Interface: This is the connection type on the interface you are configuring to connect with your ISP.
• Zone This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection will belong.
• IP Address: Enter your (static) public IP address. Auto displays if you selected Auto as the IP Address Assignment in the previous screen.
• First / Second DNS Server: These fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. Enter a DNS server's IP address(es). The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The UAG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers.

4.1.5 Internet Access - Finish

You have set up your UAG to access the Internet. A screen displays with your settings. If they are not correct, click Back.

Figure 24 Internet Access Succeed: Ethernet Encapsulation

Click Next and use the following screen to perform a basic registration (see Section 4.2 on page 50).

Alternatively, close the window to exit the wizard.

4.2 Device Registration

Go to http://portal.myZyXEL.com with the UAG's serial number and LAN MAC address to register it if you have not already done so.

Note: You must be connected to the Internet to register. Use the Registration > Service screen to update your service subscription status.

Figure 25 Registration

Quick Setup Wizards

5.1 Quick Setup Overview

The Web Configurator's quick setup wizards help you configure Internet connection settings. This chapter provides information on configuring the quick setup screens in the Web Configurator. See the feature-specific chapters in this User's Guide for background information.

In the Web Configurator, click Configuration > Quick Setup to open the first Quick Setup screen.

Figure 26 Quick Setup

WAN Interface

Click this link to open a wizard to set up a WAN (Internet) connection. This wizard creates matching ISP account settings in the UAG if you use PPPoE or PPTP. See Section 5.2 on page 52.

5.2 WAN Interface Quick Setup

Click WAN Interface in the main Quick Setup screen to open the WAN Interface Quick Setup Wizard Welcome screen. Use these screens to configure an interface to connect to the Internet. Click Next.

Figure 27 WAN Interface Quick Setup Wizard

5.2.1 Choose an Ethernet Interface

Select the Ethernet interface that you want to configure for a WAN connection and click Next.

Figure 28 Choose an Ethernet Interface

5.2.2 Select WAN Type

WAN Type Selection: Select the type of encapsulation this connection is to use. Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.

Otherwise, choose PPPoE or PPTP for a dial-up connection according to the information from your ISP.

Figure 29 WAN Interface Setup: Step 2

The screens vary depending on what encapsulation type you use. Refer to information provided by your ISP to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you don't have that information.

Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you.

5.2.3 Configure WAN IP Settings

Use this screen to select whether the interface should use a fixed or dynamic IP address.

Figure 30 WAN Interface Setup: Step 2

• WAN Interface: This is the interface you are configuring for Internet access.
• Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection belong.
• IP Address Assignment: Select Auto If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select Static if you have a fixed IP address.

5.2.4 ISP and WAN Connection Settings

Use this screen to configure the ISP and WAN interface settings. This screen is read-only if you select Ethernet and set the IP Address Assignment to Auto. If you set the IP Address Assignment to Static and/or select PPTP or PPPoE, enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you.

Figure 31 WAN and ISP Connection Settings: (PPTP Shown)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 11 WAN and ISP Connection Settings

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameter	This section appears if the interface uses a PPPoE or PPTP Internet connection.
Encapsulation	This displays the type of Internet connection you are configuring.
Authentication Type	Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are: CHAP/PAP - Your UAG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP - Your UAG accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your UAG accepts PAP only. MSCHAP - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP only. MSCHAP-V2 - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only.
User Name	Type the user name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -@@$ ./ characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long.
Password	Type the password associated with the user name above. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except the [] and ?. This field can be blank.
Retype to Confirm	Type your password again for confirmation.
Nailed-Up	Select Nailed-Up if you do not want the connection to time out.
Idle Timeout	Type the time in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. 0 means no timeout.
PPTP Configuration	This section only appears if the interface uses a PPPoE or PPTP Internet connection.
Base Interface	This displays the identity of the Ethernet interface you configure to connect with a modem or router.
Base IP Address	Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
IP Subnet Mask	Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).
Gateway IP Address	This field only displays for an interface with a static IP address. Enter the IP address of the gateway device.
Server IP	Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID	Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id" and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP. This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your DSL modem. You can use alphanumeric and - : characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long.
WAN Interface Setup
WAN Interface	This displays the identity of the interface you configure to connect with your ISP.
Zone	This field displays to which security zone this interface and Internet connection will belong.
IP Address	This field is read-only when the WAN interface uses a dynamic IP address. If your WAN interface uses a static IP address, enter it in this field.
Gateway IP Address	This field only displays for an interface with a static IP address. Enter the gateway's IP address.
First DNS Server Second DNS Server	These fields only display for an interface with a static IP address. Enter the DNS server IP address(es) in the field(s) to the right.Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it.DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The UAG uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to continue.

5.2.5 Quick Setup Interface Wizard: Summary

This screen displays the WAN interface's settings.

Figure 32 Interface Wizard: Summary WAN (Ethernet Shown)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 12 Interface Wizard: Summary WAN

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation	This displays what encapsulation this interface uses to connect to the Internet.
Service Name	This field only appears for a PPPoE interface. It displays the PPPoE service name specified in the ISP account.
Server IP	This field only appears for a PPTP interface. It displays the IP address of the PPTP server.
User Name	This is the user name given to you by your ISP.
Nailed-Up	If No displays the connection will not time out. Yes means the UAG uses the idle timeout.
Idle Timeout	This is how many seconds the connection can be idle before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. 0 means no timeout.
Connection ID	If you specified a connection ID, it displays here.
WAN Interface	This identifies the interface you configure to connect with your ISP.
Zone	This field displays to which security zone this interface and Internet connection will belong.
IP Address Assignment	This field displays whether the WAN IP address is static or dynamic (Auto).
IP Address	This field displays the WAN IP address.
IP Subnet Mask	This field only appears for an Ethernet interface. It displays the interface's IP subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address	This field only appears for an Ethernet interface. It displays the IP address of the gateway.
First DNS Server Second DNS Server	If the IP Address Assignment is Static, these fields display the DNS server IP address(es).
Close	Click Close to exit the wizard.

6.1 Overview

Use the Dashboard screens to check status information about the UAG.

6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the Dashboard screens for the following.

• Use the main Dashboard screen (see Section 6.2 on page 58) to see the UAG's general device information, system status, system resource usage, licensed service status, and interface status. You can also display other status screens for more information.
• Use the DHCP Table screen (see Section 6.2.4 on page 65) to look at the IP addresses currently assigned to DHCP clients and the IP addresses reserved for specific MAC addresses.
• Use the Number of Login Users screen (see Section 6.2.5 on page 66) to look at a list of the users currently logged into the UAG.

6.2 The Dashboard Screen

The Dashboard screen displays when you log into the UAG or click Dashboard in the navigation panel. The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, licensed service status, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets.

Figure 33 Dashboard

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 13 Dashboard

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Widget Settings (A)	Use this link to open or close widgets by selecting/clearing the associated checkbox.
Up Arrow (B)	Click this to collapse a widget. It then becomes a down arrow. Click it again to enlarge the widget again.
Refresh Time Setting (C)	Set the interval for refreshing the information displayed in the widget.
Refresh Now (D)	Click this to update the widget's information immediately.
Close Widget (E)	Click this to close the widget. Use Widget Setting to re-open it.
Virtual Device	You can select to view the front panel or the rear panel.Hover your cursor over a LED, connected slot or Ethernet port or console port to view details about the status of the UAG's panel LEDs and connections. See Section 2.2.1 on page 34 for LED descriptions. An unconnected interface or slot appears grayed out.You can also see which antennas are for radio 1 (2.4 GHz WLAN) and which antennas are for radio 2 (5 GHz WLAN) on the rear panel.
	The following labels display when you hover your cursor over an Ethernet port, USB port or console port.
Name	This field displays the name of each interface.
Slot	This field displays the name of each extension slot.
Device	This field displays the name of the device connected to the USB port if one is connected.
Status	This field displays the current status of each interface or device installed in a slot. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is.Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled.Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected Speed / Duplex - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half).Ready - The USB port is connected.
Zone	This field displays the zone to which the interface is currently assigned.
IP Address/Mask	This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface.
Console speed	This field displays the current console port speed.
Device Information
System Name	This field displays the name used to identify the UAG on any network. Click the icon to open the screen where you can change it.
Model Name	This field displays the model name of this UAG.
Serial Number	This field displays the serial number of this UAG. The serial number is used for device tracking and control.
MAC Address Range	This field displays the MAC addresses used by the UAG. Each physical port has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to physical port 1, the second MAC address is assigned to physical port 2, and so on.
Firmware Version	This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the UAG is currently running. Click the icon to open the screen where you can upload firmware.
System Status
System Uptime	This field displays how long the UAG has been running since it last restarted or was turned on.
Current Date/Time	This field displays the current date and time in the UAG. The format is yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss. Click the icon to open the screen where you can configure the UAG's date and time.
DHCP Table	Click this to look at the IP addresses currently assigned to the UAG's DHCP clients and the IP addresses reserved for specific MAC addresses. See Section 6.2.4 on page 65.
Current Login User	This field displays the user name used to log in to the current session, the amount of reauthentication time remaining, and the amount of lease time remaining.
Number of Login Users	This field displays the number of users currently logged in to the UAG. Click the icon to pop-open a list of the users who are currently logged in to the UAG.
Boot Status	This field displays details about the UAG's startup state. OK - The UAG started up successfully. Firmware update OK - A firmware update was successful. Problematic configuration after firmware update - The application of the configuration failed after a firmware upgrade. System default configuration - The UAG successfully applied the system default configuration. This occurs when the UAG starts for the first time or you intentionally reset the UAG to the system default settings. Fallback to lastgood configuration - The UAG was unable to apply the startup-config.conf configuration file and fell back to the lastgood.conf configuration file. Fallback to system default configuration - The UAG was unable to apply the lastgood.conf configuration file and fell back to the system default configuration file (system-default.conf). Booting in progress - The UAG is still applying the system configuration.
Interface Status Summary	If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is displayed in light gray text.
Name	This field displays the name of each interface.
Status	This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is. For Ethernet interfaces: Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled. Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected. Up - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. For PPP interfaces: Connected - The PPP interface is connected. Disconnected - The PPP interface is not connected. If the PPP interface is disabled, it does not appear in the list.
Zone	This field displays the zone to which the interface is currently assigned.
IP Addr/Netmask	This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask via DHCP. If this interface is a member of an active virtual router, this field displays the IP address it is currently using. This is either the static IP address of the interface (if it is the master) or the management IP address (if it is a backup).
IP Assignment	This field displays how the interface gets its IP address. Static - This interface has a static IP address. DHCP Client - This Ethernet interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server. Dynamic - This PPP interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server.
Action	Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server. Click the Connect icon to have the UAG try to connect a PPPoE/PPTP interface. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to update its IP address, this field displays n/a. Click the Disconnect icon to stop a PPPoE/PPTP connection.
Extension Slot	This section of the screen displays the status of the USB ports.
#	This field displays how many USB ports there are.
Extension Slot	This field displays the name of each extension slot.
Device	This field displays the name of the device connected to the extension slot (or none if no device is detected).
Status	Ready - A USB storage device connected to the UAG is ready for the UAG to use. none - The UAG is unable to mount a USB storage device connected to the UAG.
Licensed Service Status
#	This shows how many licensed services there are.
Status	This is the current status of the license.
Name	This identifies the licensed service.
Version	This is the version number of the service.
Expiration	If the service license is valid, this shows when it will expire. n/a displays if the service license does not have a limited period of validity. 0 displays if the service is not licensed or has expired.
System Resources
CPU Usage	This field displays what percentage of the UAG's processing capability is currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show CPU Usage icon that takes you to a chart of the UAG's recent CPU usage.
Memory Usage	This field displays what percentage of the UAG's RAM is currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show Memory Usage icon that takes you to a chart of the UAG's recent memory usage.
Flash Usage	This field displays what percentage of the UAG's onboard flash memory is currently being used.
USB Storage Usage	This field shows how much storage in the USB device connected to the UAG is in use.
Active Sessions	This field displays how many traffic sessions are currently open on the UAG. These are all sessions, established and non-established, that pass through/from/to/within the UAG. Hover your cursor over this field to display icons. Click the Detail icon to go to the Session Monitor screen to see details about the active sessions. Click the Show Active Sessions icon to display a chart of UAG's recent session usage.
AP Information	This shows a summary of connected wireless Access Points (APs).
All AP	This section displays a summary for all connected wireless APs. Click the link to go to the AP information > AP List screen.
Online Management AP	This displays the number of currently connected management APs.
Offline Management AP	This displays the number of currently offline managed APs.
Un- Management AP	This displays the number of non-managed APs.
All Station	This section displays a summary of connected stations. Click the link to go to the Station Info > Station List screen.
Station	This displays the number of stations currently connected to the network.
Top 5 Station	Displays the top 5 Access Points (AP) with the highest number of station (aka wireless client) connections.
#	This field displays the rank of the station.
AP MAC	This field displays the MAC address of the AP to which the station belongs.
Max. Station Count	This field displays the maximum number of wireless clients that have connected to this AP.
AP Description	This field displays the AP's description. The default description is "AP-" followed by the AP's MAC address.
The Latest Alert Logs	This section of the screen displays recent logs generated by the UAG.
#	This is the entry's rank in the list of alert logs.
Time	This field displays the date and time the log was created.
Priority	This field displays the severity of the log.
Category	This field displays the type of log generated.
Message	This field displays the actual log message.
Source	This field displays the source address (if any) in the packet that generated the log.
Destination	This field displays the destination address (if any) in the packet that generated the log.

6.2.1 The CPU Usage Screen

Use this screen to look at a chart of the UAG's recent CPU usage. To access this screen, click CPU Usage in the dashboard.

Figure 34 Dashboard > CPU Usage

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 14 Dashboard > CPU Usage

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
	The y-axis represents the percentage of CPU usage.
	The x-axis shows the time period over which the CPU usage occurred
Refresh Interval	Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now	Click this to update the information in the window right away.

6.2.2 The Memory Usage Screen

Use this screen to look at a chart of the UAG's recent memory (RAM) usage. To access this screen, click Memory Usage in the dashboard.

Figure 35 Dashboard > Memory Usage

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 15 Dashboard > Memory Usage

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
	The y-axis represents the percentage of RAM usage.
	The x-axis shows the time period over which the RAM usage occurred
Refresh Interval	Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now	Click this to update the information in the window right away.

6.2.3 The Active Sessions Screen

Use this screen to look at a chart of the UAG's recent traffic session usage. To access this screen, click Show Active Sessions in the dashboard.

Figure 36 Dashboard > Show Active Sessions

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 16 Dashboard > Show Active Sessions

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Sessions	The y-axis represents the number of session.
	The x-axis shows the time period over which the session usage occurred
Refresh Interval	Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now	Click this to update the information in the window right away.

6.2.4 The DHCP Table Screen

Use this screen to look at the IP addresses currently assigned to DHCP clients and the IP addresses reserved for specific MAC addresses. To access this screen, click DHCP Table in System Status in the dashboard.

Figure 37 Dashboard > DHCP Table

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 17 Dashboard > DHCP Table

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Interface	This field identifies the interface that assigned an IP address to a DHCP client.
IP Address	This field displays the IP address currently assigned to a DHCP client or reserved for a specific MAC address. Click the column's heading cell to sort the table entries by IP address. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order.
Host Name	This field displays the name used to identify this device on the network (the computer name). The UAG learns these from the DHCP client requests. "None" shows here for a static DHCP entry.
MAC Address	This field displays the MAC address to which the IP address is currently assigned or for which the IP address is reserved. Click the column's heading cell to sort the table entries by MAC address. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order.
Description	For a static DHCP entry, the host name or the description you configured shows here. This field is blank for dynamic DHCP entries.
Reserve	If this field is selected, this entry is a static DHCP entry. The IP address is reserved for the MAC address.
	If this field is clear, this entry is a dynamic DHCP entry. The IP address is assigned to a DHCP client.
	To create a static DHCP entry using an existing dynamic DHCP entry, select this field.
	To remove a static DHCP entry, clear this field.
Refresh Interval	Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now	Click this to update the information in the window right away.

6.2.5 The Number of Login Users Screen

Use this screen to look at a list of the users currently logged into the UAG. Users who close their browsers without logging out are still shown as logged in here. To access this screen, click Number of Login Users in System Status in the dashboard.

Figure 38 Dashboard > Number of Login Users

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 18 Dashboard > Number of Login Users

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This field is a sequential value and is not associated with any entry.
User ID	This field displays the user name of each user who is currently logged in to the UAG.
Reauth Lease T.	This field displays the amount of reauthentication time remaining and the amount of lease time remaining for each user. See Chapter 31 on page 285 for more information.
Type	This field displays the way the user logged in to the UAG.
IP address	This field displays the IP address of the computer used to log in to the UAG.
User Info	This field displays the types of user accounts the UAG uses. If the user type is ext-user (external user), this field will show its external-group information when you move your mouse over it. If the external user matches two external-group objects, both external-group object names will be shown.
Force Logging	Click this icon to end a user's session.

7.1 Overview

Use the Monitor screens to check status and statistics information.

7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the Monitor screens for the following.

• Use the System Status > Port Statistics screen (see Section 7.2 on page 69) to look at packet statistics for each physical port.
• Use the System Status > Port Statistics > Graph View screen (see Section 7.2 on page 69) to look at a line graph of packet statistics for each physical port.
• Use the System Status > Interface Status screen (see Section 7.3 on page 71) to see all of the UAG's interfaces and their packet statistics.
• Use the System Status > Traffic Statistics screen (see Section 7.4 on page 73) to start or stop data collection and view statistics.
• Use the System Status > Session Monitor screen (see Section 7.5 on page 75) to view sessions by user or service.
• Use the System Status > DDNS Status screen (see Section 7.6 on page 77) to view the status of the UAG's DDNS domain names.
• Use the System Status > IP/MAC Binding screen (see Section 7.7 on page 78) to view a list of devices that have received an IP address from UAG interfaces with IP/MAC binding enabled.
• Use the System Status > Login Users screen (see Section 7.8 on page 79) to look at a list of the users currently logged into the UAG.
• Use the System Status > UPnP Port Status screen (see Section 7.9 on page 80) to look at a list of the NAT port mapping rules that UPnP creates on the UAG.
• Use the System Status > USB Storage screen (see Section 7.10 on page 81) to view information about a connected USB storage device.
• Use the System Status > Dynamic Guest screen (see Section 7.11 on page 82) to look at a list of the guest user accounts, which are created automatically and allowed to access the UAG's services for a certain period of time.
• Use the AP Information > AP List screen (see Section 7.12 on page 84) to view which APs are currently connected to the UAG.
• Use the AP Information > Radio List screen (see Section 7.13 on page 86) to view statistics about the wireless radio transmitters in each of the APs connected to the UAG.
• Use the Station Info > Station List screen (see Section 7.14 on page 89) to view statistics pertaining to the connected stations (or "wireless clients").

• Use the Printer Status screen (see Section 7.15 on page 90) to view information about the connected statement printers.

• Use the VPN 1-1 Mapping screen (see Section 7.16 on page 91) to view the status of the active users to which the UAG applied a VPN 1-1 mapping rule.

• Use the VPN 1-1 Mapping > Statistics screen (see Section 7.16.1 on page 92) to display statistics for each of the VPN 1-1 mapping rules.
• Use the Log > View Log screen (see Section 7.17 on page 92) to view the UAG's current log messages. You can change the way the log is displayed, you can e-mail the log, and you can also clear the log in this screen.
• Use the Log > View AP Log screen (see Section 7.17.1 on page 95) to view the UAG's current wireless AP log messages.
• Use the Log > Dynamic Users Log screen (see Section 7.17.2 on page 97) to view the UAG's dynamic guest account log messages.

7.2 The Port Statistics Screen

Use this screen to look at packet statistics for each Gigabit Ethernet port. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics.

Figure 39 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 19 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Poll Interval	Enter how often you want this window to be updated automatically, and click Set Interval.
Set Interval	Click this to set the Poll Interval the screen uses.
Stop	Click this to stop the window from updating automatically. You can start it again by setting the Poll Interval and clicking Set Interval.
Switch to Graphic View	Click this to display the port statistics as a line graph.
#	This field displays the port's number in the list.
Port	This field displays the physical port number.
Status	This field displays the current status of the physical port. Down - The physical port is not connected. Speed / Duplex - The physical port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half).
TxPkts	This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the UAG on the physical port since it was last connected.
RxPkts	This field displays the number of packets received by the UAG on the physical port since it was last connected.
Collisions	This field displays the number of collisions on the physical port since it was last connected.
Tx B/s	This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-second interval before the screen updated.
Rx B/s	This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-second interval before the screen updated.
Up Time	This field displays how long the physical port has been connected.
System Up Time	This field displays how long the UAG has been running since it last restarted or was turned on.

7.2.1 The Port Statistics Graph Screen

Use this screen to look at a line graph of packet statistics for each physical port. To access this screen, click Port Statistics in the Status screen and then the Switch to Graphic View Button.

Figure 40 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics > Switch to Graphic View

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 20 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics > Switch to Graphic View

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval	Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now	Click this to update the information in the window right away.
Port Selection	Select the number of the physical port for which you want to display graphics.
Switch to Grid View	Click this to display the port statistics as a table.
Kbps	The y-axis represents the speed of transmission or reception.
time	The x-axis shows the time period over which the transmission or reception occurred
TX	This line represents traffic transmitted from the UAG on the physical port since it was last connected.
RX	This line represents the traffic received by the UAG on the physical port since it was last connected.
Last Update	This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.
System Up Time	This field displays how long the UAG has been running since it last restarted or was turned on.

7.3 The Interface Status Screen

This screen lists all of the UAG's interfaces and gives packet statistics for them. Click Monitor > System Status > Interface Status to access this screen.

Figure 41 Monitor > System Status > Interface Status

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 21 Monitor > System Status > Interface Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Interface Status	If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is displayed in light gray text.
Expand/Close	Click this button to show or hide statistics for all the virtual interfaces on top of the Ethernet interfaces.
Name	This field displays the name of each interface. If there is an Expand icon (plus-sign) next to the name, click this to look at the status of virtual interfaces on top of this interface.
Port	This field displays the physical port number.
Status	This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is.For Ethernet interfaces:·Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled.·Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected.·Up - The LAN Ethernet interface is enabled and connected.·Speed / Duplex - The WAN Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half).For virtual interfaces, this field always displays Up or Down. If the virtual interface is disabled, it displays Inactive.For VLAN and bridge interfaces, this field always displays Up or Down. If the VLAN or bridge interface is disabled, it displays Inactive.For PPP interfaces:·Inactive - The PPP interface is disabled.·Connected - The PPP interface is connected.·Disconnected - The PPP interface is not connected.
Zone	This field displays the zone to which the interface is assigned.
IP Addr/Netmask	This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP address and subnet mask are 0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask via DHCP.
IP Assignment	This field displays how the interface gets its IP addressynamic - This interface has a static IP address.DHCP Client - This interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server.
Services	This field lists which services the interface provides to the network. Examples include DHCP relay, and DHCP server. This field displays n/a if the interface does not provide any services to the network.
Action	Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server. Click Connect to try to connect a PPPoE/PPTP interface. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to update its IP address, this field displays n/a.
Interface Statistics	This table provides packet statistics for each interface.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.
Expand/Close	Click this button to show or hide statistics for all the virtual interfaces on top of the Ethernet interfaces.
Name	This field displays the name of each interface. If there is a Expand icon (plus-sign) next to the name, click this to look at the statistics for virtual interfaces on top of this interface.
Status	This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is.For Ethernet interfaces:·Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled.·Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected.·Up - The LAN Ethernet interface is enabled and connected.·Speed / Duplex - The WAN Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half).For virtual interfaces, this field always displays Up or Down. If the virtual interface is disabled, it displays Inactive.For VLAN and bridge interfaces, this field always displays Up or Down. If the VLAN or bridge interface is disabled, it displays Inactive.For PPP interfaces:·Inactive - The PPP interface is disabled.·Connected - The PPP interface is connected.·Disconnected - The PPP interface is not connected.
TxPkts	This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the UAG on the interface since it was last connected.
RxPkts	This field displays the number of packets received by the UAG on the interface since it was last connected.
Tx B/s	This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the interface in the one-second interval before the screen updated.
Rx B/s	This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the interface in the one-second interval before the screen updated.

7.4 The Traffic Statistics Screen

Click Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics to display the Traffic Statistics screen. This screen provides basic information about the following for example:

• Most-visited Web sites and the number of times each one was visited. This count may not be accurate in some cases because the UAG counts HTTP GET packets. Please see Table 22 on page 74 for more information.
• Most-used protocols or service ports and the amount of traffic on each one
• LAN IP with heaviest traffic and how much traffic has been sent to and from each one

You use the Traffic Statistics screen to tell the UAG when to start and when to stop collecting information for these reports. You cannot schedule data collection; you have to start and stop it manually in the Traffic Statistics screen.

Figure 42 Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics

There is a limit on the number of records shown in the report. Please see Table 23 on page 75 for more information. The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 22 Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Data Collection
Collect Statistics	Select this to have the UAG collect data for the report. If the UAG has already been collecting data, the collection period displays to the right. The progress is not tracked here real-time, but you can click the Refresh button to update it.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Statistics
Interface	Select the interface from which to collect information. You can collect information from Ethernet, VLAN, bridge and PPPoE/PPTP interfaces.
Top	Select the type of report to display. Choices are:Host IP Address/User - displays the IP addresses or users with the most traffic and how much traffic has been sent to and from each one-service/Port - displays the most-used protocols or service ports and the amount of traffic for each one.Web Site Hits - displays the most-visited Web sites and how many times each one has been visited.Each type of report has different information in the report (below).
Refresh	Click this button to update the report display.
Flush Data	Click this button to discard all of the screen's statistics and update the report display.
	These fields are available when the Top is Host IP Address/User.
#	This field is the rank of each record. The IP addresses and users are sorted by the amount of traffic.
Direction	This field indicates whether the IP address or user is sending or receiving traffic.RX From- traffic is coming from the IP address or user to the UAG.Tx To - traffic is going from the UAG to the IP address or user.
IP Address/User	This field displays the IP address or user in this record. The maximum number of IP addresses or users in this report is indicated in Table 23 on page 75.
Amount	This field displays how much traffic was sent or received from the indicated IP address or user. If the Direction is RX From, a red bar is displayed; if the Direction is Tx To, a blue bar is displayed. The unit of measure is bytes, Kbytes, Mbytes or Gbytes, depending on the amount of traffic for the particular IP address or user. The count starts over at zero if the number of bytes passes the byte count limit. See Table 23 on page 75.
	These fields are available when the Top is Service/Port.
#	This field is the rank of each record. The protocols and service ports are sorted by the amount of traffic.
Service/Port	This field displays the service and port in this record. The maximum number of services and service ports in this report is indicated in Table 23 on page 75.
Protocol	This field indicates what protocol the service was using.
Direction	This field indicates whether the indicated protocol or service port is sending or receiving traffic.Ingress - traffic is coming into the router through the interfaceEgress - traffic is going out from the router through the interface
Amount	This field displays how much traffic was sent or received from the indicated service / port. If the Direction is Ingress, a red bar is displayed; if the Direction is Egress, a blue bar is displayed. The unit of measure is bytes, Kbytes, Mbytes, Gbytes, or Tbytes, depending on the amount of traffic for the particular protocol or service port. The count starts over at zero if the number of bytes passes the byte count limit. See Table 23 on page 75.
	These fields are available when the Top is Web Site Hits.
#	This field is the rank of each record. The domain names are sorted by the number of hits.
Web Site	This field displays the domain names most often visited. The UAG counts each page viewed on a Web site as another hit. The maximum number of domain names in this report is indicated in Table 23 on page 75.
Hits	This field displays how many hits the Web site received. The UAG counts hits by counting HTTP GET packets. Many Web sites have HTTP GET references to other Web sites, and the UAG counts these as hits too. The count starts over at zero if the number of hits passes the hit count limit. See Table 23 on page 75.

The following table displays the maximum number of records shown in the report, the byte count limit, and the hit count limit.

Table 23 Maximum Values for Reports

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Maximum Number of Records	20
Byte Count Limit	\( 2^{64} \) bytes; this is just less than 17 million terabytes.
Hit Count Limit	\( 2^{64} \) hits; this is over \( 1.8 \times 10^{19} \)hits.

7.5 The Session Monitor Screen

The Session Monitor screen displays information about all established sessions that pass through the UAG for debugging or statistical analysis. It is not possible to manage sessions in this screen. The following information is displayed.

• User who started the session
• Protocol or service port used
  Source address
• Destination address
  Number of bytes received (so far)
  Number of bytes transmitted (so far)
  Duration (so far)

You can look at all the active sessions by user, service, source IP address, or destination IP address. You can also filter the information by user, protocol / service or service group, source address, and/ or destination address and view it by user.

Click Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor to display the following screen.

Figure 43 Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 24 Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
View	Select how you want the information to be displayed. Choices are: sessions by users - display all active sessions grouped by user. sessions by services - display all active sessions grouped by service or protocol. sessions by source IP - display all active sessions grouped by source IP address. sessions by destination IP - display all active sessions grouped by destination IP address. all sessions - filter the active sessions by the User, Service, Source Address, and Destination Address, and display each session individually (sorted by user).
Refresh	Click this button to update the information on the screen. The screen also refreshes automatically when you open and close the screen.
	The User, Service, Source Address, and Destination Address fields display if you view all sessions. Select your desired filter criteria and click the Search button to filter the list of sessions.
User	This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Type the user whose sessions you want to view. It is not possible to type part of the user name or use wildcards in this field; you must enter the whole user name.
Service	This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Select the service or service group whose sessions you want to view. The UAG identifies the service by comparing the protocol and destination port of each packet to the protocol and port of each services that is defined. (See Chapter 34 on page 319 for more information about services.)
Source	This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Type the source IP address whose sessions you want to view. You cannot include the source port.
Destination	This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Type the destination IP address whose sessions you want to view. You cannot include the destination port.
Search	This button displays when View is set to all sessions. Click this button to update the information on the screen using the filter criteria in the User, Service, Source Address, and Destination Address fields.
Active Sessions	This is the total number of active sessions that matched the search criteria.
Show	Select the number of active sessions displayed on each page. You can use the arrow keys on the right to change pages.
User	This field displays the user in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by users (or all sessions) report, click + or - to display or hide details about a user's sessions.
Service	This field displays the protocol used in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by services report, click + or - to display or hide details about a protocol's sessions.
Source	This field displays the source IP address and port in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by source IP report, click + or - to display or hide details about a source IP address's sessions.
Destination	This field displays the destination IP address and port in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by destination IP report, click + or - to display or hide details about a destination IP address's sessions.
Rx	This field displays the amount of information received by the source in the active session.
Tx	This field displays the amount of information transmitted by the source in the active session.
Duration	This field displays the length of the active session in seconds.

7.6 The DDNS Status Screen

The DDNS Status screen shows the status of the UAG's DDNS domain names. Click Monitor > System Status > DDNS Status to open the following screen.

Figure 44 Monitor > System Status > DDNS Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 25 Monitor > System Status > DDNS Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Update	Click this to have the UAG update the profile to the DDNS server. The UAG attempts to resolve the IP address for the domain name.
Profile Name	This field displays the descriptive profile name for this entry.
Domain Name	This field displays each domain name the UAG can route.
Effective IP	This is the (resolved) IP address of the domain name.
Last Update Status	This shows whether the last attempt to resolve the IP address for the domain name was successful or not. Updating means the UAG is currently attempting to resolve the IP address for the domain name.
Last Update Time	This shows when the last attempt to resolve the IP address for the domain name occurred (in year-month-day hour:minute:second format).

7.7 The IP/MAC Binding Monitor Screen

Click Monitor > System Status > IP/MAC Binding to open the IP/MAC Binding Monitor screen. This screen lists the devices that have received an IP address from UAG interfaces with IP/ MAC binding enabled and have ever established a session with the UAG. Devices that have never established a session with the UAG do not display in the list.

Figure 45 Monitor > System Status > IP/MAC Binding

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 26 Monitor > System Status > IP/MAC Binding

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Interface	Select a UAG interface that has IP/MAC binding enabled to show to which devices it has assigned an IP address.
#	This is the index number of an IP/MAC binding entry.
IP Address	This is the IP address that the UAG assigned to a device.
Host Name	This field displays the name used to identify this device on the network (the computer name). The UAG learns these from the DHCP client requests.
MAC Address	This field displays the MAC address to which the IP address is currently assigned.
Last Access	This is when the device last established a session with the UAG through this interface.
Description	This field displays the descriptive name that helps identify the entry.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.

7.8 The Login Users Screen

Use this screen to look at a list of the users currently logged into the UAG. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > Login Users.

Figure 46 Monitor > System Status > Login Users

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 27 Monitor > System Status > Login Users

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ForceLogout	Select a user ID and click this icon to end a user's session.
#	This field is a sequential value and is not associated with any entry.
User ID	This field displays the user name of each user who is currently logged in to the UAG.
Reauth_Lease_T.	This field displays the amount of reauthentication time remaining and the amount of lease time remaining for each user. See Chapter 31 on page 285.
Type	This field displays the way the user logged in to the UAG.
IP_Address	This field displays the IP address of the computer used to log in to the UAG.
User Info	This field displays the types of user accounts the UAG uses. If the user type is ext-user (external user), this field will show its external-group information when you move your mouse over it. If the external user matches two external-group objects, both external-group object names will be shown.
Force Logging	Select a user ID and click this icon to end a user's session.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.

7.9 The UPnP Port Status Screen

Use this screen to look at the NAT port mapping rules that UPnP creates on the UAG. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status.

Figure 47 Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 28 Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Remove	Select an entry and click this button to remove it from the list.
#	This is the index number of the UPnP-created NAT mapping rule entry.
Remote Host	This field displays the source IP address (on the WAN) of inbound IP packets. Since this is often a wildcard, the field may be blank. When the field is blank, the UAG forwards all traffic sent to the External Port on the WAN interface to the Internal Client on the Internal Port. When this field displays an external IP address, the NAT rule has the UAG forward inbound packets to the Internal Client from that IP address only.
External Port	This field displays the port number that the UAG “listens” on (on the WAN port) for connection requests destined for the NAT rule's Internal Port and Internal Client. The UAG forwards incoming packets (from the WAN) with this port number to the Internal Client on the Internal Port (on the LAN). If the field displays “0”, the UAG ignores the Internal Port value and forwards requests on all external port numbers (that are otherwise unmapped) to the Internal Client.
Protocol	This field displays the protocol of the NAT mapping rule (TCP or UDP).
Internal Port	This field displays the port number on the Internal Client to which the UAG should forward incoming connection requests.
Internal Client	This field displays the DNS host name or IP address of a client on the LAN. Multiple NAT clients can use a single port simultaneously if the internal client field is set to 255.255.255.255 for UDP mappings.
Internal Client Type	This field displays the type of the client application on the LAN.
Description	This field displays a text explanation of the NAT mapping rule.
Delete All	Click this to remove all mapping rules from the NAT table.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.

7.10 The USB Storage Screen

This screen displays information about a connected USB storage device. Click Monitor > System Status > USB Storage to display this screen.

Figure 48 Monitor > System Status > USB Storage

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 29 Monitor > System Status > USB Storage

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Device description	This is a basic description of the type of USB device.
Usage	This field displays how much of the USB storage device's capacity is currently being used out of its total capacity and what percentage that makes.
Filesystem	This field displays what file system the USB storage device is formatted with. This field displays Unknown if the file system of the USB storage device is not supported by the UAG, such as NTFS.
Speed	This field displays the connection speed the USB storage device supports.
Status	Ready - you can have the UAG use the USB storage device. Click Remove Now to stop the UAG from using the USB storage device so you can remove it. Unused - the connected USB storage device was manually unmounted by using the Remove Now button or for some reason the UAG cannot mount it. Click Use It to have the UAG mount a connected USB storage device. This button is grayed out if the file system is not supported (unknown) by the UAG. none - no USB storage device is connected.
Detail	This field displays any other information the UAG retrieves from the USB storage device. Deactivated - the use of a USB storage device is disabled (turned off) on the UAG. OutofSpace - the available disk space is less than the disk space full threshold (see Section 40.2 on page 355 for how to configure this threshold). Mounting - the UAG is mounting the USB storage device. Removing - the UAG is unmounting the USB storage device. none - the USB device is operating normally or not connected.

7.11 The Dynamic Guest Screen

Dynamic guest accounts can be automatically generated for guest users by using a connected statement printer or the web configurator with the guest-manager account (see Section 26.3.1 on page 250 for more information). A dynamic guest account has a dynamically-created user name and password. Guest users can log in with the dynamic guest accounts when connecting to an SSID for a specified time unit. Use this screen to look at a list of dynamic guest user accounts on the UAG's local database. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > Dynamic Guest.

Figure 49 Monitor > System Status > Dynamic Guest

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 30 Monitor > System Status > Dynamic Guest

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Remove	Select an entry and click this button to remove it from the list. Note: If you delete a valid user account which is in use, the UAG ends the user session.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.
#	This is the index number of the dynamic guest account in the list.
Status	This field displays whether an account expires or not.
Username	This field displays the user name of the account.
Create Time	This field displays when the account was created.
Remaining Time	This field displays the amount of Internet access time remaining for each account.
Time Period	This field displays the total account of time the account can use to access the Internet through the UAG.
Expiration Time	This field displays the date and time the account becomes invalid. Note: Once the time allocated to a dynamic account is used up or a dynamic account remains un-used after the expiration time, the account is deleted from the account list.
Charge	This field displays the total cost of the account.
Payment Info	This field displays the method of payment for each account.
Phone Num	This field displays the mobile phone number for the account.
User Role	This field displays the role of the account.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.

The following table describes the icons in this screen.

Table 31 Monitor > System Status > Dynamic Guest Icons

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
	This guest account is un-used.
	This guest account is in use and online.
	This guest account has been used but is offline now.
	This guest account expired.
	This guest account has been deleted.

7.12 The AP List Screen

Use this screen to view which APs are currently connected to the UAG. To access this screen, click Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > AP List.

Figure 50 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > AP List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 32 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > AP List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add to Mgmt AP List	Click this to add the selected AP to the managed AP list.
More Information	Click this to view a daily station count about the selected AP. The count records station activity on the AP over a consecutive 24 hour period.
#	This is the AP's index number in this list.
Status	This visually displays the AP's connection status with icons. For details on the different Status states, see the next table.
Registration	This indicates whether the AP is registered with the managed AP list.
IP Address	This displays the AP's IP address.
MAC Address	This displays the AP's MAC address.
Model	This displays the AP's model number.
Mgmt. VLAN ID(AC/AP)	This displays the Access Controller (the UAG) management VLAN ID setting for the AP and the runtime management VLAN ID setting on the AP.VLAN Conflict displays if the AP's management VLAN ID does not match the UAG's management VLAN ID setting for the AP. This field displays n/a if the UAG cannot get VLAN information from the AP.
Description	This displays the AP's associated description. The default description is "AP-" + the AP's MAC Address.
Station	This displays the number of stations (aka wireless clients) associated with the AP.
Recent On-line Time	This displays the most recent time the AP came on-line. N/A displays if the AP has not come on-line since the UAG last started up.
Last Off-line Time	This displays the most recent time the AP went off-line. N/A displays if the AP has either not come on-line or gone off-line since the UAG last started up.

The following table describes the icons in this screen.

Table 33 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > AP List Icons

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
	This AP is not on the management list.
	This AP is on the management list and online.
	This AP is in the process of having its firmware updated.
	This AP is on the management list but offline.
	This indicates one of the following cases: · This AP has a runtime management VLAN ID setting that conflicts with the VLAN ID setting on the Access Controller (the UAG). · A setting the UAG assigns to this AP does not match the AP's capability.

7.12.1 Station Count of AP

Use this screen to look at station statistics for the connected AP. To access this screen, select an entry and click the More Information button in the AP List screen.

Figure 51 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > AP List > Station Count of AP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 34 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > AP List > Station Count of AP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Configuration Status	This displays whether or not any of the AP's configuration is in conflict with the UAG's settings for the AP.
Non Support	If any of the AP's configuration conflicts with the UAG's settings for the AP, this field displays which configuration conflicts. It displays n/a if none of the AP's configuration conflicts with the UAG's settings for the AP.
Station Count
	The y-axis represents the number of connected stations.
	The x-axis shows the time over which a station was connected.
Last Update	This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.

7.13 The Radio List Screen

Use this screen to view statistics about the wireless radio transmitters in each of the APs connected to the UAG. To access this screen, click Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List.

Figure 52 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 35 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
More Information	Click this to view additional information about the selected radio's SSID(s), wireless traffic and wireless clients. Information spans a 24 hour period.
#	This is the radio's index number in this list.
AP Description	This displays the description of the AP to which the radio belongs.
Model	This displays the model of the AP to which the radio belongs.
MAC Address	This displays the MAC address of the radio.
Radio	This indicates the radio number on the AP to which it belongs.
OP Mode	This indicates the radio's operating mode, such as AP (access point).
Profile	This indicates the profile name to which the radio belongs.
Frequency	This indicates the wireless frequency currently being used by the radio. This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode.
Channel ID	This indicates the radio's channel ID.
Station	This displays the number of stations (aka wireless clients) associated with the radio.
Rx PKT	This displays the total number of packets received by the radio.
Tx PKT	This displays the total number of packets transmitted by the radio.
Rx FCS Error Count	This indicates the number of received packet errors accrued by the radio.
Tx Retry Count	This indicates the number of times the radio has attempted to re-transmit packets.

7.13.1 AP Mode Radio Information

This screen allows you to view detailed information about a selected radio's SSID(s), wireless traffic and wireless clients for the preceding 24 hours. To access this window, select an entry and click the More Information button in the Radio List screen.

Figure 53 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > AP Mode Radio Information

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 36 Monitor > Wireless > AP Info > Radio List > AP Mode Radio Information

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
MBSSID Detail	This list shows information about the SSID(s) that is associated with the radio over the preceding 24 hours.
#	This is the items sequential number in the list. It has no bearing on the actual data in this list.
SSID Name	This displays an SSID associated with this radio. There can be up to eight maximum.
BSSID	This displays the MAC address associated with the SSID.
Security Mode	This displays the security mode in which the SSID is operating.
VLAN	This displays the VLAN ID associated with the SSID.
Traffic Statistics	This graph displays the overall traffic information about the radio over the preceding 24 hours.
y-axis	This axis represents the amount of data moved across this radio in megabytes per second.
x-axis	This axis represents the amount of time over which the data moved across this radio.
Station Count	This graph displays information about all the wireless clients that have connected to the radio over the preceding 24 hours.
y-axis	The y-axis represents the number of connected wireless clients.
x-axis	The x-axis shows the time over which a wireless client was connected.
Last Update	This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.
OK	Click this to close this window.
Cancel	Click this to close this window.

7.14 The Station List Screen

Use this screen to view statistics pertaining to the associated stations (or "wireless clients"). Click Monitor > Wireless > Station Info to access this screen.

Figure 54 Monitor > Wireless > Station List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 37 Monitor > Wireless > Station List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
SSID Name	This field displays theSSID name with which at least one station is associated. Click + or - to display or hide details about wireless stations that connected to theSSID.
#	This is the station's index number in this list.
MAC Address	This is the station's MAC address.
Associated AP	This indicates the AP through which the station is connected to the network.
SSID Name	This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the station is connected. A single AP can have multiple SSIDs or networks.
Security Mode	This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the station to connect to the network.
Signal Strength	This indicates the strength of the signal. The signal strength mainly depends on the antenna output power and the distance between the station and the AP.
IP Address	This is the station's IP address. An 169.x.x.x IP address is a private IP address that means the station didn't get the IP address from a DHCP server.
Tx Rate	This indicates the current data transmission rate of the station.
Rx Rate	This indicates the current data receiving rate of the station.
Association Time	This displays the time a wireless station first associated with the AP.
Refresh	Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.

7.15 The Printer Status Screen

This screen displays information about the connected statement printer, such as SP350E. Click Monitor > Printer Status to display this screen.

Figure 55 Monitor > Printer Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 38 Monitor > Printer Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.
#	This is the index number of the printer in the list.
IPv4 Address	This field displays the IP address of the printer that you configured in the Configuration > Printer Manager screen.
Update Time	This field displays the date and time the UAG last synchronized with the printer.
Status	This field displays whether the UAG can connect to the printer and update the printer information.
Description	This field displays the descriptive name of the printer that you configured in the Configuration > Printer Manager screen.
Firmware Version	This field displays the model number and firmware version of the printer.

7.16 The VPN 1-1 Mapping Status Screen

This screen displays the status of the active users to which the UAG applied a VPN 1-1 mapping rule.

Click Monitor > VPN 1-1 Mapping to open the following screen.

Figure 56 Monitor > VPN 1-1 Mapping

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 39 Monitor >VPN 1-1 Mapping

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This field is a sequential value and is not associated with any entry.
User ID	This field displays the user name of each user who is currently logged into the UAG and matches a pre-configured VPN 1-1 mapping rule.
IP Address	This field displays the IP address of the computer used to log in to the UAG.
Mapping IP/ Interface	This field displays the public IP address that the UAG assigns to the user according to the matched VPN 1-1 mapping rule. It also displays the interface through which the outgoing traffic is forwarded.
Rule	This field displays the index number of the matched VPN 1-1 mapping rule that you configured in the Configuration > VPN 1-1 Mapping screen.
Pool	This field displays the name of the pool profile that you configured for the VPN 1-1 mapping rule.
ForceLogout	Select a user ID and click this icon to end a user's session.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.

7.16.1 VPN 1-1 Mapping Statistics

This screen shows statistics for each of the VPN 1-1 mapping rules. Click Monitor > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Statistics to display this screen.

Figure 57 Monitor > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Statistics

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 40 Monitor > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Statistics

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This field displays the rule's index number in the list.
Status	The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
User/Group	This field displays the name of the user or user group object to which the rule is applied.
Pool Profile	This field displays the name of the IP address pool profile to which the rule is applied.
Assigned/Failed/Peak Usage	This field displays how many times the UAG applied the rule to a user successfully or failed to apply the rule to a user. This also shows the maximum number of times the UAG has applied the rule to a user successfully.

7.17 The Log Screen

Log messages are stored in two separate logs, one for regular log messages and one for debugging messages. In the regular log, you can look at all the log messages by selecting All Logs, or you can select a specific category of log messages (for example, firewall or user). You can also look at the debugging log by selecting Debug Log. All debugging messages have the same priority.

To access this screen, click Monitor > Log. The log is displayed in the following screen.

Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first.

• The maximum possible number of log messages in the UAG varies by model.

Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black. Click a column's heading cell to sort the table entries by that column's criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order.

Figure 58 Monitor > Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 41 Monitor > Log

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Filter / Hide Filter	Click this button to show or hide the filter settings.If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are available.If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source Interface, Destination Interface, Service, Keyword, Protocol and Search fields are available.
Display	Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one time, or you can view the Debug Log.
Priority	This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: any, emerg, alert, crit, error, warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the Category is Debug Log.
Source Address	This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter.
Destination Address	This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter.
Source Interface	This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that generated the log message.
Destination Interface	This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message.
Service	This displays when you show the filter. Select the service whose log messages you would like to see. The Web Configurator uses the protocol and destination port number(s) of the service to select which log messages you see.
Keyword	This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the Message, Source, Destination and Note fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. You can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as punctuation marks ( )', ;?! + -*/ = # $% @; the period, double quotes, and brackets are not allowed.
Protocol	This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would like to see.
Search	This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter settings.
Email Log Now	Click this button to send log message(s) to the Active e-mail address(es) specified in the Send Log To field on the Log Settings page (see Section 41.3.2 on page 399).
Refresh	Click Refresh to update this screen.
Clear Log	Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message.
Time	This field displays the time the log message was recorded.
Priority	This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority field above.
Category	This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the Display and (other) Category fields.
Message	This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text "[count=x]", where x is a number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on (see Log Consolidation in Table 198 on page 401). and multiple entries were aggregated to generate into this one.
Source	This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the log message.
Destination	This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated the log message.
Note	This field displays any additional information about the log message.

The Web Configurator saves the filter settings if you leave the View Log screen and return to it later.

7.17.1 View AP Log

Use this screen to view the UAG's current wireless AP log messages. Click Monitor > Log > View AP Log to access this screen.

Figure 59 Monitor > Log > View AP Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 42 Monitor > Log > View AP Log

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show/Hide Filter	Click this to show or hide the AP log filter.
Select an AP	Select an AP from the list and click Query to view its log messages.
Log Query Status	This indicates the current log query status.init - Indicates the query has not been initialized.querying - Indicates the query is in process失败 - Indicates the query failed.succes - Indicates the query succeeded.
AP Information	This displays the MAC address for the selected AP.
Log File Status	This indicates the status of the AP's log messages.
Last Log Query Time	This indicates the last time the AP was queried for its log messages.
Display	Select the log file from the specified AP that you want displayed.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Priority	Select a priority level to use for filtering displayed log messages.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Source Address	Enter a source IP address to display only the log messages that include it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Destination Address	Enter a destination IP address to display only the log messages that include it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Source Interface	Enter a source interface to display only the log messages that include it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Destination Interface	Enter a destination interface to display only the log messages that include it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Service	Select a service type to display only the log messages related to it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Keyword	Enter a keyword to display only the log messages that include it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Protocol	Select a protocol to display only the log messages that include it.Note: This criterion only appears when you Show Filter.
Search	Click this to start the log query based on the selected criteria. If no criteria have been selected, then this displays all log messages for the specified AP regardless.
Email Log Now	Click this open a new e-mail in your default e-mail program with the selected log attached.
Refresh	Click this to refresh the log table.
Clear Log	Click this to clear the log on the specified AP.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message.
Time	This indicates the time that the log messages was created or recorded on the AP.
Priority	This indicates the selected log message's priority.
Category	This indicates the selected log message's category.
Message	This displays content of the selected log message.
Source	This displays the source IP address of the selected log message.
Destination	This displays the source IP address of the selected log message.
Note	This displays any notes associated with the selected log message.

7.17.2 Dynamic Users Log

Use this screen to view the UAG's dynamic guest account log messages. Click Monitor > Log > Dynamic Users Log to access this screen.

Figure 60 Monitor > Log > Dynamic Users Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 43 Monitor > Log > Dynamic Users Log

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Begin/End Date	Select the first and last dates to specify a time period. The UAG displays log messages only for the accounts created during the specified time period after you click Search.
Begin/End Time	Select the begin time of the first date and the end time of the last date to specify a time period. The UAG displays log messages only for the accounts created during the specified time period after you click Search.
Search	Click this button to update the information on the screen using the filter criteria in the date and time fields.
Refresh	Click this button to update the information in the screen.
Clear Log	Click this button to delete the log messages for invalid accounts.
#	This is the index number of the dynamic guest account in the list.
Status	This field displays whether an account expires or not.
Username	This field displays the user name of the account.
Create Time	This field displays when the account was created.
Remaining Time	This field displays the amount of Internet access time remaining for each account.
Time Period	This field displays the total account of time the account can use to access the Internet through the UAG.
Expiration Time	This field displays the date and time the account becomes invalid. Note: Once the time allocated to a dynamic account is used up or a dynamic account remains un-used after the expiration time, the account is deleted from the account list.
Charge	This field displays the total cost of the account.
Payment Info	This field displays the method of payment for each account.
Phone Num	This field displays the telephone number for the user account.

8.1 Overview

Use the Configuration > Licensing > Registration screens to register your UAG and manage its service subscriptions.

8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Registration screen (see Section 8.2 on page 100) to register your UAG with myZyXEL.com.
• Use the Service screen (see Section 8.3 on page 100) to display the status of your service registrations and upgrade licenses.

8.1.2 What you Need to Know

This section introduces the topics covered in this chapter.

myZyXEL.com

myZyXEL.com is ZyXEL's online services center where you can register your UAG and manage subscription services available for the UAG. To use a subscription service, you have to register the UAG and activate the corresponding service at myZyXEL.com (through the UAG).

Note: You need to create a myZyXEL.com account before you can register your device and activate the services at myZyXEL.com.

Go to https://portal.myZyXEL.com with the UAG's serial number and LAN MAC address to register it. Refer to the web site's on-line help for details.

Note: To activate a service on a UAG, you need to access myZyXEL.com via that UAG.

Subscription Services Available on the UAG

At the time of writing, the UAG can use the upgrade service to extend the maximum number of the supported managed APs and the LAN/WLAN users that can connect to the UAG at one time. The UAG can also subscribe to the SMS ticketing service in order to send SMS text messages.

Maximum Number of Managed APs

The UAG is initially configured to support one local AP only. You can increase this by subscribing to additional licenses. As of this writing, each license upgrade allows an additional 8 remote managed APs while the maximum number of remote managed APs a single UAG can support is 8.

8.2 Registration Screen

Click the link in this screen to register your UAG with myZyXEL.com. The UAG should already have Internet access before you can register it. Click Configuration > Licensing > Registration in the navigation panel to open the screen as shown next.

Figure 61 Configuration > Licensing > Registration

8.3 Service Screen

Use this screen to display the status of your service registrations. To activate or extend a standard service subscription, purchase an iCard and enter the iCard's PIN number (license key) at myZyXEL.com. Click Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service to open the screen as shown next.

Figure 62 Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 44 Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
License Status
#	This is the entry's position in the list.
Service	This lists the services that are available on the UAG.
Status	This field displays whether this is a default service (Default), an inactivated service (Not Licensed), or an activated service or license upgrade (Licensed).
Registration Type	This field displays Standard when it is a default service or when you activated a non-deafult service or upgraded the service subscription. This field is blank when a service is not activated.
Expiration Date	This field displays the date your service expires. This field is blank when a service does not expire.
Count	This field displays the maximum number of wired and wireless users that may connect to the UAG at the same time or how many managed APs the UAG can support with your current license. This field displays N/A when it does not apply to a service.
Service License Refresh	Click this button to renew service license information (such as the registration status and expiration day).

9.1 Overview

Use the Wireless screens to configure how the UAG manages the Access Points (APs) that are connected to it.

9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• The Controller screen (Section 9.2 on page 102) sets how the UAG allows new APs to connect to the network.
• The AP Management screen (Section 9.3 on page 103) manages all of the APs connected to the UAG.

9.2 Controller Screen

Use this screen to set how the UAG allows new APs to connect to the network. Click Configuration > Wireless > Controller to access this screen.

Figure 63 Configuration > Wireless > Controller

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 45 Configuration > Wireless > Controller

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Registration Type	Select Manual to add each AP to the UAG for management, or Always Accept to automatically add APs to the UAG for management.
	Note: Select the Manual option for managing a specific set of APs. This is recommended as the registration mechanism cannot automatically differentiate between friendly and rogue APs.
	APs must be connected to the UAG by a wired connection or network.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

9.3 AP Management Screen

Use this screen to manage all of the APs connected to the UAG. Click Configuration > Wireless > AP Management to access this screen.

Figure 64 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 46 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Edit	Select an AP and click this button to edit its properties.
Remove	Select an AP and click this button to remove it from the list. Note: If in the Configuration > Wireless > Controller screen you set the Registration Type to Always Accept, then as soon as you remove an AP from this list it reconnects.
Reboot	Select an AP and click this button to force it to restart.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
IP Address	This field displays the IP address of the AP.
MAC Address	This field displays the MAC address of the AP.
Model	This field displays the AP's hardware model information. It displays N/A (not applicable) only when the AP disconnects from the UAG and the information is unavailable as a result.
R1 Mode / Profile	This field displays the operating mode (AP) and AP profile name for Radio 1. It displays n/a for the profile for a radio not using an AP profile.
R2 Mode / Profile	This field displays the operating mode (AP) and AP profile name for Radio 2. It displays n/a for the profile for a radio not using an AP profile.
Mgmt. VLAN ID(AC)	This displays the Access Controller (the UAG) management VLAN ID setting for the AP.
Mgmt. VLAN ID(AP)	This displays the runtime management VLAN ID setting on the AP. VLAN Conflict displays if the AP's management VLAN ID does not match the Mgmt. VLAN ID(AC). This field displays n/a if the UAG cannot get VLAN information from the AP.
Description	This field displays the AP's description, which you can configure by selecting the AP's entry and clicking the Edit button.

9.3.1 Edit AP List

Select an AP and click the Edit button in the Configuration > Wireless > AP Management table to display this screen.

Figure 65 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management > Edit AP List

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 47 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management > Edit AP List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use this menu to create a new Radio Profile object to associate with this AP.
MAC	This displays the MAC address of the selected AP.
Model	This field displays the AP's hardware model information. It displays N/A (not applicable) only when the AP disconnects from the UAG and the information is unavailable as a result.
Description	Enter a description for this AP. You can use up to 31 characters, spaces and underscores allowed.
Radio 1/2 OP Mode	Select the operating mode for radio 1 or radio 2. AP Mode means the AP can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data traffic through to the UAG to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an upstream gateway for managing).
Radio 1/2 Profile	Select a profile from the list. If no profile exists, you can create a new one through the Create new Object menu.
Force Overwrite VLAN Config	Select this to have the UAG change the AP's management VLAN to match the configuration in this screen.
Management VLAN ID	Enter a VLAN ID for this AP.
As Native VLAN	Select this option to treat this VLAN ID as a VLAN created on the UAG and not one assigned to it from outside the network.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to close the window with changes unsaved.

10.1 Interface Overview

Use the Interface screens to configure the UAG's interfaces. You can also create interfaces on top of other interfaces.

• Ports are the physical ports to which you connect cables.
• Interfaces are used within the system operationally. You use them in configuring various features. An interface also describes a network that is directly connected to the UAG. For example, You connect the LAN network to the LAN interface.
• Zones are groups of interfaces used to ease security policy configuration.

10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Port Role screen (Section 10.2 on page 108) to create port groups and to assign physical ports and port groups to Ethernet interfaces.
• Use the Ethernet screens (Section 10.3 on page 109) to configure the Ethernet interfaces. Ethernet interfaces are the foundation for defining other interfaces and network policies.
• Use the PPP screens (Section 10.4 on page 120) for PPPoE or PPTP Internet connections.
• Use the VLAN screens (Section 10.5 on page 126) to divide the physical network into multiple logical networks. VLAN interfaces receive and send tagged frames. The UAG automatically adds or removes the tags as needed. Each VLAN can only be associated with one Ethernet interface.
• Use the Bridge screens (Section 10.6 on page 133) to combine two or more network segments into a single network.
• Use the Virtual Interface screen (Section 10.7.1 on page 141) to create virtual interfaces on top of Ethernet interfaces to tell the UAG where to route packets. You can create virtual Ethernet interfaces, virtual VLAN interfaces, and virtual bridge interfaces.
• Use the Trunk screens (Chapter 11 on page 146) to configure load balancing.

10.1.2 What You Need to Know

Interface Characteristics

Interfaces generally have the following characteristics (although not all characteristics apply to each type of interface).

• An interface is a logical entity through which (layer-3) packets pass.
• An interface is bound to a physical port or another interface.
• Many interfaces can share the same physical port.
• An interface belongs to at most one zone.

• Many interfaces can belong to the same zone.

• Layer-3 virtualization (IP alias, for example) is a kind of interface.

Types of Interfaces

You can create several types of interfaces in the UAG.

• Setting interfaces to the same port role forms a port group. Port groups create a hardware connection between physical ports at the layer-2 (data link, MAC address) level. Port groups are created when you use the Interface > Port Roles screen to set multiple physical ports to be part of the same interface.
• Ethernet interfaces are the foundation for defining other interfaces and network policies.
• VLAN interfaces receive and send tagged frames. The UAG automatically adds or removes the tags as needed. Each VLAN can only be associated with one Ethernet interface.
• Bridge interfaces create a software connection between Ethernet or VLAN interfaces at the layer-2 (data link, MAC address) level. Unlike port groups, bridge interfaces can take advantage of some security features in the UAG. You can also assign an IP address and subnet mask to the bridge.
• PPP interfaces support Point-to-Point Protocols (PPP). ISP accounts are required for PPPoE/PPTP interfaces.
• Virtual interfaces provide additional routing information in the UAG. There are three types: virtual Ethernet interfaces, virtual VLAN interfaces, and virtual bridge interfaces.
• Trunk interfaces manage load balancing between interfaces.

Port groups and trunks have a lot of characteristics that are specific to each type of interface. See Section 10.2 on page 108 and Chapter 11 on page 146 for details. The other types of interfaces-- Ethernet, PPP, VLAN, bridge, and virtual--have a lot of similar characteristics. These characteristics are listed in the following table and discussed in more detail below.

Table 48 Ethernet, PPP, VLAN, Bridge, and Virtual Interface Characteristics

CHARACTERISTICS	ETHERNET	ETHERNET	PPP	VLAN	BRIDGE	VIRTUAL
Name*	wan1	lan1, lan2	pppx	vlanx	brx	**
Configurable Zone	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
IP Address Assignment
Static IP address	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
DHCP client	Yes	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
Routing metric	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Interface Parameters
Bandwidth restrictions	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Packet size (MTU)	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
DHCP
DHCP server	No	Yes	No	Yes	Yes	No
DHCP relay	No	Yes	No	Yes	Yes	No
Connectivity Check	Yes	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	No

• • The format of interface names other than the Ethernet and ppp interface names is strict. Each name consists of 2-4 letters (interface type), followed by a number (x) . For most interfaces, x is limited by the maximum number of the type of interface. For VLAN interfaces, x is defined by the number you enter in the VLAN name field. For example, Ethernet interface names are wan1, lan1, lan2; VLAN interfaces are vlan0, vlan1, vlan2, ..., and so on.
    ** - The names of virtual interfaces are derived from the interfaces on which they are created. For example, virtual interfaces created on Ethernet interface wan1 are called wan1:1, wan1:2, and so on. Virtual interfaces created on VLAN interface vlan2 are called vlan2:1, vlan2:2, and so on. You cannot specify the number after the colon(:) in the

Web Configurator; it is a sequential number. You can specify the number after the colon if you use the CLI to set up a virtual interface.

Relationships Between Interfaces

In the UAG, interfaces are usually created on top of other interfaces. Only Ethernet interfaces are created directly on top of the physical ports or port groups. The relationships between interfaces are explained in the following table.

Table 49 Relationships Between Different Types of Interfaces

INTERFACE	REQUIRED PORT / INTERFACE
port group	physical port
Ethernet interface	physical port
	port group
VLAN interface	Ethernet interface
bridge interface	Ethernet interface*
	VLAN interface*
PPP interface	Ethernet interface*
	VLAN interface*
	bridge interface
	WAN1
virtual interface
virtual Ethernet interface)	Ethernet interface*
virtual VLAN interface)	VLAN interface*
virtual bridge interface)	bridge interface
trunk	Ethernet interface
	VLAN interface
	bridge interface
	PPP interface

• • You cannot set up a PPP interface, virtual Ethernet interface or virtual VLAN interface if the underlying interface is a member of a bridge. You also cannot add an Ethernet interface or VLAN interface to a bridge if the member interface has a virtual interface or PPP interface on top of it.

Finding Out More

• See Section 10.8 on page 142 for background information on interfaces.
• See Chapter 11 on page 146 to configure load balancing using trunks.

10.2 Port Role Screen

To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Port Role. Use the Port Role screen to set the UAG's flexible ports as part of the Ian1 or Ian2 interfaces. This creates a hardware connection between the physical ports at the layer-2 (data link, MAC address) level. This provides wire-speed throughput but no security.

Not the following if you are configuring from a computer connected to a lan1 or lan2 port and change the port's role:

• A port's IP address varies as its role changes, make sure your computer's IP address is in the same subnet as the UAG's Ian1 or Ian2 IP address.
• Use the appropriate Ian1 or Ian2 IP address to access the UAG.

Figure 66 Configuration > Network > Interface > Port Role

The physical Ethernet ports are shown at the top and the Ethernet interfaces and zones are shown at the bottom of the screen. Use the radio buttons to select for which interface (network) you want to use each physical port. For example, select a port's lan1 radio button to use the port as part of the lan1 interface. The port will use the UAG's lan1 IP address and MAC address.

When you assign more than one physical port to a network, you create a port group. Port groups have the following characteristics:

• There is a layer-2 Ethernet switch between physical ports in the port group. This provides wire-speed throughput but no security.
• It can increase the bandwidth between the port group and other interfaces.
• The port group uses a single MAC address.

Click Apply to save your changes and apply them to the UAG.

Click Reset to change the port groups to their current configuration (last-saved values).

10.3 Ethernet Summary Screen

This screen lists every Ethernet interface and virtual interface created on top of Ethernet interfaces. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet.

Unlike other types of interfaces, you cannot create new Ethernet interfaces nor can you delete any of them. If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports assigned to it (see Section 10.2 on page 108), the Ethernet interface is effectively removed from the UAG, but you can still configure it.

Ethernet interfaces are similar to other types of interfaces in many ways. They have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions. They restrict the amount of bandwidth and packet size. They can provide DHCP services, and they can verify the gateway is available.

Use Ethernet interfaces to control which physical ports exchange routing information with other routers and how much information is exchanged through each one. The more routing information is exchanged, the more efficient the routers should be. However, the routers also generate more network traffic, and some routing protocols require a significant amount of configuration and management.

Figure 67 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 50 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove a virtual interface, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an interface, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an interface, select it and click Inactivate.
Create Virtual Interface	To open the screen where you can create a virtual Ethernet interface, select an Ethernet interface and click Create Virtual Interface.
Object References	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the name of the interface.
IP Address	This field displays the current IP address of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (in the IPv4 network), the interface does not have an IP address yet. In the IPv4 network, this screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (STATIC) or dynamically assigned (DHCP). IP addresses are always static in virtual interfaces.
Mask	This field displays the interface's subnet mask in dot decimal notation.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

10.3.1 Ethernet Edit

The Ethernet Edit screen lets you configure IP address assignment, interface parameters, DHCP settings, connectivity check, and MAC address settings. To access this screen, select an entry in the Ethernet summary screen and click the Edit icon. (See Section 10.3 on page 109.)

Note: If you create IP address objects based on an interface's IP address, subnet, or gateway, the UAG automatically updates every rule or setting that uses the object whenever the interface's IP address settings change. For example, if you change the LAN's IP address, the UAG automatically updates the corresponding interface-based, LAN subnet address object.

Figure 68 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (External Type)

Figure 69 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (Internal Type)

This screen's fields are described in the table below.

Table 51 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
General Settings
Enable Interface	Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface.
Interface Properties
Interface Type	internal is for connecting to a local network. Other corresponding configuration options: DHCP server and DHCP relay. The UAG automatically adds default SNAT settings for traffic flowing from this interface to an external interface. external is for connecting to an external network (like the Internet). The UAG automatically adds this interface to the default WAN trunk.
Interface Name	Specify a name for the interface. It can use alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and underscores, and it can be up to 11 characters long.
Port	This is the name of the Ethernet interface's physical port.
Zone	This is the zone to which this interface is to belong. You use zones to apply security settings such as firewall, and remote management.
MAC Address	This field is read-only. This is the MAC address that the Ethernet interface uses.
Description	Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ( ) + / : = ? ! * @ $ _ % - characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
IP Address Assignment	These IP address fields configure an IPv4 IP address on the interface itself. If you change this IP address on the interface, you may also need to change a related address object for the network connected to the interface. For example, if you use this screen to change the IP address of your LAN interface, you should also change the corresponding LAN subnet address object.
Get Automatically	This option appears when Interface Type is external. Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server.
Use Fixed IP Address	This option appears when Interface Type is external. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.
IP Address	Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask	Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway	This option appears when Interface Type is external. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The UAG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface.
Metric	This option appears when Interface Type is external. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The UAG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the UAG uses the one that was configured first.
Interface Parameters
Egress Bandwidth	Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
MTU	Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the UAG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500.
Connectivity Check	These fields appear when Interface Type is external.The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the UAG stops routing to the gateway. The UAG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check.
Enable Connectivity Check	Select this to turn on the connection check.
Check Method	Select the method that the gateway allows.Select icmp to have the UAG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available.Select tcp to have the UAG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available.
Check Period	Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts.
Check Timeout	Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure.
Check Fail Tolerance	Enter the number of consecutive failures before the UAG stops routing through the gateway.
Check Default Gateway	Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check.
Check this address	Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it.
Check Port	This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check.
DHCP Setting	This section appears when Interface Type is internal.
DHCP	Select what type of DHCP service the UAG provides to the network. Choices are:None - the UAG does not provide any DHCP services. There is already a DHCP server on the network.DHCP Relay - the UAG routes DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers you specify.The DHCP server(s) may be on another network.DHCP Server - the UAG assigns IP addresses and provides subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. The UAG is the DHCP server for the network.
	These fields appear if the UAG is a DHCP Relay.
Relay Server 1	Enter the IP address of a DHCP server for the network.
Relay Server 2	This field is optional. Enter the IP address of another DHCP server for the network.
	These fields appear if the UAG is a DHCP Server.
IP Pool Start Address	Enter the IP address from which the UAG begins allocating IP addresses. If you want to assign a static IP address to a specific computer, use the Static DHCP Table.If this field is blank, the Pool Size must also be blank. In this case, the UAG can assign every IP address allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interface's IP address.
Pool Size	Enter the number of IP addresses to allocate. This number must be at least one and is limited by the interface's Subnet Mask. For example, if the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 and IP Pool Start Address is 10.10.10.10, the UAG can allocate 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.254, or 245 IP addresses.If this field is blank, the IP Pool Start Address must also be blank. In this case, the UAG can assign every IP address allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interface's IP address.
First DNS Server, Second DNS Server, Third DNS Server	Specify the IP addresses up to three DNS servers for the DHCP clients to use. Use one of the following ways to specify these IP addresses.Custom Defined - enter a static IP address.From ISP - select the DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server.Device - the DHCP clients use the IP address of this interface and the UAG works as a DNS relay.
First WINS Server, Second WINS Server	Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using.
Default Router	If you set this interface to DHCP Server, you can select to use either the interface's IP address or another IP address as the default router. This default router will become the DHCP clients' default gateway.To use another IP address as the default router, select Custom Defined and enter the IP address.
Lease time	Specify how long each computer can use the information (especially the IP address) before it has to request the information again. Choices are:infinite - select this if IP addresses never expire(days, hours, and minutes - select this to enter how long IP addresses are valid.
Extended Options	This table is available if you selected DHCP server.Configure this table if you want to send more information to DHCP clients through DHCP packets.
Add	Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 10.3.3 on page 118.
Edit	Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Name	This is the name of the DHCP option.
Code	This is the code number of the DHCP option.
Type	This is the type of the set value for the DHCP option.
Value	This is the value set for the DHCP option.
Enable IP/MAC Binding	Select this option to have this interface enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses.
Enable Logs for IP/MAC BindingViolation	Select this option to have the UAG generate a log if a device connected to this interface attempts to use an IP address that is bound to another device's MAC address.
Static DHCP Table	Configure a list of static IP addresses the UAG assigns to computers connected to the interface. Otherwise, the UAG assigns an IP address dynamically using the interface's IP Pool Start Address and Pool Size.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry and click this to delete it.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
IP Address	Enter the IP address to assign to a device with this entry's MAC address.
MAC	Enter the MAC address to which to assign this entry's IP address.
Description	Enter a description to help identify this static DHCP entry. You can use alphanumeric and ( )+/:=?! *#@$-%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
MAC Address Setting	This section appears when Interface Type is external. Have the interface use either the factory assigned default MAC address, a manually specified MAC address, or clone the MAC address of another device or computer.
Use Default MAC Address	Select this option to have the interface use the factory assigned default MAC address. By default, the UAG uses the factory assigned MAC address to identify itself.
Overwrite Default MAC Address	Select this option to have the interface use a different MAC address. Either enter the MAC address in the fields or click Clone by host and enter the IP address of the device or computer whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the configuration file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different configuration file.
Related Setting
Configure PPPoE/PPTP	Click PPPoE/PPTP if this interface's Internet connection uses PPPoE or PPTP.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

10.3.2 Object References

When a configuration screen includes an Object Reference icon, select a configuration object and click Object Reference to open the Object Reference screen. This screen displays which configuration settings reference the selected object. The fields shown vary with the type of object.

Figure 70 Object References

The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.

Table 52 Object References

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Object Name	This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click the object's name to display the object's configuration screen in the main window.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Service	This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a service's name to display the service's configuration screen in the main window.
Priority	If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration item's position in its list, otherwise N/A displays.
Name	This field identifies the configuration item that references the object.
Description	If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here.
Refresh	Click this to update the information in this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to close the screen.

10.3.3 Add/Edit DHCP Extended Options

When you configure an interface as a DHCPv4 server, you can additionally add DHCP extended options which have the UAG to add more information in the DHCP packets. The available fields vary depending on the DHCP option you select in this screen. To open the screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit, select DHCP Server in the DHCP Setting section, and then click Add or Edit in the Extended Options table.

Figure 71 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add/Edit Extended Options

The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.

Table 53 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add/Edit Extended Options

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Option	Select which DHCP option that you want to add in the DHCP packets sent through the interface. See Table 54 for more information.
Name	This field displays the name of the selected DHCP option. If you selected User Defined in the Option field, enter a descriptive name to identify the DHCP option. You can enter up to 16 characters ("a-z", "A-Z", "0-9", "-", and ") with no spaces allowed. The first character must be alphabetical (a-z, A-Z).
Code	This field displays the code number of the selected DHCP option. If you selected User Defined in the Option field, enter a number for the option. This field is mandatory.

Table 53 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add/Edit Extended Options

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Type	This is the type of the selected DHCP option. If you selected User Defined in the Option field, select an appropriate type for the value that you will enter in the next field. Only advanced users should configure User Defined. Misconfiguration could result in interface lockout.
Value	Enter the value for the selected DHCP option. For example, if you selected TFTP Server Name (66) and the type is TEXT, enter the DNS domain name of a TFTP server here. If you selected the Time Offset (2) option, the type is Boolean and you have to enter a Boolean value which should be either 0 or 1, where 1 interpreted as true and 0 is interpreted as false. This field is mandatory.
First IP Address, Second IP Address, Third IP Address	If you selected Time Server (4), NTP Server (41), SIP Server (120), CAPWAP AC (138), or TFTP Server (150), you have to enter at least one IP address of the corresponding servers in these fields. The servers should be listed in order of your preference.
First Enterprise ID, Second Enterprise ID	If you selected VIVC (124) or VIVS (125), you have to enter at least one vendor's 32-bit enterprise number in these fields. An enterprise number is a unique number that identifies a company.
First Class, Second Class	If you selected VIVC (124), enter the details of the hardware configuration of the host on which the client is running, or of industry consortium compliance.
First Information, Second Information	If you selected VIVS (125), enter additional information for the corresponding enterprise number in these fields.
First FQDN, Second FQDN, Third FQDN	If the Type is FQDN, you have to enter at least one domain name of the corresponding servers in these fields. The servers should be listed in order of your preference.
OK	Click this to close this screen and update the settings to the previous Edit screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to close the screen.

The following table lists the available DHCP extended options (defined in RFCs) on the UAG. See RFCs for more information.

Table 54 DHCP Extended Options

OPTION NAME	CODE	DESCRIPTION
Time Offset	2	This option specifies the offset of the client's subnet in seconds from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Time Server	4	This option specifies a list of Time servers available to the client.
NTP Server	42	This option specifies a list of the NTP servers available to the client by IP address.
TFTP Server Name	66	This option is used to identify a TFTP server when the "sname" field in the DHCP header has been used for DHCP options. The minimum length of the value is 1.
Bootfile	67	This option is used to identify a bootfile when the "file" field in the DHCP header has been used for DHCP options. The minimum length of the value is 1.
SIP Server	120	This option carries either an IPv4 address or a DNS domain name to be used by the SIP client to locate a SIP server.
VIVC	124	Vendor-Identifying Vendor Class optionA DHCP client may use this option to unambiguously identify the vendor that manufactured the hardware on which the client is running, the software in use, or an industry consortium to which the vendor belongs.
VIVS	125	Vendor-Identifying Vendor-Specific optionDHCP clients and servers may use this option to exchange vendor-specific information.
CAPWAP AC	138	CAPWAP Access Controller addresses optionThe Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol allows a Wireless Termination Point (WTP) to use DHCP to discover the Access Controllers to which it is to connect. This option carries a list of IPv4 addresses indicating one or more CAPWAP ACs available to the WTP.
TFTP Server	150	The option contains one or more IPv4 addresses that the client may use. The current use of this option is for downloading configuration from a VoIP server via TFTP; however, the option may be used for purposes other than contacting a VoIP configuration server.

10.4 PPP Interfaces

Use PPPoE/PPTP interfaces to connect to your ISP. This way, you do not have to install or manage PPPoE/PPTP software on each computer in the network.

Figure 72 Example: PPPoE/PPTP Interfaces

PPPoE/PPTP interfaces are similar to other interfaces in some ways. They have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions; they restrict bandwidth and packet size; and they can verify the gateway is available. There are two main differences between PPPoE/ PPTP interfaces and other interfaces.

• You must also configure an ISP account object for the PPPoE/PPTP interface to use.
  Each ISP account specifies the protocol (PPPoE or PPTP), as well as your ISP account information. If you change ISPs later, you only have to create a new ISP account, not a new PPPoE/PPTP interface. You should not have to change any network policies.
• You do not set up the subnet mask or gateway.

PPPoE/PPTP interfaces are interfaces between the UAG and only one computer. Therefore, the subnet mask is always 255.255.255.255. In addition, the UAG always treats the ISP as a gateway.

10.4.1 PPP Interface Summary

This screen lists every PPPoE/PPTP interface. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP.

Figure 73 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP

Each field is described in the table below.

Table 55 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
User Configuration / System Default	The UAG comes with the (non-removable) System Default PPP interfaces pre-configured. You can create (and delete) User Configuration PPP interfaces.
Add	Click this to create a new user-configured PPP interface.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove a user-configured PPP interface, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Connect	To connect an interface, select it and click Connect. You might use this in testing the interface or to manually establish the connection for a Dial-on-Demand PPPoE/PPTP interface.
Disconnect	To disconnect an interface, select it and click Disconnect. You might use this in testing the interface.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Status	The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.The connect icon is lit when the interface is connected and dimmed when it is disconnected.
Name	This field displays the name of the interface.
Base Interface	This field displays the interface on the top of which the PPPoE/PPTP interface is.
Account Profile	This field displays the ISP account used by this PPPoE/PPTP interface.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

10.4.2 PPP Interface Add or Edit

Note: You have to set up an ISP account before you create a PPPoE/PPTP interface.

This screen lets you configure a PPPoE or PPTP interface. To access this screen, click the Add icon or select an entry in the PPP interface summary screen and click the Edit icon.

Figure 74 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add

Each field is explained in the following table.

Table 56 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
Create new object	Click this button to create an ISP Account that you may use for the ISP settings in this screen.
General Settings
Enable Interface	Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface.
Interface Properties
Interface Name	Specify a name for the interface. It can use alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and underscores, and it can be up to 11 characters long.
Base Interface	Select the interface upon which this PPP interface is built.Note: Multiple PPP interfaces can use the same base interface.
Zone	Select the zone to which this PPP interface belongs. The zone determines the security settings the UAG uses for the interface.
Description	Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ( ) + / : = ? ! *@@$-% - characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
Connectivity
Nailed-Up	Select this if the PPPoE/PPTP connection should always be up. Clear this to have the UAG establish the PPPoE/PPTP connection only when there is traffic. You might use this option if a lot of traffic needs to go through the interface or it does not cost extra to keep the connection up all the time.
Dial-on-Demand	Select this to have the UAG establish the PPPoE/PPTP connection only when there is traffic. You might use this option if there is little traffic through the interface or if it costs money to keep the connection available.
ISP Setting
Account Profile	Select the ISP account that this PPPoE/PPTP interface uses. The drop-down box lists ISP accounts by name. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new ISP account (see Chapter 39 on page 351 for details).
Protocol	This field is read-only. It displays the protocol specified in the ISP account.
User Name	This field is read-only. It displays the user name for the ISP account.
Service Name	This field is read-only. It displays the PPPoE service name specified in the ISP account. This field is not available if the ISP account uses PPTP.
Server IP	This field is read-only. It displays the IP address of the PPTP server specified in the ISP account.This field is not available if the ISP account uses PPPoE.
Connection ID	This field is read-only. It displays the identification name for the PPTP server specified in the ISP account.This field is not available if the ISP account uses PPPoE.
IP Address Assignment	Click Show Advanced Settings to display more settings. Click Hide Advanced Settings to display fewer settings.
Get Automatically	Select this if this interface is a DHCP client. In this case, the DHCP server configures the IP address automatically. The subnet mask and gateway are always defined automatically in PPPoE/PPTP interfaces.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this if you want to specify the IP address manually.
IP Address	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address for this interface.
Gateway	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The UAG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface.
Metric	Enter the priority of the gateway (the ISP) on this interface. The UAG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the UAG uses the one that was configured first.
Interface Parameters
Egress Bandwidth	Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
MTU	Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the UAG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1492. Usually, this value is 1492.
Connectivity Check	The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the UAG stops routing to the gateway. The UAG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check.
Enable Connectivity Check	Select this to turn on the connection check.
Check Method	Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the UAG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the UAG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available.
Check Period	Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts.
Check Timeout	Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure.
Check Fail Tolerance	Enter the number of consecutive failures before the UAG stops routing through the gateway.
Check Default Gateway	Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check.
Check this address	Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it.
Check Port	This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check.
Related Setting
Configure WAN_TRUNK	Click WAN_TRUNK to go to a screen where you can configure the interface as part of a WAN trunk for load balancing.
Policy Route	Click Policy Route to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this interface.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

10.5 VLAN Interfaces

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) divides a physical network into multiple logical networks. The standard is defined in IEEE 802.1q.

In this example, there are two physical networks and three departments A, B, and C. The physical networks are connected to hubs, and the hubs are connected to the router.

Figure 75 Example: Before VLAN

Alternatively, you can divide the physical networks into three VLANs.

Figure 76 Example: After VLAN

Each VLAN is a separate network with separate IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways. Each VLAN also has a unique identification number (ID). The ID is a 12-bit value that is stored in the MAC header. The VLANs are connected to switches, and the switches are connected to the router. (If one switch has enough connections for the entire network, the network does not need switches A and B.)

• Traffic inside each VLAN is layer-2 communication (data link layer, MAC addresses). It is handled by the switches. As a result, the new switch is required to handle traffic inside VLAN 2. Traffic is only broadcast inside each VLAN, not each physical network.
• Traffic between VLANs (or between a VLAN and another type of network) is layer-3 communication (network layer, IP addresses). It is handled by the router.

This approach provides a few advantages.

• Increased performance - In VLAN 2, the extra switch should route traffic inside the sales department faster than the router does. In addition, broadcasts are limited to smaller, more logical groups of users.
• Higher security - If each computer has a separate physical connection to the switch, then broadcast traffic in each VLAN is never sent to computers in another VLAN.
• Better manageability - You can align network policies more appropriately for users. For example, you can set different bandwidth limits for each VLAN (each department in the example above). These rules are also independent of the physical network, so you can change the physical network without changing policies.

In this example, the new switch handles the following types of traffic:

• Inside VLAN 2.
• Between the router and VLAN 1.
• Between the router and VLAN 2.
• Between the router and VLAN 3.

VLAN Interfaces Overview

In the UAG, each VLAN is called a VLAN interface. As a router, the UAG routes traffic between VLAN interfaces, but it does not route traffic within a VLAN interface. All traffic for each VLAN interface can go through only one Ethernet interface, though each Ethernet interface can have one or more VLAN interfaces.

Note: Each VLAN interface is created on top of only one Ethernet interface.

Otherwise, VLAN interfaces are similar to other interfaces in many ways. They have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions. They restrict bandwidth and packet size. They can provide DHCP services, and they can verify the gateway is available.

10.5.1 VLAN Interface Summary Screen

This screen lists every VLAN interface and virtual interface created on top of VLAN interfaces. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN.

Figure 77 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN

Each field is explained in the following table.

Table 57 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new VLAN interface.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Create Virtual Interface	To open the screen where you can create a virtual interface, select an interface and click Create Virtual Interface.
Object References	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the name of the interface.
Port/VID	For VLAN interfaces, this field displays • the Ethernet interface on which the VLAN interface is created • the VLAN ID For virtual interfaces, this field is blank.
IP Address	This field displays the current IP address of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the interface does not have an IP address yet. This screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (static) or dynamically assigned ( dhcp). IP addresses are always static in virtual interfaces.
Mask	This field displays the interface's subnet mask in dot decimal notation.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

10.5.2 VLAN Interface Add/Edit

This screen lets you configure IP address assignment, interface bandwidth parameters, DHCP settings, and connectivity check for each VLAN interface. To access this screen, click the Add icon

or select an entry in the VLAN summary screen and click the Edit icon. The following screen appears.

Figure 78 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Edit

Each field is explained in the following table.

Table 58 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
General Settings
Enable Interface	Select this to turn this interface on. Clear this to disable this interface.
Interface Properties
Interface Type	Select one of the following option depending on the type of network to which the UAG is connected or if you want to additionally manually configure some related settings. internal is for connecting to a local network. Other corresponding configuration options: DHCP server and DHCP relay. The UAG automatically adds default SNAT settings for traffic flowing from this interface to an external interface. external is for connecting to an external network (like the Internet). The UAG automatically adds this interface to the default WAN trunk. For general, the rest of the screen's options do not automatically adjust and you must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for the interface.
Interface Name	This field is read-only if you are editing an existing VLAN interface. Enter the number of the VLAN interface. You can use a number from 0~4094. For example, vlan0, vlan8, and so on. The total number of VLANs you can configure on the UAG depends on the model.
Zone	Select the zone to which the VLAN interface belongs.
Base Port	Select the Ethernet interface on which the VLAN interface runs.
VLAN ID	Enter the VLAN ID. This 12-bit number uniquely identifies each VLAN. Allowed values are 1 - 4094. (0 and 4095 are reserved.)
Description	Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ( ) + / : =? ! *@$ _ % - characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
IP Address Assignment
Get Automatically	Select this if this interface is a DHCP client. In this case, the DHCP server configures the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway automatically.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.
IP Address	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The UAG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface.
Metric	Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The UAG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the UAG uses the one that was configured first.
Interface Parameters
Egress Bandwidth	Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
MTU	Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the UAG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500.
Connectivity Check	The UAG can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often to check the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the UAG stops routing to the gateway. The UAG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check.
Enable Connectivity Check	Select this to turn on the connection check.
Check Method	Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the UAG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the UAG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available.
Check Period	Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts.
Check Timeout	Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure.
Check Fail Tolerance	Enter the number of consecutive failures before the UAG stops routing through the gateway.
Check Default Gateway	Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check.
Check this address	Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it.
Check Port	This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check.
DHCP Setting	The DHCP settings are available for the LAN interfaces.
DHCP	Select what type of DHCP service the UAG provides to the network. Choices are: None - the UAG does not provide any DHCP services. There is already a DHCP server on the network. DHCP Relay - the UAG routes DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers you specify. The DHCP server(s) may be on another network. DHCP Server - the UAG assigns IP addresses and provides subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. The UAG is the DHCP server for the network.
	These fields appear if the UAG is a DHCP Relay.
Relay Server 1	Enter the IP address of a DHCP server for the network.
Relay Server 2	This field is optional. Enter the IP address of another DHCP server for the network.
	These fields appear if the UAG is a DHCP Server.
IP Pool Start Address	Enter the IP address from which the UAG begins allocating IP addresses. If you want to assign a static IP address to a specific computer, click Add Static DHCP.
	If this field is blank, the Pool Size must also be blank. In this case, the UAG can assign every IP address allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interface's IP address.
Pool Size	Enter the number of IP addresses to allocate. This number must be at least one and is limited by the interface's Subnet Mask. For example, if the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 and IP Pool Start Address is 10.10.10.10, the UAG can allocate 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.254, or 245 IP addresses.
	If this field is blank, the IP Pool Start Address must also be blank. In this case, the UAG can assign every IP address allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interface's IP address.
First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server	Specify the IP addresses up to three DNS servers for the DHCP clients to use. Use one of the following ways to specify these IP addresses.
	Custom Defined - enter a static IP address.
	From ISP - select the DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server.
	Device - the DHCP clients use the IP address of this interface and the UAG works as a DNS relay.
First WINS Server, Second WINS Server	Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using.
Default Router	If you set this interface to DHCP Server, you can select to use either the interface's IP address or another IP address as the default router. This default router will become the DHCP clients' default gateway.
	To use another IP address as the default router, select Custom Defined and enter the IP address.
Lease time	Specify how long each computer can use the information (especially the IP address) before it has to request the information again. Choices are:
	infinite - select this if IP addresses never expire.
	days, hours, and minutes - select this to enter how long IP addresses are valid.
Extended Options	This table is available if you selected DHCP server.
	Configure this table if you want to send more information to DHCP clients through DHCP packets.
Add	Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 10.3.3 on page 118.
Edit	Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Name	This is the name of the DHCP option.
Code	This is the code number of the DHCP option.
Type	This is the type of the set value for the DHCP option.
Value	This is the value set for the DHCP option.
Enable IP/MAC Binding	Select this option to have the UAG enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses for this VLAN. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses.
Enable Logs for IP/MAC Binding Violation	Select this option to have the UAG generate a log if a device connected to this VLAN attempts to use an IP address that is bound to another device's MAC address.
Static DHCP Table	Configure a list of static IP addresses the UAG assigns to computers connected to the interface. Otherwise, the UAG assigns an IP address dynamically using the interface's IP Pool Start Address and Pool Size.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry and click this to delete it.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
IP Address	Enter the IP address to assign to a device with this entry's MAC address.
MAC	Enter the MAC address to which to assign this entry's IP address.
Description	Enter a description to help identify this static DHCP entry. You can use alphanumeric and ( ) + / : =? ! *@$-% - characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
Related Setting
Configure WAN_TRUNK	Click WAN_TRUNK to go to a screen where you can set this VLAN to be part of a WAN trunk for load balancing.
Configure Policy Route	Click Policy Route to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this VLAN.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

10.6 Bridge Interfaces

This section introduces bridges and bridge interfaces and then explains the screens for bridge interfaces.

Bridge Overview

A bridge creates a connection between two or more network segments at the layer-2 (MAC address) level. In the following example, bridge X connects four network segments.

When the bridge receives a packet, the bridge records the source MAC address and the port on which it was received in a table. It also looks up the destination MAC address in the table. If the bridge knows on which port the destination MAC address is located, it sends the packet to that port. If the destination MAC address is not in the table, the bridge broadcasts the packet on every port (except the one on which it was received).

In the example above, computer A sends a packet to computer B. Bridge X records the source address 0A:0A:0A:0A:0A and port 2 in the table. It also looks up 0B:0B:0B:0B:0B in the table. There is no entry yet, so the bridge broadcasts the packet on ports 1, 3, and 4.

Table 59 Example: Bridge Table After Computer A Sends a Packet to Computer B

MAC ADDRESS	PORT
0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A	2

If computer B responds to computer A, bridge X records the source address 0B:0B:0B:0B:0B and port 4 in the table. It also looks up 0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A in the table and sends the packet to port 2 accordingly.

Table 60 Example: Bridge Table After Computer B Responds to Computer A

MAC ADDRESS	PORT
0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A	2
0B:0B:0B:0B:0B:0B	4

Bridge Interface Overview

A bridge interface creates a software bridge between the members of the bridge interface. It also becomes the UAG's interface for the resulting network.

This UAG can bridge traffic between some interfaces while it routes traffic for other interfaces. The bridge interfaces also support more functions, like interface bandwidth parameters, DHCP settings, and connectivity check. To use the whole UAG as a transparent bridge, add all of the UAG's interfaces to a bridge interface.

A bridge interface may consist of the following members:

Zero or one VLAN interfaces (and any associated virtual VLAN interfaces)
- Any number of Ethernet interfaces (and any associated virtual Ethernet interfaces)

When you create a bridge interface, the UAG removes the members' entries from the routing table and adds the bridge interface's entries to the routing table. For example, this table shows the routing table before and after you create bridge interface br0 (250.250.250.0/23) between lan1 and vlan1.

Table 61 Example: Routing Table Before and After Bridge Interface br0 Is Created

IP ADDRESS(ES)	DESTINATION
210.210.210.0/24	lan1
210.211.1.0/24	lan1:1
221.221.221.0/24	vlan0
222.222.222.0/24	vlan1
230.230.230.192/26	wan1
IP ADDRESS(ES)	DESTINATION
221.221.221.0/24	vlan0
230.230.230.192/26	wan1

In this example, virtual Ethernet interface lan1:1 is also removed from the routing table when lan1 is added to br0. Virtual interfaces are automatically added to or remove from a bridge interface when the underlying interface is added or removed.

10.6.1 Bridge Interface Summary

This screen lists every bridge interface and virtual interface created on top of bridge interfaces. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge.

Figure 79 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 62 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Create Virtual Interface	To open the screen where you can create a virtual interface, select an interface and click Create Virtual Interface.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the name of the interface.
IP Address	This field displays the current IP address of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the interface does not have an IP address yet. This screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (STATIC) or dynamically assigned (DHCP). IP addresses are always static in virtual interfaces.
Member	This field displays the Ethernet interfaces and VLAN interfaces in the bridge interface. It is blank for virtual interfaces.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

10.6.2 Bridge Interface Add/Edit

This screen lets you configure IP address assignment, interface bandwidth parameters, DHCP settings, and connectivity check for each bridge interface. To access this screen, click the Add icon, or select an entry in the Bridge summary screen and click the Edit icon. The following screen appears.

Figure 80 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add

Each field is described in the table below.

Table 63 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
General Settings
Enable Interface	Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface.
Interface Properties
Interface Type	Select one of the following option depending on the type of network to which the UAG is connected or if you want to additionally manually configure some related settings. internal is for connecting to a local network. Other corresponding configuration options: DHCP server and DHCP relay. The UAG automatically adds default SNAT settings for traffic flowing from this interface to an external interface. external is for connecting to an external network (like the Internet). The UAG automatically adds this interface to the default WAN trunk. For general, the rest of the screen's options do not automatically adjust and you must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for the interface.
Interface Name	This field is read-only if you are editing the interface. Enter the name of the bridge interface. The format is brx, where x is 0 - 11. For example, br0, br3, and so on.
Zone	Select the zone to which the interface is to belong. You use zones to apply security settings such as firewall, and remote management.
Description	Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ( ) + / : =? ! *#@$-% - characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
Member Configuration
Available	This field displays Ethernet interfaces and VLAN interfaces that can become part of the bridge interface. An interface is not available in the following situations: • There is a virtual interface on top of it • It is already used in a different bridge interface Select one, and click the >> arrow to add it to the bridge interface. Each bridge interface can only have one VLAN interface.
Member	This field displays the interfaces that are part of the bridge interface. Select one, and click the << arrow to remove it from the bridge interface.
IP Address Assignment
Get Automatically	Select this if this interface is a DHCP client. In this case, the DHCP server configures the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway automatically.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.
IP Address	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway	This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The UAG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface.
Metric	Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The UAG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the UAG uses the one that was configured first.
Interface Parameters
Egress Bandwidth	Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
MTU	Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the UAG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500.
DHCP Setting
DHCP	Select what type of DHCP service the UAG provides to the network. Choices are: None - the UAG does not provide any DHCP services. There is already a DHCP server on the network. DHCP Relay - the UAG routes DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers you specify. The DHCP server(s) may be on another network. DHCP Server - the UAG assigns IP addresses and provides subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. The UAG is the DHCP server for the network.
	These fields appear if the UAG is a DHCP Relay.
Relay Server 1	Enter the IP address of a DHCP server for the network.
Relay Server 2	This field is optional. Enter the IP address of another DHCP server for the network.
	These fields appear if the UAG is a DHCP Server.
IP Pool Start Address	Enter the IP address from which the UAG begins allocating IP addresses. If you want to assign a static IP address to a specific computer, click Add Static DHCP. If this field is blank, the Pool Size must also be blank. In this case, the UAG can assign every IP address allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interface's IP address.
Pool Size	Enter the number of IP addresses to allocate. This number must be at least one and is limited by the interface's Subnet Mask. For example, if the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 and IP Pool Start Address is 10.10.10.10, the UAG can allocate 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.254, or 245 IP addresses. If this field is blank, the IP Pool Start Address must also be blank. In this case, the UAG can assign every IP address allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interface's IP address.
First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server	Specify the IP addresses up to three DNS servers for the DHCP clients to use. Use one of the following ways to specify these IP addresses. Custom Defined - enter a static IP address. From ISP - select the DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server. Device - the DHCP clients use the IP address of this interface and the UAG works as a DNS relay.
First WINS Server, Second WINS Server	Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using.
Default Router	If you set this interface to DHCP Server, you can select to use either the interface's IP address or another IP address as the default router. This default router will become the DHCP clients' default gateway.To use another IP address as the default router, select Custom Defined and enter the IP address.
Lease time	Specify how long each computer can use the information (especially the IP address) before it has to request the information again. Choices are:infinite - select this if IP addresses never expiredays, hours, and minutes - select this to enter how long IP addresses are valid.
Extended Options	This table is available if you selected DHCP server.Configure this table if you want to send more information to DHCP clients through DHCP packets.
Add	Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 10.3.3 on page 118.
Edit	Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Name	This is the name of the DHCP option.
Code	This is the code number of the DHCP option.
Type	This is the type of the set value for the DHCP option.
Value	This is the value set for the DHCP option.
Enable IP/MAC Binding	Select this option to have this interface enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses.
Enable Logs for IP/MAC BindingViolation	Select this option to have the UAG generate a log if a device connected to this interface attempts to use an IP address that is bound to another device's MAC address.
Static DHCP Table	Configure a list of static IP addresses the UAG assigns to computers connected to the interface. Otherwise, the UAG assigns an IP address dynamically using the interface's IP Pool Start Address and Pool Size.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry and click this to delete it.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
IP Address	Enter the IP address to assign to a device with this entry's MAC address.
MAC Address	Enter the MAC address to which to assign this entry's IP address.
Description	Enter a description to help identify this static DHCP entry. You can use alphanumeric and ( )+/:=?!*#@$-_characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
Connectivity Check	The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the UAG stops routing to the gateway. The UAG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check.
Enable Connectivity Check	Select this to turn on the connection check.
Check Method	Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the UAG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the UAG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available.
Check Period	Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts.
Check Timeout	Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure.
Check Fail Tolerance	Enter the number of consecutive failures before the UAG stops routing through the gateway.
Check Default Gateway	Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check.
Check this address	Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it.
Check Port	This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check.
Related Setting
Configure WAN TRUNK	Click WAN TRUNK to go to a screen where you can configure the interface as part of a WAN trunk for load balancing.
Configure Policy Route	Click Policy Route to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this bridge interface.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

10.7 Virtual Interfaces

Use virtual interfaces to tell the UAG where to route packets.

Virtual interfaces can be created on top of Ethernet interfaces, VLAN interfaces, or bridge interfaces. Virtual VLAN interfaces recognize and use the same VLAN ID. Otherwise, there is no difference between each type of virtual interface. Network policies (for example, firewall rules) that apply to the underlying interface automatically apply to the virtual interface as well.

Like other interfaces, virtual interfaces have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions. However, you have to manually specify the IP address and subnet mask; virtual interfaces cannot be DHCP clients. Like other interfaces, you can restrict bandwidth through virtual interfaces, but you cannot change the MTU. The virtual interface uses the same MTU that the underlying interface uses. Unlike other interfaces, virtual interfaces do not provide DHCP services, and they do not verify that the gateway is available.

10.7.1 Virtual Interfaces Add/Edit

This screen lets you configure IP address assignment and interface parameters for virtual interfaces. To access this screen, click the Create Virtual Interface icon in the Ethernet, VLAN, or bridge interface summary screen.

Figure 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Create Virtual Interface

Each field is described in the table below.

Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Create Virtual Interface

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Interface Properties
Interface Name	This field is read-only. It displays the name of the virtual interface, which is automatically derived from the underlying Ethernet interface, VLAN interface, or bridge interface.
Description	Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ( ) + / : =? ! *#@$_% - characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
IP Address Assignment
IP Address	Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask	Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway	Enter the IP address of the gateway. The UAG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface.
Metric	Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The UAG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the UAG uses the one that was configured first.
Interface Parameters
Egress Bandwidth	Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the UAG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

10.8 Interface Technical Reference

Here is more detailed information about interfaces on the UAG.

IP Address Assignment

Most interfaces have an IP address and a subnet mask. This information is used to create an entry in the routing table.

Figure 82 Example: Entry in the Routing Table Derived from Interfaces

Table 65 Example: Routing Table Entries for Interfaces

IP ADDRESS(ES)	DESTINATION
100.100.1.1/16	lan1
200.200.200.1/24	wan1

For example, if the UAG gets a packet with a destination address of 100.100.25.25, it routes the packet to interface lan1. If the UAG gets a packet with a destination address of 200.200.200.200, it routes the packet to interface wan1.

In most interfaces, you can enter the IP address and subnet mask manually. In PPPoE/PPTP interfaces, however, the subnet mask is always 255.255.255.255 because it is a point-to-point interface. For these interfaces, you can only enter the IP address.

In many interfaces, you can also let the IP address and subnet mask be assigned by an external DHCP server on the network. In this case, the interface is a DHCP client. Virtual interfaces, however, cannot be DHCP clients. You have to assign the IP address and subnet mask manually.

In general, the IP address and subnet mask of each interface should not overlap, though it is possible for this to happen with DHCP clients.

In the example above, if the UAG gets a packet with a destination address of 5.5.5.5, it might not find any entries in the routing table. In this case, the packet is dropped. However, if there is a default router to which the UAG should send this packet, you can specify it as a gateway in one of the interfaces. For example, if there is a default router at 200.200.200.100, you can create a gateway at 200.200.200.100 on wan1. In this case, the UAG creates the following entry in the routing table.

Table 66 Example: Routing Table Entry for a Gateway

IP ADDRESS(ES)	DESTINATION
0.0.0.0/0	200.200.200.100

The gateway is an optional setting for each interface. If there is more than one gateway, the UAG uses the gateway with the lowest metric, or cost. If two or more gateways have the same metric, the UAG uses the one that was set up first (the first entry in the routing table). In PPPoE/PPTP interfaces, the other computer is the gateway for the interface by default. In this case, you should specify the metric.

If the interface gets its IP address and subnet mask from a DHCP server, the DHCP server also specifies the gateway, if any.

Interface Parameters

The UAG restricts the amount of traffic into and out of the UAG through each interface.

• Egress bandwidth sets the amount of traffic the UAG sends out through the interface to the network.
• Ingress bandwidth sets the amount of traffic the UAG allows in through the interface from the network.

If you set the bandwidth restrictions very high, you effectively remove the restrictions.

The UAG also restricts the size of each data packet. The maximum number of bytes in each packet is called the maximum transmission unit (MTU). If a packet is larger than the MTU, the UAG divides it into smaller fragments. Each fragment is sent separately, and the original packet is re-assembled later. The smaller the MTU, the more fragments sent, and the more work required to re-assemble packets correctly. On the other hand, some communication channels, such as Ethernet over ATM, might not be able to handle large data packets.

DHCP Settings

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP, RFC 2131, RFC 2132) provides a way to automatically set up and maintain IP addresses, subnet masks, gateways, and some network information (such as the IP addresses of DNS servers) on computers in the network. This reduces the amount of manual configuration you have to do and usually uses available IP addresses more efficiently.

In DHCP, every network has at least one DHCP server. When a computer (a DHCP client) joins the network, it submits a DHCP request. The DHCP servers get the request; assign an IP address; and provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and available network information to the DHCP client. When the DHCP client leaves the network, the DHCP servers can assign its IP address to another DHCP client.

In the UAG, some interfaces can provide DHCP services to the network. In this case, the interface can be a DHCP relay or a DHCP server.

As a DHCP relay, the interface routes DHCP requests to DHCP servers on different networks. You can specify more than one DHCP server. If you do, the interface routes DHCP requests to all of them. It is possible for an interface to be a DHCP relay and a DHCP client simultaneously.

As a DHCP server, the interface provides the following information to DHCP clients.

• IP address - If the DHCP client's MAC address is in the UAG's static DHCP table, the interface assigns the corresponding IP address. If not, the interface assigns IP addresses from a pool, defined by the starting address of the pool and the pool size.

Table 67 Example:Assigning IP Addresses from a Pool

START IP ADDRESS	POOL SIZE	RANGE OF ASSIGNED IP ADDRESS
50.50.50.33	5	50.50.50.33 - 50.50.50.37
75.75.75.1	200	75.75.75.1 - 75.75.75.200
99.99.1.1	1023	99.99.1.1 - 99.99.4.255
120.120.120.100	100	120.120.120.100 - 120.120.120.199

The UAG cannot assign the first address (network address) or the last address (broadcast address) in the subnet defined by the interface's IP address and subnet mask. For example, in the first entry, if the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the UAG cannot assign 50.50.50.0 or 50.50.50.255. If the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the UAG cannot assign 50.50.0.0 or 50.50.255.255. Otherwise, it can assign every IP address in the range, except the interface's IP address.

If you do not specify the starting address or the pool size, the interface the maximum range of IP addresses allowed by the interface's IP address and subnet mask. For example, if the interface's IP address is 9.9.9.1 and subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the starting IP address in the pool is 9.9.9.2, and the pool size is 253.

• Subnet mask - The interface provides the same subnet mask you specify for the interface. See IP Address Assignment on page 142.
• Gateway - The interface provides the same gateway you specify for the interface. See IP Address Assignment on page 142.
• DNS servers - The interface provides IP addresses for up to three DNS servers that provide DNS services for DHCP clients. You can specify each IP address manually (for example, a company's own DNS server), or you can refer to DNS servers that other interfaces received from DHCP servers (for example, a DNS server at an ISP). These other interfaces have to be DHCP clients.

It is not possible for an interface to be the DHCP server and a DHCP client simultaneously.

WINS

WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) is a Windows implementation of NetBIOS Name Server (NBNS) on Windows. It keeps track of NetBIOS computer names. It stores a mapping table of your network's computer names and IP addresses. The table is dynamically updated for IP addresses assigned by DHCP. This helps reduce broadcast traffic since computers can query the server instead of broadcasting a request for a computer name's IP address. In this way WINS is similar to DNS, although WINS does not use a hierarchy (unlike DNS). A network can have more than one WINS server. Samba can also serve as a WINS server.

PPPoE/PPTP Overview

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE, RFC 2516) and Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP, RFC 2637) are usually used to connect two computers over phone lines or broadband connections. PPPoE is often used with cable modems and DSL connections. It provides the following advantages:

• The access and authentication method works with existing systems, including RADIUS.
• You can access one of several network services. This makes it easier for the service provider to offer the service
• PPPoE does not usually require any special configuration of the modem.

PPTP is used to set up virtual private networks (VPN) in unsecure TCP/IP environments. It sets up two sessions.

1 The first one runs on TCP port 1723. It is used to start and manage the second one.
2 The second one uses Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE, RFC 2890) to transfer information between the computers.

PPTP is convenient and easy-to-use, but you have to make sure that firewalls support both PPTP sessions.

11.1 Overview

Use trunks for WAN traffic load balancing to increase overall network throughput and reliability. Load balancing divides traffic loads between multiple interfaces. This allows you to improve quality of service and maximize bandwidth utilization for multiple ISP links.

Maybe you have two Internet connections with different bandwidths. You could set up a trunk that uses spillover or weighted round robin load balancing so time-sensitive traffic (like video) usually goes through the higher-bandwidth interface. For other traffic, you might want to use least load first load balancing to even out the distribution of the traffic load.

Suppose ISP A has better connections to Europe while ISP B has better connections to Australia. You could use policy routes and trunks to have traffic for your European branch office primarily use ISP A and traffic for your Australian branch office primarily use ISP B.

Or maybe one of the UAG's interfaces is connected to an ISP that is also your Voice over IP (VoIP) service provider. You can use policy routing to send the VoIP traffic through a trunk with the interface connected to the VoIP service provider set to active and another interface (connected to another ISP) set to passive. This way VoIP traffic goes through the interface connected to the VoIP service provider whenever the interface's connection is up.

11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Trunk summary screen (Section 11.2 on page 149) to configure link sticking and view the list of configured trunks and which load balancing algorithm each trunk uses.
• Use the Add Trunk screen (Section 11.2.1 on page 150) to configure the member interfaces for a trunk and the load balancing algorithm the trunk uses.
• Use the Add System Default screen (Section 11.2.2 on page 152) to configure the load balancing algorithm for the system default trunk.

11.1.2 What You Need to Know

• Add WAN interfaces to trunks to have multiple connections share the traffic load.
• If one WAN interface's connection goes down, the UAG sends traffic through another member of the trunk.
• For example, you connect one WAN interface to one ISP and connect a second WAN interface to a second ISP. The UAG balances the WAN traffic load between the connections. If one interface's connection goes down, the UAG can automatically send its traffic through another interface.

You can also use trunks with policy routing to send specific traffic types through the best WAN interface for that type of traffic.

• If that interface's connection goes down, the UAG can still send its traffic through another interface.
• You can define multiple trunks for the same physical interfaces.

Load Balancing Algorithms

The following sections describe the load balancing algorithms the UAG can use to decide which interface the traffic (from the LAN) should use for a session². The available bandwidth you configure on the UAG refers to the actual bandwidth provided by the ISP and the measured bandwidth refers to the bandwidth an interface is currently using.

Least Load First

The least load first algorithm uses the current (or recent) outbound bandwidth utilization of each trunk member interface as the load balancing index(es) when making decisions about to which interface a new session is to be distributed. The outbound bandwidth utilization is defined as the measured outbound throughput over the available outbound bandwidth.

Here the UAG has two WAN interfaces connected to the Internet. The configured available outbound bandwidths for wan1 and ppp0 are 512K and 256K respectively.

Figure 83 Least Load First Example

The outbound bandwidth utilization is used as the load balancing index. In this example, the measured (current) outbound throughput of wan1 is 412K and ppp0 is 198K. The UAG calculates the load balancing index as shown in the table below.

Since ppp0 has a smaller load balancing index (meaning that it is less utilized than wan1), the UAG will send the subsequent new session traffic through ppp0.

Table 68 Least Load First Example

INTERFACE	OUTBOUND		LOAD BALANCING INDEX (M/A)
	AVAILABLE (A)	MEASURED (M)
wan1	512 K	412 K	0.8
ppp0	256 K	198 K	0.77

Weighted Round Robin

Round Robin scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when an interface has more traffic than it can handle. A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that interface. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue is

given an equal amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.

The Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm is best suited for situations when the bandwidths set for the two WAN interfaces are different. Similar to the Round Robin (RR) algorithm, the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm sets the UAG to send traffic through each WAN interface in turn. In addition, the WAN interfaces are assigned weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight.

For example, in the figure below, the configured available bandwidth of wan1 is 1M and ppp0 is 512K. You can set the UAG to distribute the network traffic between the two interfaces by setting the weight of wan1 and ppp0 to 2 and 1 respectively. The UAG assigns the traffic of two sessions to wan1 and one session's traffic to ppp0 in each round of 3 new sessions.

Figure 84 Weighted Round Robin Algorithm Example

Spillover

The spillover load balancing algorithm sends network traffic to the first interface in the trunk member list until the interface's maximum allowable load is reached, then sends the excess network traffic of new sessions to the next interface in the trunk member list. This continues as long as there are more member interfaces and traffic to be sent through them.

Suppose the first trunk member interface uses an unlimited access Internet connection and the second is billed by usage. Spillover load balancing only uses the second interface when the traffic load exceeds the threshold on the first interface. This fully utilizes the bandwidth of the first interface to reduce Internet usage fees and avoid overloading the interface.

In this example figure, the upper threshold of the first interface is set to 800K. The UAG sends network traffic of new sessions that exceed this limit to the secondary WAN interface.

Figure 85 Spillover Algorithm Example

11.2 The Trunk Summary Screen

Click Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk to open the Trunk screen. This screen lists the configured trunks and the load balancing algorithm that each is configured to use.

Figure 86 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk

The following table describes the items in this screen.

Table 69 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
Disconnect Connections Before Falling Back	Select this to terminate existing connections on an interface which is set to passive mode when any interface set to active mode in the same trunk comes back up.
Enable Default SNAT	Select this to have the UAG use the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address of the packets it sends out through its WAN trunks. The UAG automatically adds SNAT settings for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces.
Default Trunk Selection	Select whether the UAG is to use the default system WAN trunk or one of the user configured WAN trunks as the default trunk for routing traffic from internal interfaces to external interfaces.
User Configuration / System Default	The UAG automatically adds all external interfaces into the pre-configured system default SYSTEM_DEFAULT WAN_TRUNK. You cannot delete it. You can create your own User Configuration trunks and customize the algorithm, member interfaces and the active/passive mode.
Add	Click this to create a new user-configured trunk.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove a user-configured trunk, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Name	This field displays the label that you specified to identify the trunk.
Algorithm	This field displays the load balancing method the trunk is set to use.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

11.2.1 Configuring a User-Defined Trunk

Click Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk, in the User Configuration table click the Add (or Edit) icon to open the following screen. Use this screen to create or edit a WAN trunk entry.

Figure 87 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Add (or Edit)

Each field is described in the table below.

Table 70 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Add (or Edit)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	This is read-only if you are editing an existing trunk. When adding a new trunk, enter a descriptive name for this trunk. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_, or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Load Balancing Algorithm	Select a load balancing method to use from the drop-down list box. Select Weighted Round Robin to balance the traffic load between interfaces based on their respective weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, if the weight ratio of wan1 and ppp0 interfaces is 2:1, the UAG chooses wan1 for 2 sessions' traffic and ppp0 for 1 session's traffic in each round of 3 new sessions. Select Least Load First to send new session traffic through the least utilized trunk member. Select Spillover to send network traffic through the first interface in the group member list until there is enough traffic that the second interface needs to be used (and so on).
Load Balancing Index(es)	This field is available if you selected to use the Least Load First or Spillover method. Select Outbound, Inbound, or Outbound + Inbound to set the traffic to which the UAG applies the load balancing method. Outbound means the traffic traveling from an internal interface (ex. LAN) to an external interface (ex. WAN). Inbound means the opposite.
	The table lists the trunk's member interfaces. You can add, edit, remove, or move entries for user configured trunks.
Add	Click this to add a member interface to the trunk. Select an interface and click Add to add a new member interface after the selected member interface.
Edit	Select an entry and click Edit to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove a member interface, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Move	To move an interface to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface.
#	This column displays the priorities of the group's interfaces. The order of the interfaces in the list is important since they are used in the order they are listed.
Member	Click this table cell and select an interface to be a group member.
Mode	Click this table cell and select Active to have the UAG always attempt to use this connection. Select Passive to have the UAG only use this connection when all of the connections set to active are down. You can only set one of a group's interfaces to passive mode.
Weight	This field displays with the weighted round robin load balancing algorithm. Specify the weight (1~10) for the interface. The weights of the different member interfaces form a ratio. This ratio determines how much traffic the UAG assigns to each member interface. The higher an interface's weight is (relative to the weights of the interfaces), the more sessions that interface should handle.
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. This field displays with the least load first load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the UAG is to allow to come in through the interface per second. Note: You can configure the bandwidth of an interface in the corresponding interface edit screen.
Egress Bandwidth	This field displays with the least load first or spillover load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the UAG is to send out through the interface per second.Note: You can configure the bandwidth of an interface in the corresponding interface edit screen.
Total Bandwidth	This field displays with the spillover load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the UAG is to send out and allow to come in through the interface per second.You can configure the bandwidth of an interface in the corresponding interface edit screen.
Spillover	This field displays with the spillover load balancing algorithm. Specify the maximum bandwidth of traffic in kilobits per second (1~1048576) to send out through the interface before using another interface. When this spillover bandwidth limit is exceeded, the UAG sends new session traffic through the next interface. The traffic of existing sessions still goes through the interface on which they started.The UAG uses the group member interfaces in the order that they are listed.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

11.2.2 Configuring the System Default Trunk

In the Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk screen and the System Default section, select the default trunk entry and click Edit to open the following screen. Use this screen to change the load balancing algorithm and view the bandwidth allocations for each member interface.

Note: The available bandwidth is allocated to each member interface equally and is not allowed to be changed for the default trunk.

Figure 88 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Edit (System Default)

Each field is described in the table below.

Table 71 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Edit (System Default)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	This field displays the name of the selected system default trunk.
Load Balancing Algorithm	Select the load balancing method to use for the trunk. Select Weighted Round Robin to balance the traffic load between interfaces based on their respective weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, if the weight ratio of wan1 and PPP0 interfaces is 2:1, the UAG chooses wan1 for 2 sessions' traffic and PPP0 for 1 session's traffic in each round of 3 new sessions. Select Least Load First to send new session traffic through the least utilized trunk member. Select Spillover to send network traffic through the first interface in the group member list until there is enough traffic that the second interface needs to be used (and so on).
	The table lists the trunk's member interfaces. This table is read-only.
#	This column displays the priorities of the group's interfaces. The order of the interfaces in the list is important since they are used in the order they are listed.
Member	This column displays the name of the member interfaces.
Mode	This field displays Active if the UAG always attempt to use this connection. This field displays Passive if the UAG only use this connection when all of the connections set to active are down. Only one of a group's interfaces can be set to passive mode.
Weight	This field displays with the weighted round robin load balancing algorithm. Specify the weight (1~10) for the interface. The weights of the different member interfaces form a ratio. s
Ingress Bandwidth	This is reserved for future use. This field displays with the least load first load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the UAG is to allow to come in through the interface per second.
Egress Bandwidth	This field displays with the least load first or spillover load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the UAG is to send out through the interface per second.
Spillover	This field displays with the spillover load balancing algorithm. Specify the maximum bandwidth of traffic in kilobits per second (1~1048576) to send out through the interface before using another interface. When this spillover bandwidth limit is exceeded, the UAG sends new session traffic through the next interface. The traffic of existing sessions still goes through the interface on which they started. The UAG uses the group member interfaces in the order that they are listed.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

Policy and Static Routes

12.1 Policy and Static Routes Overview

Use policy routes and static routes to override the UAG's default routing behavior in order to send packets through the appropriate interface.

For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the UAG's LAN interface. The UAG routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the UAG's default gateway (R1). You create one policy route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another policy route to communicate with a separate network behind another router (R3) connected to the LAN.

Figure 89 Example of Policy Routing Topology

12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Policy Route screens (see Section 12.2 on page 156) to list and configure policy routes.
• Use the Static Route screens (see Section 12.3 on page 161) to list and configure static routes.

12.1.2 What You Need to Know

Policy Routing

Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the UAG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator.

Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis, prior to the normal routing.

How You Can Use Policy Routing

• Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections.
• Cost Savings - IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high-bandwidth, high-cost paths while using low-cost paths for batch traffic.
• Load Sharing - Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths.
• NAT - The UAG performs NAT by default for traffic going to or from the WAN interfaces. A routing policy's SNAT allows network administrators to have traffic received on a specified interface use a specified IP address as the source IP address.

Note: The UAG automatically uses SNAT for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces. For example LAN to WAN traffic.

Static Routes

The UAG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the UAG send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes.

Policy Routes Versus Static Routes

• Policy routes are more flexible than static routes. You can select more criteria for the traffic to match and can also use schedules, and NAT.
  Policy routes are only used within the UAG itself.
• Policy routes take priority over static routes. If you need to use a routing policy on the UAG and propagate it to other routers, you could configure a policy route and an equivalent static route.

DiffServ

QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types.

DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.

DSCP Marking and Per-Hop Behavior

DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.

DSCP (6 bits)

Unused (2 bits)

DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.

The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.

Finding Out More

• See Section 12.4 on page 163 for more background information on policy routing.

12.2 Policy Route Screen

Click Configuration > Network > Routing to open the Policy Route screen. Use this screen to see the configured policy routes.

A policy route defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria. The action is taken only when all the criteria are met. The criteria can include the user name, source address and incoming interface, destination address, schedule, IP protocol (ICMP, UDP, TCP, etc.) and port.

The actions that can be taken include:

• Routing the packet to a different gateway, outgoing interface, or trunk.

IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of RAS in style and in implementation.

Figure 90 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 72 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
Use Policy Route to Override Direct Route	Select this to have the UAG forward packets that match a policy route according to the policy route instead of sending the packets directly to a connected network.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To change a rule's position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
#	This is the number of an individual policy route.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active, red when the next hop's connection is down, and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
User	This is the name of the user (group) object from which the packets are sent. any means all users.
Schedule	This is the name of the schedule object. none means the route is active at all times if enabled.
Incoming	This is the interface on which the packets are received.
Source	This is the name of the source IP address (group) object. any means all IP addresses.
Destination	This is the name of the destination IP address (group) object. any means all IP addresses.
DSCP Code	This is the DSCP value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies.any means all DSCP values or no DSCP marker.default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort trafficThe "af" entries stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the "af" identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 163 for more details.
Service	This is the name of the service object. any means all services.
Source Port	This is the name of a service object. The UAG applies the policy route to the packets sent from the corresponding service port. any means all service ports.
Next-Hop	This is the next hop to which packets are directed. It helps forward packets to their destinations and can be a router, outgoing interface or trunk.
DSCP Marking	This is how the UAG handles the DSCP value of the outgoing packets that match this route. If this field displays a DSCP value, the UAG applies that DSCP value to the route's outgoing packets. preserve means the UAG does not modify the DSCP value of the route's outgoing packets. default means the UAG sets the DSCP value of the route's outgoing packets to 0. The "af" choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the "af" identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 163 for more details.
SNAT	This is the source IP address that the route uses. It displays none if the UAG does not perform NAT for this route.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

12.2.1 Policy Route Edit Screen

Click Configuration > Network > Routing to open the Policy Route screen. Then click the Add or Edit icon in the Configuration section. The Add Policy Route or Policy Route Edit screen opens. Use this screen to configure or edit a policy route.

Figure 91 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 73 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
Create new Object	Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Configuration
Enable	Select this to activate the policy.
Description	Enter a descriptive name of up to 31 printable ASCII characters for the policy.
Criteria
User	Select a user name or user group from which the packets are sent.
Incoming	Select where the packets are coming from; any, an interface, or the UAG itself (Device). For an interface, you also need to select the individual interface.
Please select one member	This field displays only when you set Incoming to Interface. Select an interface from which the packets are sent.
Source Address	Select a source IP address object from which the packets are sent.
Destination Address	Select a destination IP address object to which the traffic is being sent.
DSCP Code	Select a DSCP code point value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies or select User Define to specify another DSCP code point. The lower the number the higher the priority with the exception of 0 which is usually given only best-effort treatment.any means all DSCP value or no DSCP marker.default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort trafficThe "af" choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the "af" identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 163 for more details.
User-Defined DSCP Code	Use this field to specify a custom DSCP code point.
Schedule	Select a schedule to control when the policy route is active. none means the route is active at all times if enabled.
Service	Select a service or service group to identify the type of traffic to which this policy route applies.
Source Port	Select a service or service group to identify the source port of packets to which the policy route applies.
Next-Hop
Type	Select Auto to have the UAG use the routing table to find a next-hop and forward the matched packets automatically.Select Gateway to route the matched packets to the next-hop router or switch you specified in the Gateway field. You have to set up the next-hop router or switch as a HOST address object first.Select Trunk to route the matched packets through the interfaces in the trunk group based on the load balancing algorithm.Select Interface to route the matched packets through the specified outgoing interface to a gateway (which is connected to the interface).
Gateway	This field displays when you select Gateway in the Type field. Select a HOST address object. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your UAG that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router or switch on the same segment as your UAG's interface(s).
Trunk	This field displays when you select Trunk in the Type field. Select a trunk group to have the UAG send the packets via the interfaces in the group.
Interface	This field displays when you select Interface in the Type field. Select an interface to have the UAG send traffic that matches the policy route through the specified interface.
Auto-Disable	This field displays when you select Interface or Trunk in the Type field. Select this to have the UAG automatically disable this policy route when the next hop's connection is down.
DSCP Marking
DSCP Marking	Set how the UAG handles the DSCP value of the outgoing packets that match this route. Select one of the pre-defined DSCP values to apply or select User Define to specify another DSCP value. The "af" choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the "af" identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 163 for more details. Select preserve to have the UAG keep the packets' original DSCP value. Select default to have the UAG set the DSCP value of the packets to 0.
User-Defined DSCP Marking	Use this field to specify a custom DSCP value.
Address Translation	Use this section to configure NAT for the policy route.
Source Network Address Translation	Select none to not use NAT for the route. Select outgoing-interface to use the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address of the packets that matches this route. To use SNAT for a virtual interface that is in the same WAN trunk as the physical interface to which the virtual interface is bound, the virtual interface and physical interface must be in different subnets. Otherwise, select a pre-defined address (group) to use as the source IP address(es) of the packets that match this route. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new address (group) to use as the source IP address(es) of the packets that match this route.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

12.3 IP Static Route Screen

Click Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. This screen displays the configured static routes. Configure static routes to be able to propagate the routing information to other routers.

Figure 92 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 74 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new static route.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
#	This is the number of an individual static route.
Destination	This is the destination IP address.
Subnet Mask	This is the IP subnet mask.
Next-Hop	This is the IP address of the next-hop gateway or the interface through which the traffic is routed. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your UAG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Metric	This is the route's priority among the UAG's routes. The smaller the number, the higher priority the route has.

12.3.1 Static Route Add/Edit Screen

Select a static route index number and click Add or Edit. The screen shown next appears. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route.

Figure 93 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 75 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Destination IP	This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, enter the specific IP address here and use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 (for IPv4) in the Subnet Mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
Subnet Mask	Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP	Select the radio button and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your UAG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Interface	Select the radio button and a predefined interface through which the traffic is sent.
Metric	Metric represents the "cost" of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be 0~127. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

12.4 Policy Routing Technical Reference

Here is more detailed information about some of the features you can configure in policy routing.

NAT and SNAT

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address in a packet in one network to a different IP address in another network. Use SNAT (Source NAT) to change the source IP address in one network to a different IP address in another network.

Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ

Assured Forwarding (AF) behavior is defined in RFC 2597. The AF behavior group defines four AF classes. Inside each class, packets are given a high, medium or low drop precedence. The drop precedence determines the probability that routers in the network will drop packets when congestion occurs. If congestion occurs between classes, the traffic in the higher class (smaller numbered class) is generally given priority. Combining the classes and drop precedence produces the following twelve DSCP encodings from AF11 through AF43. The decimal equivalent is listed in brackets.

Table 76 Assured Forwarding (AF) Behavior Group

	CLASS 1	CLASS 2	CLASS 3	CLASS 4
Low Drop Precedence	AF11 (10)	AF21 (18)	AF31 (26)	AF41 (34)
Medium Drop Precedence	AF12 (12)	AF22 (20)	AF32 (28)	AF42 (36)
High Drop Precedence	AF13 (14)	AF23 (22)	AF33 (30)	AF43 (38)

13.1 Zones Overview

Set up zones to configure network security and network policies in the UAG. A zone is a group of interfaces. The UAG uses zones instead of interfaces in many security and policy settings, such as firewall rules and remote management.

Zones cannot overlap. Each Ethernet interface, VLAN interface, bridge interface, and PPPoE/PPTP interface can be assigned to at most one zone. Virtual interfaces are automatically assigned to the same zone as the interface on which they run.

Figure 94 Example: Zones

13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the Zone screens (see Section 13.2 on page 165) to manage the UAG's zones.

13.1.2 What You Need to Know

Effects of Zones on Different Types of Traffic

Zones effectively divide traffic into three types--intra-zone traffic, inter-zone traffic, and extra-zone traffic--which are affected differently by zone-based security and policy settings.

Intra-zone Traffic

• Intra-zone traffic is traffic between interfaces in the same zone. For example, in Figure 94 on page 164, traffic between VLAN1 and the Ethernet is intra-zone traffic.
• You can also set up firewall rules to control intra-zone traffic (for example, LAN1-to-LAN1), but many other types of zone-based security and policy settings do not affect intra-zone traffic.

Inter-zone Traffic

Inter-zone traffic is traffic between interfaces in different zones. For example, in Figure 94 on page 164, traffic between VLAN1 and the Internet is inter-zone traffic. This is the normal case when zone-based security and policy settings apply.

Extra-zone Traffic

• Extra-zone traffic is traffic to or from any interface that is not assigned to a zone. For example, in Figure 94 on page 164, traffic to or from computer C is extra-zone traffic.
• Some zone-based security and policy settings may apply to extra-zone traffic, especially if you can set the zone attribute in them to Any or All. See the specific feature for more information.

13.2 The Zone Screen

The Zone screen provides a summary of all zones. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove zones. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Zone.

Figure 95 Configuration > Network > Zone

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 77 Configuration > Network > Zone

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
User Configuration / System Default	The UAG comes with pre-configured System Default zones that you cannot delete. You can create your own User Configuration zones
Add	Click this to create a new, user-configured zone.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove a user-configured trunk, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Name	This field displays the name of the zone.
Member	This field displays the names of the interfaces that belong to each zone.

13.2.1 Zone Edit

The Zone Edit screen allows you to add or edit a zone. To access this screen, go to the Zone screen (see Section 13.2 on page 165), and click the Add icon or an Edit icon.

Figure 96 Network > Zone > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 78 Network > Zone > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	For a system default zone, the name is read only.For a user-configured zone, type the name used to refer to the zone. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (___), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Member List	Available lists the interfaces that do not belong to any zone. Select the interfaces that you want to add to the zone you are editing, and click the right arrow button to add them.Member lists the interfaces that belong to the zone. Select any interfaces that you want to remove from the zone, and click the left arrow button to remove them.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

14.1 DDNS Overview

Dynamic DNS (DDNS) services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address.

14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the DDNS screen (see Section 14.2 on page 169) to view a list of the configured DDNS domain names and their details.
• Use the DDNS Add/Edit screen (see Section 14.2.1 on page 170) to add a domain name to the UAG or to edit the configuration of an existing domain name.

14.1.2 What You Need to Know

DNS maps a domain name to a corresponding IP address and vice versa. Similarly, dynamic DNS maps a domain name to a dynamic IP address. As a result, anyone can use the domain name to contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.) or to access your FTP server or Web site, regardless of the current IP address.

Note: You must have a public WAN IP address to use Dynamic DNS.

You must set up a dynamic DNS account with a supported DNS service provider before you can use Dynamic DNS services with the UAG. When registration is complete, the DNS service provider gives you a password or key. At the time of writing, the UAG supports the following DNS service providers. See the listed websites for details about the DNS services offered by each.

Table 79 DDNS Service Providers

PROVIDER	SERVICE TYPES SUPPORTED	WEBSITE
DynDNS	Dynamic DNS, Static DNS, and Custom DNS	www.dyndns.com
Dynu	Basic, Premium	www.dynu.com
No-IP	No-IP	www.no-ip.com
Peanut Hull	Peanut Hull	www.oray.cn
3322	3322 Dynamic DNS, 3322 Static DNS	www.3322.org

Note: Record your DDNS account's user name, password, and domain name to use to configure the UAG.

After, you configure the UAG, it automatically sends updated IP addresses to the DDNS service provider, which helps redirect traffic accordingly.

14.2 The DDNS Screen

The DDNS screen provides a summary of all DDNS domain names and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to add new domain names, edit the configuration for existing domain names, and delete domain names. Click Configuration > Network > DDNS to open the following screen.

Figure 97 Configuration > Network > DDNS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 80 Configuration > Network > DDNS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This is the number of an individual DDNS profile.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Profile Name	This field displays the descriptive profile name for this entry.
DDNS Type	This field displays which DDNS service you are using.
Domain Name	This field displays each domain name the UAG can route.
Primary Interface/IP	This field displays the interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name followed by how the UAG determines the IP address for the domain name. from interface - The IP address comes from the specified interface. auto detected -The DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the UAG for the IP address to use for the domain name. custom - The IP address is static.
Backup Interface/IP	This field displays the alternate interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name followed by how the UAG determines the IP address for the domain name. The UAG uses the backup interface and IP address when the primary interface is disabled, its link is down or its connectivity check fails. from interface - The IP address comes from the specified interface. auto detected -The DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the UAG for the IP address to use for the domain name. custom - The IP address is static.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

14.2.1 The Dynamic DNS Add/Edit Screen

The DDNS Add/Edit screen allows you to add a domain name to the UAG or to edit the configuration of an existing domain name. Click Configuration > Network > DDNS and then an Add or Edit icon to open this screen.

Figure 98 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 81 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings	Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields.
Enable DDNS Profile	Select this check box to use this DDNS entry.
Profile Name	When you are adding a DDNS entry, type a descriptive name for this DDNS entry in the UAG. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. This field is read-only when you are editing an entry.
DDNS Type	Select the type of DDNS service you are using.
DDNS Account
Username	Type the user name used when you registered your domain name. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric characters and the underscore. Spaces are not allowed. For a Dynu DDNS entry, this user name is the one you use for logging into the service, not the name recorded in your personal information in the Dynu website.
Password	Type the password provided by the DDNS provider. You can use up to 64 alphanumeric characters and the underscore. Spaces are not allowed.
Retype to Confirm	Retype your new password for confirmation.
DDNS Settings
Domain name	Type the domain name you registered. You can use up to 255 characters.
Primary Binding Address	Use these fields to set how the UAG determines the IP address that is mapped to your domain name in the DDNS server. The UAG uses the Backup Binding Address if the interface specified by these settings is not available.
Interface	Select the interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name. Select any to let the domain name be used with any interface.
IP Address	The options available in this field vary by DDNS provider. Interface -The UAG uses the IP address of the specified interface. This option appears when you select a specific interface in the Primary Binding Address Interface field. Auto - If the interface has a dynamic IP address, the DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the UAG for the IP address to use for the domain name. You may want to use this if there are one or more NAT routers between the UAG and the DDNS server.Note: The UAG may not determine the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the UAG and the DDNS server.Custom - If you have a static IP address, you can select this to use it for the domain name. The UAG still sends the static IP address to the DDNS server.
Custom IP	This field is only available when the IP Address is Custom. Type the IP address to use for the domain name.
Backup Binding Address	Use these fields to set an alternate interface to map the domain name to when the interface specified by the Primary Binding Interface settings is not available.
Interface	Select the interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name. Select any to let the domain name be used with any interface. Select None to not use a backup address.
IP Address	The options available in this field vary by DDNS provider.
	Interface -The UAG uses the IP address of the specified interface. This option appears when you select a specific interface in the Backup Binding Address Interface field.
	Auto -The DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the UAG for the IP address to use for the domain name. You may want to use this if there are one or more NAT routers between the UAG and the DDNS server.
	Note: The UAG may not determine the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the UAG and the DDNS server.
	Custom - If you have a static IP address, you can select this to use it for the domain name. The UAG still sends the static IP address to the DDNS server.
Custom IP	This field is only available when the IP Address is Custom. Type the IP address to use for the domain name.
Enable Wildcard	This option is only available with a DynDNS account.
	Enable the wildcard feature to alias subdomains to be aliased to the same IP address as your (dynamic) domain name. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
Mail Exchanger	This option is only available with a DynDNS account.
	DynDNS can route e-mail for your domain name to a mail server (called a mail exchanger). For example, DynDNS routes e-mail for [e-mail] to the host record specified as the mail exchanger.
	If you are using this service, type the host record of your mail server here. Otherwise leave the field blank.
	See www.dyndns.org for more information about mail exchangers.
Backup Mail Exchanger	This option is only available with a DynDNS account.
	Select this check box if you are using DynDNS's backup service for e-mail. With this service, DynDNS holds onto your e-mail if your mail server is not available. Once your mail server is available again, the DynDNS server delivers the mail to you. See www.dyndns.org for more information about this service.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

15.1 NAT Overview

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. Use Network Address Translation (NAT) to make computers on a private network behind the UAG available outside the private network. If the UAG has only one public IP address, you can make the computers in the private network available by using ports to forward packets to the appropriate private IP address.

Suppose you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 172.16.0.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.

Figure 99 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example

15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the NAT screens (see Section 15.2 on page 174) to view and manage the list of NAT rules and see their configuration details. You can also create new NAT rules and edit or delete existing ones.

15.1.2 What You Need to Know

NAT is also known as virtual server, port forwarding, or port translation.

Finding Out More

• See Section 15.3 on page 178 for technical background information related to these screens.

15.2 The NAT Screen

The NAT summary screen provides a summary of all NAT rules and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new NAT rules and edit and delete existing NAT rules. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator and click Configuration > Network > NAT. The following screen appears, providing a summary of the existing NAT rules.

Figure 100 Configuration > Network > NAT

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 82 Configuration > Network > NAT

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the name of the entry.
Mapping Type	This field displays what kind of NAT this entry performs: Virtual Server, 1:1 NAT, or Many 1:1 NAT.
Interface	This field displays the interface on which packets for the NAT entry are received.
Original IP	This field displays the original destination IP address (or address object) of traffic that matches this NAT entry. It displays any if there is no restriction on the original destination IP address.
Mapped IP	This field displays the new destination IP address for the packet.
Protocol	This field displays the service used by the packets for this NAT entry. It displays any if there is no restriction on the services.
Original Port	This field displays the original destination port(s) of packets for the NAT entry. This field is blank if there is no restriction on the original destination port.
Mapped Port	This field displays the new destination port(s) for the packet. This field is blank if there is no restriction on the original destination port.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

15.2.1 The NAT Add/Edit Screen

The NAT Add/Edit screen lets you create new NAT rules and edit existing ones. To open this window, open the NAT summary screen. (See Section 15.2 on page 174.) Then, click on an Add icon or Edit icon to open the following screen.

Figure 101 Configuration > Network > NAT > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 83 Configuration > Network > NAT > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Enable Rule	Use this option to turn the NAT rule on or off.
Rule Name	Type in the name of the NAT rule. The name is used to refer to the NAT rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Classification	Select what kind of NAT this rule is to perform. Virtual Server - This makes computers on a private network behind the UAG available to a public network outside the UAG (like the Internet). 1:1 NAT - If the private network server will initiate sessions to the outside clients, select this to have the UAG translate the source IP address of the server's outgoing traffic to the same public IP address that the outside clients use to access the server. Many 1:1 NAT - If you have a range of private network servers that will initiate sessions to the outside clients and a range of public IP addresses, select this to have the UAG translate the source IP address of each server's outgoing traffic to the same one of the public IP addresses that the outside clients use to access the server. The private and public ranges must have the same number of IP addresses. One many 1:1 NAT rule works like multiple 1:1 NAT rules, but it eases configuration effort since you only create one rule.
Incoming Interface	Select the interface on which packets for the NAT rule must be received. It can be an Ethernet, VLAN, bridge, or PPPoE/PPTP interface.
Original IP	Specify the destination IP address of the packets received by this NAT rule's specified incoming interface. any - Select this to use all of the incoming interface's IP addresses including dynamic addresses or those of any virtual interfaces built upon the selected incoming interface. User Defined - Select this to manually enter an IP address in the User Defined Original IP field. For example, you could enter a static public IP assigned by the ISP without having to create a virtual interface for it. Host address - select a host address object to use the IP address it specifies. The list also includes address objects based on interface IPs. So for example you could select an address object based on a WAN interface even if it has a dynamic IP address.
User-Defined Original IP	This field is available if Original IP is User Defined. Type the destination IP address that this NAT rule supports.
Original IP Subnet/Range	This field displays for Many 1:1 NAT. Select the destination IP address subnet or IP address range that this NAT rule supports. The original and mapped IP address subnets or ranges must have the same number of IP addresses.
Mapped IP	Select to which translated destination IP address this NAT rule forwards packets. User Defined - this NAT rule supports a specific IP address, specified in the User-Defined Mapped IP field.
User-Defined Mapped IP	This field is available if Mapped IP is User Defined. Type the translated destination IP address that this NAT rule supports.
Mapped IP Subnet/Range	This field displays for Many 1:1 NAT. Select to which translated destination IP address subnet or IP address range this NAT rule forwards packets. The original and mapped IP address subnets or ranges must have the same number of IP addresses.
Port Mapping Type	Use the drop-down list box to select how many original destination ports this NAT rule supports for the selected destination IP address (Original IP). Choices are:Any - this NAT rule supports all the destination ports. Service - this NAT rule supports the destination port(s) used by the specified service(s). Port - this NAT rule supports one destination port. Ports - this NAT rule supports a range of destination ports. You might use a range of destination ports for unknown services or when one server supports more than one service.This field is read-only and displays any for Many 1:1 NAT.
Original Service	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Service. Select the original service whose destination port(s) is supported by this NAT rule.
Mapped Service	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Service. Select the translated service whose destination port(s) is supported if this NAT rule forwards the packet.
Protocol Type	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Port or Ports. Select the protocol (TCP,UDP, or any) used by the service requesting the connection.
Original Port	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Port. Enter the original destination port this NAT rule supports.
Mapped Port	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Port. Enter the translated destination port if this NAT rule forwards the packet.
Original Start Port	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the beginning of the range of original destination ports this NAT rule supports.
Original End Port	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the end of the range of original destination ports this NAT rule supports.
Mapped Start Port	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the beginning of the range of translated destination ports if this NAT rule forwards the packet.
Mapped End Port	This field is available if Port Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the end of the range of translated destination ports if this NAT rule forwards the packet. The original port range and the mapped port range must be the same size.
Enable NAT Loopback	Enable NAT loopback to allow users connected to any interface (instead of just the specified Incoming Interface) to use the NAT rule's specified Original IP address to access the Mapped IP device. For users connected to the same interface as the Mapped IP device, the UAG uses that interface's IP address as the source address for the traffic it sends from the users to the Mapped IP device.For example, if you configure a NAT rule to forward traffic from the WAN to a LAN server, enabling NAT loopback allows users connected to other interfaces to also access the server. For LAN users, the UAG uses the LAN interface's IP address as the source address for the traffic it sends to the LAN server. See NAT Loopback on page 178 for more details.If you do not enable NAT loopback, this NAT rule only applies to packets received on the rule's specified incoming interface.
Firewall	By default the firewall blocks incoming connections from external addresses. After you configure your NAT rule settings, click the Firewall link to configure a firewall rule to allow the NAT rule's traffic to come in.The UAG checks NAT rules before it applies To-Device firewall rules, so To-Device firewall rules do not apply to traffic that is forwarded by NAT rules. The UAG still checks other firewall rules according to the source IP address and mapped IP address.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to return to the NAT summary screen without creating the NAT rule (if it is new) or saving any changes (if it already exists).

15.3 NAT Technical Reference

Here is more detailed information about NAT on the UAG.

NAT Loopback

Suppose an NAT 1:1 rule maps a public IP address to the private IP address of a LAN SMTP e-mail server to give WAN users access. NAT loopback allows other users to also use the rule's original IP to access the mail server.

For example, a LAN user's computer at IP address 172.16.0.89 queries a public DNS server to resolve the SMTP server's domain name (xxx.LAN-SMTP.com in this example) and gets the SMTP server's mapped public IP address of 1.1.1.1.

Figure 102 LAN Computer Queries a Public DNS Server

The LAN user's computer then sends traffic to IP address 1.1.1.1. NAT loopback uses the IP address of the UAG's lan1 interface (172.16.0.1) as the source address of the traffic going from the LAN users to the LAN SMTP server.

Figure 103 LAN to LAN Traffic

The LAN SMTP server replies to the UAG's LAN IP address and the UAG changes the source address to 1.1.1.1 before sending it to the LAN user. The return traffic's source matches the original destination address (1.1.1.1). If the SMTP server replied directly to the LAN user without the traffic going through NAT, the source would not match the original destination address which would cause the LAN user's computer to shut down the session.

Figure 104 LAN to LAN Return Traffic

VPN 1-1 mapping allows an authenticated user in your network to access the Internet or an external server using a public IP address different from the one used by the UAG's WAN interface. With VPN 1-1 mapping, each user that logs into the UAG and matches a pre-configured mapping rule can obtain an individual public IP address.

For example, users A and B are behind the UAG and both want to use a unique WAN IP address to access a public server through the UAG's WAN1 interface. After the user is authenticated by the UAG and meets the criteria in a VPN 1-1 mapping rule, the UAG applies the rule settings and assigns a public IP address to the user. Outgoing traffic from user A will then be sent through the WAN1 interface using the mapped public IP address 10.10.1.35. Outgoing traffic from user B will be sent through the WAN1 interface using the mapped public IP address 10.10.1.36.

Figure 105 VPN 1-1 Mapping Example

16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the VPN 1-1 Mapping screens (see Section 16.2 on page 181) to enable and configure VPN 1-1 mapping to assign a public IP address to each of users that match the rules.
• Use the VPN 1-1 Mapping > Profile screen (see Section 16.3 on page 183) to configure a pool profile which defines the public IP address(es) that the UAG assigns to the matched users and the interface through which the user's traffic is forwarded.

16.1.2 What You Need to Know

VPN 1-1 Mapping, Firewall and Policy Route

With VPN 1-1 mapping, the relevant packet flow for traffic from the matched user is:

1 Firewall
2 Policy Route
3 VPN 1-1 Mapping

If you set a policy route to the same user/user group as a VPN 1-1 mapping rule, the UAG checks the policy routing rules first and forwards the traffic to a specified next-hop if matched. You need to make sure there is no firewall rule(s) blocking the traffic from the matched user or user group.

To make the example in Figure 105 on page 180 work, make sure you have the following settings. For traffic between Ian1 or Ian2 and wan1:

• a from LAN1/LAN2 to WAN firewall rule (default) to allow any traffic from the user A/B from Ian1 or Ian2 to wan1. Responses to this request are allowed automatically.
• a VPN 1-1 mapping rule to forward any traffic from the user A/B through the wan1 interface using a unique public IP address.

16.2 The VPN 1-1 Mapping General Screen

The VPN 1-1 Mapping summary screen provides a summary of all VPN 1-1 mapping rules and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new VPN 1-1 mapping rules and edit and delete existing VPN 1-1 mapping rules. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator and click Configuration > Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping. The following screen appears, providing a summary of the existing VPN 1-1 mapping rules.

Figure 106 Configuration > Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 84 Configuration > Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable VPN 1-1 Mapping	Select this option to enable VPN 1-1 mapping on the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To change a rule's position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
User / Group	This field displays the name of the user or user group object to which this rule is applied.
Pool Profile	This field displays the name of the pool profile used by this rule.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

16.2.1 The VPN 1-1 Mapping Edit Screen

Click Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping to open the VPN 1-1 Mapping > General screen. Then click the Add or Edit icon to open the VPN 1-1 Mapping Add/Edit Policy screen where you can configure the rule.

Figure 107 Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 85 Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create New Object	Click this button to create any new user/group objects that you need to use in this screen.
Enable Policy	Use this option to turn the VPN 1-1 mapping rule on or off.
User/Group	Use the drop-down list box to select the individual or group for which you want to use this rule. Select any to have the mapping rule apply to all of the traffic that the UAG receives from any user.
Pool Profile	The Selectable Pool Profiles list displays the name(s) of the pool profile(s) you can select for this mapping rule. To associate a pool profile to this mapping rule, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to the Selected Pool Profiles list. To remove a pool profile, select the name(s) in the Selected Pool Profiles list and click the left arrow button. You can also use the up or down arrow button to change the order of members in the Selected Pool Profiles list.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

16.3 The VPN 1-1 Mapping Profile Screen

The VPN 1-1 Mapping Profile summary screen provides a summary of all pool profiles for VPN 1-1 mapping and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new pool profiles and edit and delete existing profiles. A pool profile defines the public IP address(es) that the UAG assigns to the matched users and the interface through which the user's traffic is forwarded. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator and click Configuration > Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Profile. The following screen appears, providing a summary of the existing IP address pool profiles.

Figure 108 Configuration > Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 86 Configuration > Network > VPN 1-1 Mapping > Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to add an entry to the table.If you click Add without selecting an entry in advance then the new entry appears as the first entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Name	This field displays a descriptive name for the profile. Enter a descriptive name to identify the profile.
Address	This field displays the name of the IP address object the profile is set to use. Select an address object that presents the IP address(es), which can be assigned to the matched users by the UAG.Note: You cannot select an address group object at the time of writing.Note: It's recommended that the IP addresses of the selected address object and the WAN interface are in the same subnet so that the UAG can receive response packets from the remote node.
Interface	This field displays the name of the interface the profile is set to use. Select the interface through which the UAG sends traffic from the matched users.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

17.1 Overview

HTTP redirect forwards the client's HTTP request (except HTTP traffic destined for the UAG) to a web proxy server. In the following example, proxy server A is connected to the Ian2 interface in the LAN2 zone. When a client connected to the Ian1 interface in the LAN1 zone wants to open a web page, its HTTP request is redirected to proxy server A first. If proxy server A cannot find the web page in its cache, a policy route allows it to access the Internet to get them from a server. Proxy server A then forwards the response to the client.

Figure 109 HTTP Redirect Example

17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the HTTP Redirect screens (see Section 17.2 on page 186) to display and edit the HTTP redirect rules.

17.1.2 What You Need to Know

Web Proxy Server

A proxy server helps client devices make indirect requests to access the Internet or outside network resources/services. A proxy server can act as a firewall or an ALG (application layer gateway) between the private network and the Internet or other networks. It also keeps hackers from knowing internal IP addresses.

A client connects to a web proxy server each time he/she wants to access the Internet. The web proxy provides caching service to allow quick access and reduce network usage. The proxy checks its local cache for the requested web resource first. If it is not found, the proxy gets it from the specified server and forwards the response to the client.

HTTP Redirect, Firewall and Policy Route

With HTTP redirect, the relevant packet flow for HTTP traffic is:

1 Firewall
2 HTTP Redirect
3 Policy Route

Even if you set a policy route to the same incoming interface and service as a HTTP redirect rule, the UAG checks the HTTP redirect rules first and forwards HTTP traffic to a proxy server if matched. You need to make sure there is no firewall rule(s) blocking the HTTP requests from the client to the proxy server.

You also need to manually configure a policy route to forward the HTTP traffic from the proxy server to the Internet. To make the example in Figure 109 on page 185 work, make sure you have the following settings.

For HTTP traffic between Ian1 and Ian2:

• a from LAN1 to LAN2 firewall rule to allow HTTP requests from Ian1 to Ian2. Responses to this request are allowed automatically.
• a HTTP redirect rule to forward HTTP traffic from Ian1 to proxy server A.

For HTTP traffic between lan2 and wan1:

• a from LAN2 to WAN firewall rule (default) to allow HTTP requests from lan2 to wan1. Responses to these requests are allowed automatically.
• a policy route to forward HTTP traffic from proxy server A to the Internet.

17.2 The HTTP Redirect Screen

To configure redirection of a HTTP request to a proxy server, click Configuration > Network > HTTP Redirect. This screen displays the summary of the HTTP redirect rules.

Note: You can configure up to one HTTP redirect rule for each (incoming) interface.

Figure 110 Configuration > Network > HTTP Redirect

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 87 Configuration > Network > HTTP Redirect

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This is the descriptive name of a rule.
Interface	This is the interface on which the request must be received.
Proxy Server	This is the IP address of the proxy server.
Port	This is the service port number used by the proxy server.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

17.2.1 The HTTP Redirect Edit Screen

Click Network > HTTP Redirect to open the HTTP Redirect screen. Then click the Add or Edit icon to open the HTTP Redirect Edit screen where you can configure the rule.

Figure 111 Network > HTTP Redirect > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 88 Network > HTTP Redirect > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Use this option to turn the HTTP redirect rule on or off.
Name	Enter a name to identify this rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Interface	Select the interface on which the HTTP request must be received for the UAG to forward it to the specified proxy server.
Proxy Server	Enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Port	Enter the port number that the proxy server uses.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

18.1 Overview

SMTP redirect forwards the authenticated client's SMTP message to a SMTP server, that handles all outgoing e-mail messages. In the following example, SMTP server A is connected to the Ian2 interface in the LAN2 zone. When a client connected to the Ian1 interface in the LAN1 zone logs into the UAG and wants to send an e-mail, its SMTP message is redirected to SMTP server A. SMTP server A then sends it to a mail server, where the message will be delivered to the recipient.

The UAG forwards SMTP traffic using TCP port 25.

Figure 112 SMTP Redirect Example

18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the SMTP Redirect screens (see Section 18.2 on page 190) to display and edit the SMTP redirect rules.

18.1.2 What You Need to Know

SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the Internet's message transport standard. It controls the sending of e-mail messages between servers. E-mail clients (also called e-mail applications) then use mail server protocols such as POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) to retrieve e-mail. E-mail clients also generally use SMTP to send messages to a mail

server. The older POP2 requires SMTP for sending messages while the newer POP3 can be used with or without it. This is why many e-mail applications require you to specify both the SMTP server and the POP or IMAP server (even though they may actually be the same server).

SMTP Redirect, Firewall and Policy Route

With SMTP redirect, the relevant packet flow for SMTP traffic is:

1 Firewall
2 SMTP Redirect
3 Policy Route

Even if you set a policy route to the same incoming interface and service as a SMTP redirect rule, the UAG checks the SMTP redirect rules first and forwards SMTP traffic to a SMTP server if matched. You need to make sure there is no firewall rule(s) blocking the SMTP traffic from the client to the SMTP server.

You also need to manually configure a policy route to forward the SMTP traffic from the SMTP server to the Internet. To make the example in Figure 112 on page 189 work, make sure you have the following settings.

For SMTP traffic between Ian1 and Ian2:

• a from LAN1 to LAN2 firewall rule to allow SMTP messages from lan1 to lan2. Responses to this request are allowed automatically.
• a SMTP redirect rule to forward SMTP traffic from Ian1 to SMTP server A.

For SMTP traffic between lan2 and wan1:

• a from LAN2 to WAN firewall rule (default) to allow SMTP messages from lan2 to wan1. Responses to these requests are allowed automatically.
• a policy route to forward SMTP messages from SMTP server A to the Internet.

18.2 The SMTP Redirect Screen

To configure redirection of a SMTP message to a SMTP server, click Configuration > Network > SMTP Redirect. This screen displays the summary of the SMTP redirect rules.

Note: You can configure up to one SMTP redirect rule for each (incoming) interface.

Figure 113 Configuration > Network > SMTP Redirect

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 89 Configuration > Network > SMTP Redirect

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable SMTP Redirect	Select this option to turn on the SMTP redirect feature on the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To change a rule's position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
User/Group	This is the user account or user group name to whose SMTP traffic this rule is applied.
Incoming Interface	This is the name of the interface on which the SMTP traffic must be received.
Source Address	This is the name of the source IP address object from which the SMTP traffic should be sent. If any displays, the rule is effective for every source.
SMTP Server	This is the IP address of the SMTP server to which the matched SMTP traffic is forwarded.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

18.2.1 The SMTP Redirect Edit Screen

Click Network > SMTP Redirect to open the SMTP Redirect screen. Then click the Add or Edit icon to open the SMTP Redirect Edit screen where you can configure the rule.

Figure 114 Network > SMTP Redirect > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 90 Network > SMTP Redirect > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Use this option to turn the SMTP redirect rule on or off.
User	Use the drop-down list box to select the individual user or user group for which you want to use this rule. Select any to have the SMTP redirect rule apply to all of the SMTP messages that the UAG receives from any user.
Incoming Interface	Select the interface on which the SMTP traffic must be received for the UAG to forward it to the specified SMTP server.
Source Address	Select the source address or address group for whom this rule applies. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select any if the rule is effective for every source.
SMTP Server	Enter the IP address of the SMTP server.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

19.1 ALG Overview

Application Layer Gateway (ALG) allows the following application to operate properly through the UAG's NAT.

• FTP - File Transfer Protocol - an Internet file transfer service.

The ALG feature is only needed for traffic that goes through the UAG's NAT.

19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the ALG screen (Section 19.2 on page 194) to set up the FTP ALG settings.

19.1.2 What You Need to Know

Application Layer Gateway (ALG), NAT and Firewall

The UAG can function as an Application Layer Gateway (ALG) to allow certain NAT un-friendly applications to operate properly through the UAG's NAT and firewall. The UAG dynamically creates an implicit NAT session and firewall session for the application's traffic from the WAN to the LAN. The ALG on the UAG supports all of the UAG's NAT mapping types.

FTP ALG

The FTP ALG allows TCP packets with a specified port destination to pass through. If the FTP server is located on the LAN, you must also configure NAT (port forwarding) and firewall rules if you want to allow access to the server from the WAN.

ALG and Trunks

If you send your ALG-managed traffic through an interface trunk and all of the interfaces are set to active, you can configure routing policies to specify which interface the ALG-managed traffic uses.

You could also have a trunk with one interface set to active and a second interface set to passive. The UAG does not automatically change ALG-managed connections to the second (passive) interface when the active interface's connection goes down. When the active interface's connection fails, the client needs to re-initialize the connection through the second interface (that was set to passive) in order to have the connection go through the second interface.

19.1.3 Before You Begin

You must also configure the firewall and enable NAT in the UAG to allow sessions initiated from the WAN.

19.2 The ALG Screen

Click Configuration > Network > ALG to open the ALG screen. Use this screen to turn the ALG off or on, configure the port numbers to which it applies.

Figure 115 Configuration > Network > ALG

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 91 Configuration > Network > ALG

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable FTP ALG	Turn on the FTP ALG to detect FTP (File Transfer Program) traffic and help build FTP sessions through the UAG's NAT.
Enable FTP Transformations	Select this option to have the UAG modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the FTP data payload to match the UAG's NAT environment.Clear this option if you have an FTP device or server that will modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the FTP data payload to match the UAG's NAT environment.
FTP Signaling Port	If you are using a custom TCP port number (not 21) for FTP traffic, enter it here.
Additional FTP Signaling Port for Transformations	If you are also using FTP on an additional TCP port number, enter it here.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

20.1 Overview

The UAG supports both UPnP and NAT-PMP to permit networking devices to discover each other and connect seamlessly.

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. A gateway that supports UPnP is called Internet Gateway Device (IGD). The standardized Device Control Protocol (DCP) is defined by the UPnP Forum for IGDs to configure port mapping automatically.

NAT Port Mapping Protocol (NAT-PMP), introduced by Apple and implemented in current Apple products, is used as an alternative NAT traversal solution to the UPnP IGD protocol. NAT-PMP runs over UDP port 5351. NAT-PMP is much simpler than UPnP IGD and mainly designed for small home networks. It allows a client behind a NAT router to retrieve the router's public IP address and port number and make them known to the peer device with which it wants to communicate. The client can automatically configure the NAT router to create a port mapping to allow the peer to contact it.

20.2 What You Need to Know

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.

20.2.1 NAT Traversal

UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings

Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.

See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.

20.2.2 Cautions with UPnP

The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.

When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the UAG allows multicast messages on the LAN only.

All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.

20.3 UPnP Screen

Use this screen to enable UPnP and NAT-PMP on your UAG.

Click Configuration > Network > UPnP to display the screen shown next.

Figure 116 Configuration > Network > UPnP

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 92 Configuration > Network > UPnP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable UPnP	Select this check box to activate UPnP on the UAG. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the UAG's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
Enable NAT-PMP	Select this check box to activate NAT-PMP on the UAG. Be aware that anyone could use a NAT-PMP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the UAG's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
Allow UPnP or NAT-PMP to pass through Firewall	Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled applications to bypass the firewall.Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP or NAT-PMP application packets (for example, MSN packets).
Outgoing WAN Interface	Select through which WAN interface(s) you want to send out traffic from UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled applications. If the WAN interface you select loses its connection, the UAG attempts to use the other WAN interface. If the other WAN interface also does not work, the UAG drops outgoing packets from UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled applications.
Support LAN List	The Available list displays the name(s) of the internal interface(s) on which the UAG supports UPnP and/or NAT-PMP.To enable UPnP and/or NAT-PMP on an interface, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to the Member list. To remove an interface, select the name(s) in the Member list and click the left arrow button.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

20.4 Technical Reference

The sections show examples of using UPnP.

20.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example

This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the UAG.

Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the UAG. Turn on your computer and the UAG.

20.4.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device

1 Click start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.
2 Right-click the icon and select Properties.

Figure 117 Network Connections

3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created.

Figure 118 Internet Connection Properties

4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.

Figure 119 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings

Figure 120 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add

Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically.

5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray.

Figure 121 System Tray Icon

6 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.

Figure 122 Internet Connection Status

20.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access

With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the UAG without finding out the IP address of the UAG first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the UAG.

Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.

1 Click Start and then Control Panel.
2 Double-click Network Connections.

3 Select My Network Places under Other Places.

Figure 123 Network Connections

4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network.
5 Right-click on the icon for your UAG and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays.

Figure 124 Network Connections: My Network Places

6 Right-click on the icon for your UAG and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the UAG.

Figure 125 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example

21.1 IP/MAC Binding Overview

IP address to MAC address binding helps ensure that only the intended devices get to use privileged IP addresses. The UAG uses DHCP to assign IP addresses and records to MAC address it assigned each IP address. The UAG then checks incoming connection attempts against this list. A user cannot manually assign another IP to his computer and use it to connect to the UAG.

Suppose you configure access privileges for IP address 172.16.1.27 and use static DHCP to assign it to Bob's computer's MAC address of 12:34:56:78:90:AB. IP/MAC binding drops traffic from any computer trying to use IP address 172.16.1.27 with another MAC address.

Figure 126 IP/MAC Binding Example

21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Summary and Edit screens (Section 21.2 on page 203) to bind IP addresses to MAC addresses.
• Use the Exempt List screen (Section 21.3 on page 205) to configure ranges of IP addresses to which the UAG does not apply IP/MAC binding.

21.1.2 What You Need to Know

DHCP

IP/MAC address bindings are based on the UAG's dynamic and static DHCP entries.

Interfaces Used With IP/MAC Binding

IP/MAC address bindings are grouped by interface. You can use IP/MAC binding with Ethernet, bridge, VLAN interfaces. You can also enable or disable IP/MAC binding and logging in an interface's configuration screen.

21.2 IP/MAC Binding Summary

Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding to open the IP/MAC Binding Summary screen. This screen lists the total number of IP to MAC address bindings for devices connected to each supported interface.

Figure 127 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Summary

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 93 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Summary

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Interface	This is the name of an interface that supports IP/MAC binding.
Number of Binding	This field displays the interface's total number of IP/MAC bindings and IP addresses that the interface has assigned by DHCP.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.

21.2.1 IP/MAC Binding Edit

Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit to open the IP/MAC Binding Edit screen. Use this screen to configure an interface's IP to MAC address binding settings.

Figure 128 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 94 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
IP/MAC Binding Settings
Interface Name	This field displays the name of the interface within the UAG and the interface's IP address and subnet mask.
Enable IP/MAC Binding	Select this option to have this interface enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses.
Enable Logs for IP/MAC Binding Violation	Select this option to have the UAG generate a log if a device connected to this interface attempts to use an IP address not assigned by the UAG.
Static DHCP Bindings	This table lists the bound IP and MAC addresses. The UAG checks this table when it assigns IP addresses. If the computer's MAC address is in the table, the UAG assigns the corresponding IP address. You can also access this table from the interface's edit screen.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
#	This is the index number of the static DHCP entry.
IP Address	This is the IP address that the UAG assigns to a device with the entry's MAC address.
MAC Address	This is the MAC address of the device to which the UAG assigns the entry's IP address.
Description	This helps identify the entry.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

21.2.2 Static DHCP Edit

Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit to open the IP/MAC Binding Edit screen. Click the Add or Edit icon to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure an interface's IP to MAC address binding settings.

Figure 129 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 95 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Interface Name	This field displays the name of the interface within the UAG and the interface's IP address and subnet mask.
IP Address	Enter the IP address that the UAG is to assign to a device with the entry's MAC address.
MAC Address	Enter the MAC address of the device to which the UAG assigns the entry's IP address.
Description	Enter up to 64 printable ASCII characters to help identify the entry. For example, you may want to list the computer's owner.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

21.3 IP/MAC Binding Exempt List

Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List to open the IP/MAC Binding Exempt List screen. Use this screen to configure ranges of IP addresses to which the UAG does not apply IP/MAC binding.

Figure 130 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 96 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Click an entry or select it and click Edit to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
#	This is the index number of the IP/MAC binding list entry.
Name	Enter a name to help identify this entry.
Start IP	Enter the first IP address in a range of IP addresses for which the UAG does not apply IP/MAC binding.
End IP	Enter the last IP address in a range of IP addresses for which the UAG does not apply IP/MAC binding.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.

Layer 2 Isolation

22.1 Overview

Layer-2 isolation is used to prevent connected devices from communicating with each other in the UAG's local network(s), except for the devices in the white list, when layer-2 isolation is enabled on the UAG and the local interface(s).

Note: Layer-2 isolation only checks the wireless traffic that goes through the UAG interfaces, including the virtual interfaces and the bridge interface between the 2.4 GHz WLAN and the 5 GHz WLAN. Therefore, traffic between wireless clients using the same AP and frequency band can't be blocked. But traffic between wireless clients in the 2.4 GHz WLAN and 5 GHz WLAN can be blocked even when they are connected to the same AP.

Note: The firewall must be enabled before you can use layer-2 isolation.

In the following example, layer-2 isolation is enabled on the UAG's interface Vlan1. A printer, PC and AP are in the Vlan1. The IP address of network printer (C) is added to the white list. With this setting, the connected AP then cannot communicate with the PC (D), but can access the network printer (C), server (B), wireless client (A) and the Internet.

Figure 131 Layer-2 Isolation Application

22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the General screen (Section 22.2 on page 208) to enable layer-2 isolation on the UAG and the internal interface(s).

• Use the White List screen (Section 22.3 on page 208) to enable and configures the white list.

22.2 Layer-2 Isolation General Screen

This screen allows you to enable Layer-2 isolation on the UAG and specific internal interface(s). To access this screen click Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation.

Figure 132 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 97 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Layer2 Isolation	Select this option to turn on the layer-2 isolation feature on the UAG. Note: You can enable this feature only when the firewall is enabled.
Member List	The Available list displays the name(s) of the internal interface(s) on which you can enable layer-2 isolation. To enable layer-2 isolation on an interface, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to the Member list. To remove an interface, select the name(s) in the Member list and click the left arrow button.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

22.3 White List

IP addresses that are not listed in the white list are blocked from communicating with other devices in the layer-2-isolation-enabled internal interface(s) except for broadcast packets.

To access this screen click Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List.

Figure 133 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 98 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable White List	Select this option to turn on the white list on the UAG. Note: You can enable this feature only when the firewall is enabled.
Add	Click this to add a new rule.
Edit	Click this to edit the selected rule.
Remove	Click this to remove the selected rule.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific rule.
Status	This icon is lit when the rule is active and dimmed when the rule is inactive.
IP Address	This field displays the IP address of device that can be accessed by the devices connected to an internal interface on which layer-2 isolation is enabled.
Description	This field displays the description for the IP address in this rule.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

22.3.1 Add/Edit White List Rule

This screen allows you to create a new rule in the white list or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select an entry from the list and click the Edit button.

Note: You can configure up to 20 white list rules on the UAG.

Note: You need to know the IP address of each connected device that you want to allow to be accessed by other devices when layer-2 isolation is enabled.

Figure 134 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List > Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 99 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select this option to turn on the rule.
Host IP Address	Enter an IPv4 address associated with this rule.
Description	Specify a description for the IP address associated with this rule. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores allowed.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

23.1 Overview

IP Plug and Play (IPnP) allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the UAG are not in the same subnet.

When you disable the IPnP feature, only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the UAG's LAN IP address can connect to the UAG or access the Internet through the UAG.

The IPnP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the UAG's IP address.

Note: You must enable NAT to use the IPnP feature.

The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment. In a residential house where a UAG is installed, you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the UAG are not in the same subnet.

Figure 135 IPnP Application

23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the IP screen (Section 23.2 on page 212) to enable IPnP on the UAG and the internal interface(s).

23.2 IPnP Screen

This screen allows you to enable IPnP on the UAG and specific internal interface(s). To access this screen click Configuration > Network > IPnP.

Figure 136 Configuration > Network > IPnP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 100 Configuration > Network > IPnP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable IPnP	Select this option to turn on the IPnP feature on the UAG. Note: You can enable this feature only when the firewall is enabled.
Member List	The Available list displays the name(s) of the internal interface(s) on which you can enable IPnP. To enable IPnP on an interface, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the[Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to theMember list. To remove an interface, select the name(s) in the Member list and click theleft arrow button.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Web Authentication

24.1 Overview

Web authentication can intercepts network traffic, according to the authentication policies, until the user authenticates his or her connection, usually through a specifically designated login web page. This means all web page requests can initially be redirected to a special web page that requires users to authenticate their sessions. Once authentication is successful, they can then connect to the rest of the network or Internet.

As soon as a user attempt to open a web page, the UAG reroutes his/her browser to a web portal page that prompts he/she to log in.

Figure 137 Web Authentication Example

The web authentication page only appears once per authentication session. Unless a user session times out or he/she closes the connection, he or she generally will not see it again during the same session.

24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Configuration > Web Authentication screens (Section 24.2 on page 214) to create and manage web authentication policies.
• Use the Configuration > Web Authentication > Walled Garden screens (Section 24.3 on page 227) to enable and create walled garden links that display in the login screen.
• Use the Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement screens (Section 24.4 on page 229) to enable and set advertisement links.

24.1.2 What You Need to Know

Forced User Authentication

Instead of making users for which user-aware policies have been configured go to the UAG Login screen manually, you can configure the UAG to display the Login screen automatically whenever it routes HTTP traffic for anyone who has not logged in yet.

Note: This works with HTTP traffic only. The UAG does not display the Login screen when users attempt to send other kinds of traffic.

The UAG does not automatically route the request that prompted the login, however, so users have to make this request again.

Finding Out More

See Section 24.2.2 on page 221 for an example of using an authentication policy for user-aware access control.

24.2 Web Authentication Screen

The Web Authentication screen displays the web portal settings and web authentication policies you have configured on the UAG. The screen differs depending on what you select in the Authentication field.

Click Configuration > Web Authentication to display the screen.

Figure 138 Configuration > Web Authentication (Web Portal)

Figure 139 Configuration > Web Authentication (User Agreement)

The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure.

Table 101 Configuration > Web Authentication

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Authentication	Select Web Portal or User Agreement to turn on the web authentication feature. Otherwise, select None to turn it off. Once enabled, all network traffic is blocked until a client authenticates with the UAG through the specifically designated web portal or user agreement page. If you select User agreement, by agreeing to the policy of user agreement, users can access the Internet without a guest account.
The following fields are available if you set Authentication to Web Portal.
Logout IP	Specify an IP address that users can use to terminate their sessions manually by entering the IP address in the address bar of the web browser.
Enable Terms of Service	Select this option to force users to agree to the terms before they can use the service. An agreement checkbox will display in the login page.
Internal Web Portal	Select this to use the default login page built into the UAG. If you later assign a custom login page, you can still return to the UAG's default page as it is saved indefinitely. The login page appears whenever the web portal intercepts network traffic, preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to the network. You can customize the login page built into the UAG in the System > WWW > Login Page screen.
Welcome URL	Specify the welcome page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/welcome.html. Users will be redirected to the welcome page after authentication. This field is optional. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed.
Preview	Click a button to display the "Terms of Service" page you uploaded to the UAG.
File Name	This shows the file name of the "Terms of Service" page in the UAG. Click Download to download the "Terms of Service" page from the UAG to your computer.
File Path / Browse / Upload	Browse for the "Terms of Service" page or enter the file path in the available input box, then click the Upload button to put it on the UAG.
Restore File to Default	Click Restore to set the UAG back to use the default "Terms of Service" page.
Download	Click this to download an example internal "Terms of Service" page from the UAG for your reference.
External Web Portal	Select this to use a custom login page from an external web portal instead of the default one built into the UAG. You can configure the look and feel of the web portal page.
Login URL	Specify the login page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/login.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed.
Logout URL	Specify the logout page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/login.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed.
Welcome URL	Specify the welcome page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/welcome.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed.
Session URL	Specify the session page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/session.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed.
Error URL	Specify the error page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address-error.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed.
Download	Click this to download an example web portal file for your reference.
The following fields are available if you set Authentication to User Agreement.
Enable Idle Detection	This is applicable for access users. Select this check box if you want the UAG to monitor how long each access user is logged in and idle (in other words, there is no traffic for this access user). The UAG automatically logs out the access user once the Idle timeout has been reached.
Idle timeout	This is applicable for access users. This field is effective when Enable Idle Detection is checked. Type the number of minutes each access user can be logged in and idle before the UAG automatically logs out the access user.
Reauthentication Time	Enter the number of minutes the user can be logged into the UAG in one session before having to log in again.
Internal User Agreement	Select this to use the user agreement pages built into the UAG. The user agreement page appears whenever the UAG intercepts network traffic, preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to the network.
Use Customized Web Pages	Select this to use the custom user agreement pages that are uploaded to the UAG.
Preview	Click a button to display the corresponding page you uploaded to the UAG.
File Name	This shows the file name of the zipped user agreement file in the UAG. Click Download to download the user agreement file from the UAG to your computer.
File Path / Browse / Upload	Browse for the user agreement file or enter the file path in the available input box, then click the Upload button to put it on the UAG.
Restore customization file to default	Click Restore to set the UAG back to use the default built-in user agreement pages.
Download	Click this to download an example internal user agreement file from the UAG for your reference.
External User Agreement	Select this to use custom user agreement pages from an external web server instead of the default one built into the UAG. You can configure the look and feel of the user agreement page.
Agreement URL	Specify the user agreement page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/logout.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the user agreement files are installed.
Welcome URL	Specify the welcome page's URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/welcome.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the user agreement files are installed. If you leave this field blank, the UAG will use the welcome page of internal user agreement file.
Download	Click this to download an example external user agreement file for your reference.
The following fields are available if you set Authentication to Web Portal or User Agreement.
Exceptional Services	Use this table to list services that users can access without logging in. Click Add to change the list's membership. A screen appears. Available services appear on the left. Select any services you want users to be able to access without logging in and click the right arrow button to add them. The member services are on the right. Select any service that you want to remove from the member list, and click the left arrow button to remove them. Keeping DNS as a member allows users' computers to resolve domain names into IP addresses. Figure 140 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add Exceptional Service
	Edit Exceptional Services List Available = Object = Member = Group = DNS AH = Object = AH = Group = DNS AIM = Any_TCP = AnyUDP = BGP = BOOTP_CLIENT = BOOTP_SERVER = BWM RESERVED_TCP_PORT_21 = OK = Cancel
	In the table, select one or more entries and click Remove to delete it or them.
Web Authentication Policy Summary	Use this table to manage the UAG's list of web authentication policies.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To move an entry to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Priority	This is the position of the authentication policy in the list. The priority is important as the policies are applied in order of priority. Default displays for the default authentication policy that the UAG uses on traffic that does not match any exceptional service or other authentication policy. You can edit the default rule but not delete it.
Source	This displays the source address object to which this policy applies.
Destination	This displays the destination address object to which this policy applies.
Schedule	This field displays the schedule object that dictates when the policy applies. none means the policy is active at all times if enabled.
Authentication	This field displays the authentication requirement for users when their traffic matches this policy.unnecessary - Users do not need to be authenticatedrequired - Users need to be authenticated. They must manually go to the login screen. The UAG will not redirect them to the login screen.force - Users need to be authenticated. The UAG automatically displays the login screenwhenever it routes HTTP traffic for users who have not logged in yet.
Description	If the entry has a description configured, it displays here. This is n/a for the default policy.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

24.2.1 Creating/Editing an Authentication Policy

Click Configuration > Web Authentication and then the Add (or Edit) icon in the Web Authentication Policy Summary section to open the Auth. Policy Add/Edit screen. Use this screen to configure an authentication policy.

Figure 141 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add

The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure.

Table 102 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Enable Policy	Select this check box to activate the authentication policy. This field is available for user-configured policies.
Description	Enter a descriptive name of up to 60 printable ASCII characters for the policy. Spaces are allowed. This field is available for user-configured policies.
UserAuthenticationPolicy	Use this section of the screen to determine which traffic requires (or does not require) the senders to be authenticated in order to be routed.
Source Address	Select a source address or address group for whom this policy applies. Select any if the policy is effective for every source. This is any and not configurable for the default policy.
DestinationAddress	Select a destination address or address group for whom this policy applies. Select any if the policy is effective for every destination. This is any and not configurable for the default policy.
Schedule	Select a schedule that defines when the policy applies. Otherwise, select none and the rule is always effective. This is none and not configurable for the default policy.
Authentication	Select the authentication requirement for users when their traffic matches this policy.unnecessary - Users do not need to be authenticatedrequired - Users need to be authenticated. If Force User Authentication is selected, all HTTP traffic from unauthenticated users is redirected to a default or user-defined login page. Otherwise, they must manually go to the login screen. The UAG will not redirect them to the login screen.
Log	This field is available for the default policy. Select whether to have the UAG generate a log (log), log and alert (log alert) or not (no) for packets that match the default policy. See Chapter 41 on page 395 for more on logs.
Force UserAuthentication	This field is available for user-configured policies that require authentication. Select this to have the UAG automatically display the login screen when users who have not logged in yet try to send HTTP traffic.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

24.2.2 User-aware Access Control Example

You can configure many policies and security settings for specific users or groups of users. Users can be authenticated locally by the UAG or by an external (RADIUS) authentication server.

In this example the users are authenticated by an external RADIUS server at 172.16.1.200. First, set up the user accounts and user groups in the UAG. Then, set up user authentication using the RADIUS server. Finally, set up the policies in the table above.

24.2.2.1 Set Up User Accounts

Set up user accounts in the RADIUS server. This example uses the Web Configurator. If you can export user names from the RADIUS server to a text file, then you might configure a script to create the user accounts instead.

1 Click Configuration > Object > User/Group > User. Click the Add icon.
2 Enter the same user name that is used in the RADIUS server, and set the User Type to ext-user because this user account is authenticated by an external server. Click OK.

Figure 142 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User > Add

3 Repeat this process to set up the remaining user accounts.

24.2.2.2 Set Up User Groups

Set up the user groups and assign the users to the user groups.

1 Click Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group. Click the Add icon.
2 Enter the name of the group. In this example, it is "Finance". Then, select Object/Leo and click the right arrow to move him to the Member list. This example only has one member in this group, so click OK. Of course you could add more members later.

Figure 143 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group > Add

3 Repeat this process to set up the remaining user groups.

24.2.2.3 Set Up User Authentication Using the RADIUS Server

This step sets up user authentication using the RADIUS server. First, configure the settings for the RADIUS server. Then, set up the authentication method, and configure the UAG to use the authentication method. Finally, force users to log into the UAG before it routes traffic for them.

1 Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS. Double-click the radius entry. Configure the RADIUS server's address, authentication port (1812 if you were not told otherwise), and key. Click Apply.

Figure 144 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add

2 Click Configuration > Object > Auth. Method. Double-click the default entry. Click the Add icon. Select group radius because the UAG should use the specified RADIUS server for authentication. Click OK.

Figure 145 Configuration > Object > Auth. method > Edit

3 Click Configuration > Web Authentication. In the Web Authentication screen, select Web Portal to enable web authentication and click Apply.

Figure 146 Configuration > Web Authentication

4 In the Web Authentication Policy Summary section, click the Add icon.
5 Set up a default policy that forces every user to log into the UAG before the UAG routes traffic for them. Select Enable Policy. Set the Authentication field to required, and make sure Force User Authentication is selected. Keep the rest of the default settings, and click OK.

Note: The users must log in at the Web Configurator login screen before they can use HTTP or MSN.

Figure 147 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add

When the users try to browse the web (or use any HTTP application), the login screen appears. They have to log in using the user name and password in the RADIUS server.

24.2.2.4 User Group Authentication Using the RADIUS Server

The previous example showed how to have a RADIUS server authenticate individual user accounts. If the RADIUS server has different user groups distinguished by the value of a specific attribute, you can make a couple of slight changes in the configuration to have the RADIUS server authenticate groups of user accounts defined in the RADIUS server.

1 Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS. Double-click the radius entry. Besides configuring the RADIUS server's address, authentication port, and key; set the Group Membership Attribute field to the attribute that the UAG is to check to determine to which group a user belongs. This example uses Class. This attribute's value is called a group identifier; it determines to which group a user belongs. In this example the values are Finance, Engineer, Sales, and Boss.

Figure 148 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add

2 Now you add ext-group-user user objects to identify groups based on the group identifier values. Set up one user account for each group of user accounts in the RADIUS server. Click Configuration > Object > User/Group > User. Click the Add icon.

Enter a user name and set the User Type to ext-group-user. In the Group Identifier field, enter Finance, Engineer, Sales, or Boss and set the Associated AAA Server Object to radius.

Figure 149 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User > Add

3 Repeat this process to set up the remaining groups of user accounts.

24.3 Walled Garden Screen

A user must log in before the UAG allows the user's access to the Internet. However, with a walled garden, you can define one or more web site addresses that all users can access without logging in. These can be used for advertisements for example.

Use this screen to configure walled garden web addresses for web sites that all users are allowed to access without logging in. The web site link(s) then displays in the user login screen.

Click Configuration > Web Authentication > Walled Garden to display the screen.

Figure 150 Configuration > Web Authentication > Walled Garden

The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure.

Table 103 Configuration > Web Authentication > Walled Garden

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Walled Garden	Select this to turn on the walled garden feature. Note: This feature works only when you set web authentication to Web Portal.
Walled Garden Summary	Use this table to manage the list of walled garden links.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To move an entry to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the descriptive name of web site.
URL	This field displays the address of web site.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

24.3.1 Adding/Editing a Walled Garden URL

Click Configuration > Web Authentication and then the Add (or Edit) icon in the Walled Garden Summary section to open the Add/Edit Walled Garden URL screen. Use this screen to configure a walled garden web site address entry.

Note: You can configure up to 20 walled garden URL links.

Figure 151 Configuration > Web Authentication > Walled Garden > Add/Edit

The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure.

Table 104 Configuration > Web Authentication > Walled Garden > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select this to activate the entry.
Name	Enter a descriptive name for the walled garden link to be displayed in the login screen. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9) and underscores (_). Spaces are also allowed. The first character must be a letter.
URL	Enter the URL or IP address of the web site. Use "http://" followed by up to 262 characters (0-9a-zA-Z;/?:@&=+\\-.-_!~*'(%)%. For example, http://www.example.com or http://172.16.1.35.
Preview	Click this button to open the specified web site in a new frame.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

24.3.2 Walled Garden Login Example

The following figure shows the user login screen with two walled garden links. The links are named WalledGardenLink1 through 2 for demonstration purposes.

Figure 152 Walled Garden Login Example

24.4 Advertisement Screen

Use this screen to set the UAG to display an advertisement web page as the first web page whenever the user connects to the Internet.

Click Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement to display the screen.

Figure 153 Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement

The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure.

Table 105 Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Advertisement	Select this to turn on the advertisement feature. Note: This feature works only when you enable web authentication.
Advertisement Summary	Use this table to manage the list of advertisement web pages.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To move an entry to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the descriptive name of web site.
URL	This field displays the address of web site.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

24.4.1 Adding/Editing an Advertisement URL

Click Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement and then the Add (or Edit) icon in the Advertisement Summary section to open the Add/Edit Advertisement URL screen. Use this screen to configure an advertisement address entry.

Note: You can create up to 20 advertisement URL entries. The UAG randomly picks one and open the specified web site in a new frame when an authenticated user is attempts to access the Internet.

Figure 154 Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement > Add/Edit

The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure.

Table 106 Configuration > Web Authentication > Advertisement > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select this to activate the entry.
Name	Enter a descriptive name for the advertisement web site. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. The first character must be a letter.
URL	Enter the URL or IP address of the web site. Use "http://" followed by up to 262 characters (0-9a-zA-Z;/?:@&=+\\-.-_!~*'(%)%. For example, http://www.example.com or http://172.16.1.35.
Preview	Click this button to open the specified web site in a new frame.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

25.1 Overview

Use the firewall to block or allow services that use static port numbers. The firewall can also limit the number of user sessions.

This example shows the UAG's default firewall behavior for WAN to LAN traffic and how stateful inspection works. A LAN user can initiate a Telnet session from within the LAN zone and the firewall allows the response. However, the firewall blocks Telnet traffic initiated from the WAN zone and destined for the LAN zone.

Figure 155 Default Firewall Action

25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Firewall screens (Section 25.2 on page 234) to enable or disable the firewall and asymmetrical routes, and manage and configure firewall rules.
• Use the Session Control screens (see Section 25.3 on page 239) to limit the number of concurrent NAT/firewall sessions a client can use.

25.1.2 What You Need to Know

Stateful Inspection

The UAG has a stateful inspection firewall. The UAG restricts access by screening data packets against defined access rules. It also inspects sessions. For example, traffic from one zone is not allowed unless it is initiated by a computer in another zone first.

Zones

A zone is a group of interfaces. Group the UAG's interfaces into different zones based on your needs. You can configure firewall rules for data passing between zones or even between interfaces.

Default Firewall Behavior

Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Here is the default firewall behavior for traffic going through the UAG in various directions.

Note: Intra-zone traffic (such as LAN to LAN traffic or WAN to WAN traffic) can also be blocked by the zone configuration. See Section 13.2.1 on page 166 for details.

Table 107 Default Firewall Behavior

FROM ZONE TO ZONE	BEHAVIOR
From any to Device	DHCP traffic from any interface to the UAG is allowed.
From LAN1 to any (other than the UAG)	Traffic from the LAN1 to any of the networks connected to the UAG is allowed.
From LAN2 to any (other than the UAG)	Traffic from the LAN2 to any of the networks connected to the UAG is allowed.
From LAN1 to Device	Traffic from the LAN1 to the UAG itself is allowed.
From LAN2 to Device	Traffic from the LAN2 to the UAG itself is allowed.
From WAN to Device	The default services listed in To-Device Rules on page 233 are allowed from the WAN to the UAG itself. All other WAN to UAG traffic is dropped.
From any to any	Traffic that does not match any firewall rule is dropped. This includes traffic from the WAN to any of the networks behind the UAG.This also includes traffic to or from interfaces that are not assigned to a zone (extra-zone traffic).

To-Device Rules

Rules with Device as the To Zone apply to traffic going to the UAG itself. By default:

• The firewall allows only LAN, or WAN computers to access or manage the UAG.
• The UAG allows DHCP traffic from any interface to the UAG.
• The UAG drops most packets from the WAN zone to the UAG itself and generates a log except for AH, ESP, GRE, HTTPS, IKE, NATT.

When you configure a firewall rule for packets destined for the UAG itself, make sure it does not conflict with your service control rule. See Chapter 40 on page 354 for more information about service control (remote management). The UAG checks the firewall rules before the service control rules for traffic destined for the UAG.

A From Any To Device direction rule applies to traffic from an interface which is not in a zone.

Global Firewall Rules

Firewall rules with from any and/or to any as the packet direction are called global firewall rules. The global firewall rules are the only firewall rules that apply to an interface that is not included in a zone. The from any rules apply to traffic coming from the interface and the to any rules apply to traffic going to the interface.

Firewall Rule Criteria

The UAG checks the schedule, user name (user's login name on the UAG), source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the UAG takes the action specified in the rule.

User Specific Firewall Rules

You can specify users or user groups in firewall rules. For example, to allow a specific user from any computer to access a zone by logging in to the UAG, you can set up a rule based on the user name only. If you also apply a schedule to the firewall rule, the user can only access the network at the scheduled time. A user-aware firewall rule is activated whenever the user logs in to the UAG and will be disabled after the user logs out of the UAG.

Session Limits

Accessing the UAG or network resources through the UAG requires a NAT session and corresponding firewallsession. Peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, may use a large number of NAT sessions. A single client could use all of the available NAT sessions and prevent others from connecting to or through the UAG. The UAG lets you limit the number of concurrent NAT/firewall sessions a client can use.

Finding Out More

• See Section 25.4 on page 241 for an example of creating firewall rules as part of configuring user-aware access control.

25.2 The Firewall Screen

Asymmetrical Routes

If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the UAG's LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the UAG. This is called an asymmetrical or "triangle" route. This causes the UAG to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.

You can have the UAG permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection). However, allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the UAG. A better solution is to use virtual interfaces to put the UAG and the backup gateway on separate subnets. Virtual interfaces allow you to partition your network into logical sections over the same interface. See the chapter about interfaces for more information.

By putting LAN 1 and the alternate gateway (A in the figure) in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the UAG to the LAN. The following steps and figure describe such a scenario.

1 A computer on the LAN1 initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN.
2 The UAG reroutes the packet to gateway A , which is in Subnet 2.

3 The reply from the WAN goes to the UAG.
4 The UAG then sends it to the computer on the LAN1 in Subnet 1.

Figure 156 Using Virtual Interfaces to Avoid Asymmetrical Routes

25.2.1 Configuring the Firewall Screen

Click Configuration > Firewall to open the Firewall screen. Use this screen to enable or disable the firewall and asymmetrical routes, set a maximum number of sessions per host, and display the configured firewall rules. Specify from which zone packets come and to which zone packets travel to display only the rules specific to the selected direction. Note the following.

• Besides configuring the firewall, you also need to configure NAT rules to allow computers on the WAN to access LAN devices. See Chapter 15 on page 173 for more information.
• The UAG applies NAT (Destination NAT) settings before applying the firewall rules. So for example, if you configure a NAT entry that sends WAN traffic to a LAN IP address, when you configure a corresponding firewall rule to allow the traffic, you need to set the LAN IP address as the destination.
• The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in sequence.

Figure 157 Configuration > Firewall

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 108 Configuration > Firewall

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
General Settings
Enable Firewall	Select this check box to activate the firewall. The UAG performs access control when the firewall is activated.
IPv4 RuleSummary
AllowAsymmetricalRoute	If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the UAG's LANIP address, return traffic may not go through the UAG. This is called an asymmetrical or" triangle" route. This causes the UAG to reset the connection, as the connection has notbeen acknowledged.Select this check box to have the UAG permit the use of asymmetrical route topology onthe network (not reset the connection).Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LANwithout passing through the UAG. A better solution is to use virtual interfaces to put theUAG and the backup gateway on separate subnets.
From Zone / ToZone	This is the direction of travel of packets. Select from which zone the packets come and towhich zone they go.Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.For example, from LAN to LAN means packets traveling from a computer or subnet on theLAN to either another computer or subnet on the LAN.From any displays all the firewall rules for traffic going to the selected To Zone.To any displays all the firewall rules for traffic coming from the selected From Zone.From any to any displays all of the firewall rules.To Device rules are for traffic that is destined for the UAG and control which computers canmanage the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To change a rule's position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Priority	This is the position of your firewall rule in the global rule list (including all through-UAG and to-UAG rules). The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence.Default displays for the default firewall behavior that the UAG performs on traffic that does not match any other firewall rule.
From To	This is the direction of travel of packets to which the firewall rule applies.
Schedule	This field tells you the schedule object that the rule uses. none means the rule is active at all times if enabled.
User	This is the user name or user group name to which this firewall rule applies.
IPv4 Source	This displays the IPv4 source address object to which this firewall rule applies.
Destination	This displays the IPv4 destination address object to which this firewall rule applies.
Service	This displays the service object to which this firewall rule applies.
Access	This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (deny), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet to the sender (reject) or permits the passage of packets (allow).
Log	This field shows you whether a log (and alert) is created when packets match this rule or not.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

25.2.2 The Firewall Add/Edit Screen

In the Firewall screen, click the Edit or Add icon to display the Firewall Rule Edit screen.

Figure 158 Configuration > Firewall > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 109 Configuration > Firewall > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Enable	Select this check box to activate the firewall rule.
From To	For through-UAG rules, select the direction of travel of packets to which the rule applies. any means all interfaces. Device means packets destined for the UAG itself.
Description	Enter a descriptive name of up to 60 printable ASCII characters for the firewall rule. Spaces are allowed.
Schedule	Select a schedule that defines when the rule applies. Otherwise, select none and the rule is always effective.
User	This field is not available when you are configuring a to-UAG rule. Select a user name or user group to which to apply the rule. The firewall rule is activated only when the specified user logs into the system and the rule will be disabled when the user logs out. Otherwise, select any and there is no need for user logging. Note: If you specified a source IP address (group) instead of any in the field below, the user's IP address should be within the IP address range.
Source	Select an IPv4 address or address group to apply an IPv4 rule to traffic coming from it. Select any to apply an IPv4 rule to all traffic coming from IPv4 addresses.
Destination	Select an IPv4 address or address group to apply an IPv4 rule to traffic going to it. Select any to apply an IPv4 rule to all traffic going to IPv4 addresses.
Service	Select a service or service group from the drop-down list box.
Access	Use the drop-down list box to select what the firewall is to do with packets that match this rule. Select deny to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender. Select reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet to the sender. Any UDP packets are dropped without sending a response packet. Select allow to permit the passage of the packets.
Log	Select whether to have the UAG generate a log (log), log and alert (log alert) or not (no) when the rule is matched. See Chapter 41 on page 395 for more on logs.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

25.3 The Session Control Screen

Click Configuration > Firewall > Session Control to display the Firewall Session Control screen. Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT/firewall sessions a client can use. You can apply a default limit for all users and individual limits for specific users, addresses, or both. The individual limit takes priority if you apply both.

Figure 159 Configuration > Firewall > Session Limit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 110 Configuration > Firewall > Session Limit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
General Settings
UDP Session Time Out	Set how many seconds (from 1 to 300) the UAG will allow a UDP session to remain idle (without UDP traffic) before closing it.
Session Limit Settings
Enable Session limit	Select this check box to control the number of concurrent sessions hosts can have.
IPv4 Rule Summary	This table lists the rules for limiting the number of concurrent sessions hosts can have.
Default Session per Host	This field is configurable only when you enable session limit.Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT/firewall sessions each client computer can have.If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer to peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions.Create rules below to apply other limits for specific users or addresses.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To change a rule's position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
#	This is the index number of a session limit rule. It is not associated with a specific rule.
User	This is the user name or user group name to which this session limit rule applies.
IPv4 Address	This is the IPv4 address object to which this session limit rule applies.
Description	This is the information configured to help you identify the rule.
Limit	This is how many concurrent sessions this user or address is allowed to have.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

25.3.1 The Session Limit Add/Edit Screen

Click Configuration > Firewall > Session Limit and the Add or Edit icon to display the Firewall Session Limit Edit screen. Use this screen to configure rules that define a session limit for specific users or addresses.

Figure 160 Configuration > Firewall > Session Limit > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 111 Configuration > Firewall > Session Limit > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Enable Rule	Select this check box to turn on this session limit rule.
Description	Enter information to help you identify this rule. Use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
User	Select a user name or user group to which to apply the rule. The rule is activated only when the specified user logs into the system and the rule will be disabled when the user logs out. Otherwise, select any and there is no need for user logging. Note: If you specified an IP address (or address group) instead of any in the field below, the user's IP address should be within the IP address range.
Address	Select the IPv4 source address or address group to which this rule applies. Select any to apply the rule to all IPv4 source addresses.
Session Limit per Host	Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT/firewall sessions this rule's users or addresses can have. For this rule's users and addresses, this setting overrides the Default Session per Host setting in the general Firewall Session Control screen.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

25.4 Firewall Rule Configuration Example

The following Internet firewall rule example allows Doom players from the WAN to IP addresses 172.16.1.10 through 172.16.1.15 (Dest_1) on the LAN.

1 Click Configuration > Firewall. In the summary of firewall rules click Add to configure a new first entry. The sequence (priority) of the rules is important since they are applied in order.

Figure 161 Firewall Example: Firewall Screen

2 At the top of the screen, click Create new Object > Address to configure an address object. Configure it as follows and click OK.

Figure 162 Firewall Example: Create an Address Object

3 Click Create new Object > Service to configure a service object for Doom (UDP port 666). Configure it as follows and click OK.

Figure 163 Firewall Example: Create a Service Object

4 Select From WAN and To LAN and enter a name for the firewall rule.

Select Dest_1 for the Destination and Doom as the Service. Enter a description and configure the rest of the screen as follows. Click OK when you are done.

Figure 164 Firewall Example: Edit a Firewall Rule

5 The firewall rule appears in thefirewall rule summary.

Figure 165 Firewall Example: Doom Rule in Summary

25.5 Firewall Rule Example Applications

Suppose you decide to block LAN users from using IRC (Internet Relay Chat) through the Internet. To do this, you would configure a LAN to WAN firewall rule that blocks IRC traffic from any source IP address from going to any destination address. You do not need to specify a schedule since you need the firewall rule to always be in effect. The following figure shows the results of this rule.

Figure 166 Blocking All LAN to WAN IRC Traffic Example

Your firewallwould have the following rules.

Table 112 Blocking All LAN to WAN IRC Traffic Example

#	USER	SOURCE	DESTINATION	SCHEDULE	SERVICE	ACTION
1	Any	Any	Any	Any	IRC	Deny
2	Any	Any	Any	Any	Any	Allow

• The first row blocks LAN access to the IRC service on the WAN.
• The second row is the firewall's default policy that allows all LAN1 to WAN traffic.

The UAG applies the firewall rules in order. So for this example, when the UAG receives traffic from the LAN, it checks it against the first rule. If the traffic matches (if it is IRC traffic) the firewall takes the action in the rule (drop) and stops checking the firewall rules. Any traffic that does not match the first firewall rule will match the second rule and the UAG forwards it.

Now suppose you need to let the CEO use IRC. You configure a LAN1 to WAN firewall rule that allows IRC traffic from the IP address of the CEO's computer. You can also configure a LAN to WAN rule that allows IRC traffic from any computer through which the CEO logs into the UAG with his/her user name. In order to make sure that the CEO's computer always uses the same IP address, make sure it either:

• Has a static IP address,

or

• You configure a static DHCP entry for it so the UAG always assigns it the same IP address (see DHCP Settings on page 143 for information on DHCP).

Now you configure a LAN1 to WAN firewall rule that allows IRC traffic from the IP address of the CEO's computer (172.16.1.7 for example) to go to any destination address. You do not need to specify a schedule since you want the firewall rule to always be in effect. The following figure shows the results of your two custom rules.

Figure 167 Limited LAN to WAN IRC Traffic Example

Your firewallwould have the following configuration.

Table 113 Limited LAN1 to WAN IRC Traffic Example 1

#	USER	SOURCE	DESTINATION	SCHEDULE	SERVICE	ACTION
1	Any	172.16.1.7	Any	Any	IRC	Allow
2	Any	Any	Any	Any	IRC	Deny
3	Any	Any	Any	Any	Any	Allow

• The first row allows the LAN1 computer at IP address 172.16.1.7 to access the IRC service on the WAN.
• The second row blocks LAN1 access to the IRC service on the WAN.
• The third row is the firewall's default policy of allowing all traffic from the LAN1 to go to the WAN.

Alternatively, you configure a LAN1 to WAN rule with the CEO's user name (say CEO) to allow IRC traffic from any source IP address to go to any destination address.

Your firewallwould have the following configuration.

Table 114 Limited LAN1 to WAN IRC Traffic Example 2

#	USER	SOURCE	DESTINATION	SCHEDULE	SERVICE	ACTION
1	CEO	Any	Any	Any	IRC	Allow
2	Any	Any	Any	Any	IRC	Deny
3	Any	Any	Any	Any	Any	Allow

• The first row allows any LAN1 computer to access the IRC service on the WAN by logging into the UAG with the CEO's user name.
• The second row blocks LAN1 access to the IRC service on the WAN.
• The third row is the firewall's default policy of allowing all traffic from the LAN1 to go to the WAN.

The rule for the CEO must come before the rule that blocks all LAN1 to WAN IRC traffic. If the rule that blocks all LAN1 to WAN IRC traffic came first, the CEO's IRC traffic would match that rule and the UAG would drop it and not check any other firewall rules.

26.1 Overview

You can use the built-in billing function to setup billing profiles. A billing profile describes how to charge users. This chapter also shows you how to select an accounting method, configure a discount price plan or use an online payment service by credit card.

26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the General screen (see Section 26.2 on page 247) to configure the general billing settings, such as the accounting method, currency unit and the SSID profiles to which the settings are applied.
• Use the Billing Profile screen (see Section 26.3 on page 248) to configure the billing profiles for the web-based account generator and each button on the connected statement printer.
• Use the Discount screen (see Section 26.4 on page 255) to enable and configure discount price plans.
• Use the Payment Service screen (see Section 26.5 on page 257) to enable online payment service and configure the service pages.

26.1.2 What You Need to Know

Accumulation Accounting Method

The accumulation accounting method allows multiple re-logs until the allocated time period or until the user account is expired. The UAG accounts the time that the user is logged in for Internet access.

Time-to-finish Accounting Method

The time-to-finish accounting method is good for one-time logins. Once a user logs in, the UAG stores the IP address of the user's computer for the duration of the time allocated. Thus the user does not have to enter the user name and password again for re-login within the allocated time. Once activated, the user account is valid until the allocated time is reached even if the user disconnects Internet access for a certain period within the allocated time. For example, Joe purchases a one-hour time-to-finish account. He starts using the Internet for the first 20 minutes and then disconnects his Internet access to go to a 20-minute meeting. After the meeting, he only has 20 minutes left on his account.

26.2 The General Screen

Use this screen to configure the general billing settings, such as the accounting method, currency unit and the SSID profiles to which the settings are applied. Click Configuration > Billing > General to open the following screen.

Figure 168 Configuration > Billing > General

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 115 Configuration > Billing > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
General Settings
Unused account will be deleted after the time:	Enter the number and select a time unit from the drop-down list box to specify how long to wait before the UAG deletes an account that has not been used.
Accounting Method	Select Time to Finish to allow each user a one-time login. Once the user logs in, the system starts counting down the pre-defined usage even if the user stops the Internet access before the time period is finished. If a user disconnects and reconnects before the allocated time expires, the user does not have to enter the user name and password to access the Internet again. Select Accumulation to allow each user multiple re-login until the time allocated is used up. The UAG accounts the time that the user is logged in for Internet access.
User idle timeout	The UAG automatically disconnects a computer from the network after a period of inactivity. The user may need to enter the username and password again before access to the network is allowed. If you select Accumulation, specify the idle timeout between 1 and 60 minutes.
Accumulation account will be deleted after the time:	Enter the number and select a time unit from the drop-down list box to specify how long to wait before the UAG deletes an idle account. This is for use with accumulation accounting.
Billing User Logon Settings
Maximum number per billing account	Enter the maximum number of the users that are allowed to log in with the same account.
Reach maximum number per billing account	Select Block to stop new users from logging in when the Maximum number per billing account is reached. Select Kick previous user and login to disassociate the first user that logged in and allow new user to log in when the Maximum number per billing account is reached.
Currency	Select the appropriate currency symbol or currency unit. If you set Currency code to User-Define, enter a three-letter alphabetic code manually.
Number of decimals places	This shows the number of decimal places to be used for billing.
Decimal symbol	Select whether you would like to use a dot (.) or a comma (,) for the decimal point.
Tax	Select this option to charge sales tax for the account. Enter the tax rate (a 6% sales tax is entered as 6).
SSID Profile Settings	The Selectable SSID Profiles list displays the name(s) of the SSID profile(s) to which you can apply the general billing settings. To apply settings to an SSID profile, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to the Selected SSID Profiles list. To remove an SSID profile, select the name(s) in the Selected SSID Profiles list and click the left arrow button.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

26.3 The Billing Profile Screen

Use this screen to configure the billing profiles that defines the maximum Internet access time and charge per time unit. Click Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile to open the following screen.

Figure 169 Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 116 Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Account Generator Settings
Button A ~ C	Select a billing profile for each button of the web-based account generator. The buttons correspond to the buttons on a connected statement printer.
Preview	Click this button to open the Account Generator screen, where you can generate a dynamic guest account and print the account information using a statement printer connected to the UAG (see Section 26.3.1 on page 250 for more information).
Billing Profile
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the descriptive profile name for this entry.
Unit	This field displays the duration of the billing period.
Price	This field displays each profile's price per time unit.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

26.3.1 The Account Generator Screen

The Account Generator screen allows you to automatically create dynamic guest accounts (see Section 7.11 on page 82 and Dynamic-Guest Accounts on page 286 for more information on dynamic guest accounts).

Click Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile and then the Preview button to open this screen. You can also open this screen by logging into the Web Configurator with the guest-manager account.

Figure 170 Account Generator

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 117 Account Generator

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Account Generator Settings	Select a button and specify how many units of billing period to be charged for new account.
Discount plan for Button x	This section displays only when you enable the discount price plan in the Billing > Discount screen.
#	This is the number of each discount level. The default (first) level cannot be edited or deleted. It is created automatically according to the billing profile of the button you select.
Name	This field displays the conditions of each discount level.
Unit	This field displays the duration of the billing period that should be reached before the UAG charges users at this level.
Price	This field displays the price per time unit for each level.
Default Thermal Printer	This displays the information of the printer that is attached to the UAG. It displays n/a if there is no printer attached.
Summary
Tax	This shows the tax rate.
Total	This shows the total price for the account.
Quantity	This shows the number of account to be created.
Generate	Click Generate to generate an account based on the billing settings you configure for the selected button in the Billing Profile screen. A window displays showing the SMS message and/or a printout preview of the account generated.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Logout	ClickLogout to log out of the web configurator. This button is available only when you open this screen by logging in with the guest-manager account.

The following figure shows an example SMS message with account information. The SMS screen displays only when you enable SMS in the Configuration > SMS screen. You can enter the user's

mobile phone number and click Send SMS to send the account information in an SMS text message to the user's mobile phone. Close this window when you are finished viewing it.

The following figure shows a printout preview example. Close this window when you are finished viewing it.

26.3.2 The Account Redeem Screen

The Account Redeem screen allows you to send SMS messages for certain accounts. Click the Account Redeem tab in the Account Generator screen to open this screen.

Figure 171 Account Redeem

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 118 Account Redeem

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Query Account Information
Phone Number	Enter the country code and mobile phone number and click Query to display only the account(S) that has the specified phone number.
SMS	Click this button to send text messages for the accounts in the list below. You can use this button only when SMS is enabled and there is at least one account in the list.
#	This is the index number of the dynamic guest account in the list.
Status	This field displays whether an account expires or not.
Username	This field displays the user name of the account.
Create Time	This field displays when the account was created.
Remaining Time	This field displays the amount of Internet access time remaining for each account.
Time Period	This field displays the total account of time the account can use to access the Internet through the UAG.
Expiration Time	This field displays the date and time the account becomes invalid. Note: Once the time allocated to a dynamic account is used up or a dynamic account remains un-used after the expiration time, the account is deleted from the account list.
Charge	This field displays the total cost of the account.
Payment Info	This field displays the method of payment for each account.
Phone Num	This field displays the mobile phone number for the account.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Logout	ClickLogout to log out of the web configurator. This button is available only when you open this screen by logging in with the guest-manager account.

26.3.3 The Billing Profile Add/Edit Screen

The Billing Profile Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new billing profile or edit an existing one. Click Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile and then an Add or Edit icon to open this screen.

Figure 172 Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile > Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 119 Configuration > Billing > Billing Profile > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable billing profile	Select this option to activate the profile.
Name	Enter a name for the billing profile.You can use up to 31 alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. The first character must be a letter.
Unit	Set the duration of the billing period. When this period expires, the user's access will be stopped.
Time Period Unit	Select a time period (minute, hour, or day).
Price	Define each profile's price, up to 999999.99, per time unit.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

26.4 The Discount Screen

Use this screen to configure a custom discount pricing plan. This is useful for providing reduced rates for purchases of longer periods of time. You can charge higher rates per unit at lower levels

(fewer units purchased) and lower rates per unit at higher levels (more units purchased). Click Configuration > Billing > Discount to open the following screen.

Note: The discount price plan does not apply to users who purchase access time online with a credit card.

Figure 173 Configuration > Billing > Discount

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 120 Configuration > Billing > Discount

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Discount Settings
Enable Discount	Select the check box to activate the discount price plan.
Button Select	Select a button from the drop-down list box to assign the base charge.
Charge by levels	Select this to charge the rate at each successive level from the first level (most expensive per unit) to the highest level (least expensive per unit) that the total purchase reaches.Otherwise, deselect this to charge all of the user's time units only at the highest level (least expensive) that their total purchase reaches.
Discount Price Plan
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
#	This is the number of each discount level.The default (first) level cannot be edited or deleted. It is created automatically according to the billing profile of the button you select.
Name	This field displays the conditions of each discount level.
Unit	This field displays the duration of the billing period that should be reached before the UAG charges users at this level.
Price	This field displays the price per time unit for each level.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

26.4.1 The Discount Add/Edit Screen

The Discount Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new discount level or edit an existing one. Click Configuration > Billing > Discount and then an Add or Edit icon to open this screen.

Figure 174 Configuration > Billing > Discount > Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 121 Configuration > Billing > Discount > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	This field displays the conditions of each discount level.
Unit	Set the duration of the billing period that should be reached before the UAG charges users at this level.
Price	Define this level’s charge per time unit.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

26.5 The Payment Service General Screen

Use this screen to use a credit card service to authorize, process, and manage credit card transactions directly through the Internet. You must register with the supported credit card service before you can configure the UAG to handle credit card transactions. Click Configuration > Billing > Payment Service to open the following screen.

Figure 175 Configuration > Billing > Payment Service > General

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 122 Configuration > Billing > payment Service > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
General Setting
Enable Payment Service	Select the check box to use PayPal to authorize credit card payments. Note: After you set up web authentication policies and enable the online payment service on the UAG, a link displays in the login screen when users try to access the Internet. The link redirects users to a screen where they can make online payments by credit card to purchase access time and get dynamic guest account information.
Payment Provider Selection
Account	You should already have a PayPal account to receive credit card payments. Enter your PayPal account name.
Currency	Select the currency in which payments are made. The available options depend on currencies that PayPal supports.
Identity Token	Enter the ID token provided to you by PayPal after successfully applying for your PayPal account.
Payment Gateway	Enter the address of the PayPal gateway provided to you by PayPal after applying for your PayPal account.
Account Delivery Method
Delivery Method	Specify how the UAG provides dynamic guest account information after the user's online payment is done.
	Select On-Screen to display the user account information in the web screen.
	Select SMS to use Short Message Service (SMS) to send account information in a text message to the user's mobile device.
	Select On-Screen and SMS to provide the account information both in the web screen and via SMS text messages.
	Note: You should have enabled SMS in the Configuration > SMS screen to send text messages to the user's mobile device.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

26.5.1 The Payment Service Custom Service Screen

Use this screen to customize the online payment service pages that displays after an unauthorized user click the link in the Web Configurator login screen to purchase access time. Click Configuration > Billing > Payment Service > Custom Service to open the following screen.

Figure 176 Configuration > Billing > Payment Service > Custom Service

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 123 Configuration > Billing > payment Service > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Select Type
Use Default Page	Select this to use the default online payment service page built into the device. If you later create a custom online payment service page, you can still return to the UAG's default page as it is saved indefinitely.
Use Customized Page	Select this to use a custom online payment service page instead of the default one built into the UAG. Once this option is selected, the custom page controls below become active.
Customized Profile Selection Page
Selection Message	Enter a note to display in the first welcome page that allows users to choose a billing period they want. Use up to 1024 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Customized Successfully Page
Successfully Message	Enter a note to display in the second page after the user's online payment is made successfully. Use up to 1024 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Notification Message	Enter the important information you want to display. Use up to 1024 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Notification Color	Specify the font color of the important information. You can use the color palette chooser, or enter a color value of your own.
Account Message	Enter a note to display above the user account information. Use up to 1024 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Day Time	Select the format in which you want to display the date and how long an account is allowed to stay un-used before it expires.
Customized Fail Page
Failed Message	Enter a note to display when the user's online payment failed. Use up to 1024 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Customized SMS Page
Information Message	Enter a note to display when you set the UAG to send account information via SMS text messages. Use up to 1024 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Printer Manager

27.1 Overview

You can create dynamic guest accounts and print guest account information by pressing the button on an external statement printer, such as SP350E.

Make sure that the printer is connected to the appropriate power and the UAG, and that there is printing paper in the printer. Refer to the printer's documentation for details.

27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the General screen (see Section 27.2 on page 262) to configure the printer list and enable printer management.
• Use the Printout Configuration screen (see Section 27.3 on page 264) to customize the account printout.

27.2 The General Screen

Use this screen to configure a printer list and allow the UAG to monitor the printer status. Click Configuration > Printer Manager > General to open the following screen.

Figure 177 Configuration > Printer Manager > General

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 124 Configuration > Printer Manager > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
General Settings
Enable Printer Manager	Select the check box to allow the UAG to manage and monitor the printer status.
Printer Settings
Port	Enter the number of port on which the UAG sends data to the printer for it to print.
Encryption	Select the check box to turn on data encryption. Data transmitted between the UAG and the printer will be encrypted with a secret key
Secret Key	Enter four alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9) to specify a key for data encryption.
Printout
Number of Copies	Select how many copies of subscriber statements you want to print (1 is the default).
Printer List	Use this section to add the printer(s) that can be managed by the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
IPv4 Address	This field displays the IP address of the printer.
Description	This field displays the descriptive name for the printer.
Printer Firmware Information
Current Version	This is the version of the printer firmware currently uploaded to the UAG. The UAG automatically installs it in the connected printers to make sure the printers are upgraded to the same version.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

27.3 The Printout Configuration Screen

Use this screen to customize the account printout. Click Configuration > Printer Manager > Printout Configuration to open the following screen.

Figure 178 Configuration > Printer Manager > Printout Configuration

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 125 Configuration > Printer Manager > Printout Configuration

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Use Default Printout Configuration	Select this to use the default account printout format built into the device. If you later create a custom account printout format, you can still return to the UAG's default format as it is saved indefinitely.
Use Customized Printout Configuration	Select this to use a custom account printout format instead of the default one built into the UAG. Once this option is selected, the custom format controls below become active.
Preview	Click the button to display a preview of account printout format you uploaded to the UAG.
File Name	This shows the file name of account printout format file in the UAG. Click Download to download the account printout format file from the UAG to your computer.
File Path / Browse / Upload	Browse for the account printout format file or enter the file path in the available input box, then click the Upload button to put it on the UAG.
Restore Customized File to Default	Click Restore to set the UAG back to use the default built-in account printout format.
Download	Click this to download an example account printout format file from the UAG for your reference.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

27.3.1 Reports Overview

The SP350E allows you to print status reports about the guest accounts and general UAG system information. Simply press a key combination on the SP350E to print a report instantly without accessing the web configurator.

The following lists the reports that you can print using the SP300E.

• Daily account summary
  Monthly account summary
• Last month account summary
• System status

27.3.2 Key Combinations

The following table lists the key combination to print each report.

Note: You must press the key combination on the SP350E within five seconds to print.

Table 126 Report Printing Key Combinations

REPORT TYPE	KEY COMBINATION
Daily Account Summary	A B C A A
Monthly Account Summary	A B C B A

Table 126 Report Printing Key Combinations

REPORT TYPE	KEY COMBINATION
Last Month Account Summary	A B C B B
System Status	A B C C A

The following sections describe each report printout in detail.

27.3.3 Daily Account Summary

The daily account report lists the accounts printed during the current day, the current day's total number of accounts and the total charge. It covers the accounts that have been printed during the current day starting from midnight (not the past 24 hours). For example, if you press the daily account key combination on 2013/05/10 at 20:00:00, the daily account report includes the accounts created on 2013/05/10 between 00:00:01 and 19:59:59.

Key combination: A B C A A

The following figure shows an example.

Figure 179 Daily Account Example

27.3.4 Monthly Account Summary

The monthly account report lists the accounts printed during the current month, the current month's total number of accounts and the total charge. It covers the accounts that have been printed during the current month starting from midnight of the first day of the current month (not the past one month period). For example, if you press the monthly account key combination on 2013/05/17 at 20:00:00, the monthly account report includes the accounts created from 2013/05/01 at 00:00:01 to 2013/05/17 at 19:59:59.

Key combination: A B C B A

The following figure shows an example.

Figure 180 Monthly Account Example

27.3.5 Account Report Notes

The daily, monthly or last month account report holds up to 2000 entries. If there are more than 2000 accounts created in the same month or same day, the account report's calculations only include the latest 2000.

For example, if 2030 accounts (each priced at 1) have been created from 2013/05/01 00:00:00 to 2013/05/31 19:59:59, the monthly account report includes the latest 2000 accounts, so the total would be2,000 instead of $2,030.

Use the Monitor > System Status > Dynamic Guest screen to see the accounts generated on another day or month (up to 2000 entries total).

27.3.6 System Status

This report shows the current system information such as the host name and WAN IP address.

Key combination: A B C C A

The following figure shows an example.

Figure 181 System Status Example

The following table describes the labels in this report.

Table 127 System Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
SYST	This field displays the time since the system was last restarted.
WAST	This field displays the WAN connection status.
WLST	This field displays the status of the UAG's wireless LAN.
FWVR	This field displays the version of the firmware on the UAG.
BTVR	This field displays the version of the bootrom.
WAMA	This field displays the MAC address of the UAG on the WAN.
LAMA	This field displays the MAC address of the UAG on the LAN.
WAIP	This field displays the IP address of the WAN port on the UAG.
LAIP	This field displays the IP address of the LAN port on the UAG.
WLIP	This field displays the IP address of the wireless LAN interface on the UAG.
DHSP	This field displays the first of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool.
DHEP	This field displays the end of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool.
CPUS	This field displays the UAG's recent CPU usage.
MEMS	This field displays the UAG's recent memory usage.
DKST	This field displays what percentage of the UAG's onboard flash memory is currently being used.

28.1 Overview

With Free Time, the UAG can create dynamic guest accounts that allow users to browse the Internet free of charge for a specified period of time.

28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the Free Time screen (see Section 28.2 on page 269) to turn on this feature to allow users to get a free account for Internet surfing during the specified time period.

28.2 The Free Time Screen

Use this screen to enable and configure the free time settings. Click Configuration > Free Time to open the following screen.

Figure 182 Configuration > Free Time

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 128 Configuration > Free Time

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Free Time	Select the check box to turn on the free time feature.Note: After you set up web authentication policies and enable the free time feature on the UAG, a link displays in the login screen when users try to access the Internet. The link redirects users to a screen where they can get a free account.
Free Time Period	Select the duration of time period for which the free time account is allowed to access the Internet.
Reset Time	Select the time in 24-hour format at which the new free time account is allowed to access the Internet.
Maximum Registration Number Before Reset Time	Enter the maximum number of the users that are allowed to log in for Internet access with a free guest account before the time specified in the Reset Time field.For example, if you set the Maximum Registration Number Before Reset Time to 1 and the Reset Time to 13:00, even the first free guest account has expired at 11:30, the second account still cannot access the Internet until 13:00.
Delivery Method	Specify how the UAG provides dynamic guest account information-select On-Screen to display the user account information in the web screen.Select SMS to use Short Message Service (SMS) to send account information in a text message to the user's mobile device.Select On-Screen and SMS to provide the account information both in the web screen and via SMS text messages.Note: You should have enabled SMS in the Configuration > SMS screen to send text messages to the user's mobile device.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

The following figure shows an example login screen with a link to create a free guest account.

If you enable both online payment service and free time feature on the UAG, the link description in the login screen will be mainly for online payment service. You can still click the link to get a free account.

If SMS is enabled on the UAG, you have to enter your mobile phone number before clicking OK to get a free guest account.

The guest account information then displays in the screen and/or is sent to the configured mobile phone number.

Welcome

You may now use the internet.

IMPORTANT! MAKE a note for your case-sensitive username and password for logging later. This will be your only opportunity to do so.

This is your account information, please keep this for your internet service.

Your username is Uz39

Your password is 4vhhdm

Your time period is 30 minutes

29.1 Overview

The UAG supports Short Message Service (SMS) to send short text messages to mobile phone devices. At the time of writing, the UAG uses ViaNett as the SMS gateway to help forward SMS messages. You must already have a Vianett account in order to use the SMS service.

29.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the SMS screen (see Section 29.2 on page 273) to turn on the SMS service on the UAG.

29.2 The SMS Screen

Use this screen to enable SMS in order to send dynamic guest account information in text messages. Click Configuration > SMS to open the following screen.

Figure 183 Configuration > SMS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 129 Configuration > SMS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
General Settings
Enable SMS	Select the check box to turn on the SMS feature on the UAG.
Default country code for phone number	Enter the default country code for the mobile phone number to which you want to send SMS messages.
ViaNett Configuration
User Name	Enter the user name for your ViaNett account.
Password	Type the Password associated with the user name.
Retype to Confirm	Type your password again for confirmation.
License
Licensed Service Status	This field displays whether the service is activated (Licensed) or not (Not Licensed).Note: You must subscribe to the SMS service before you can use the service to send a text message.
License Type	This field displays Standard when the service is activated. Otherwise, it displays None.
Register Now	Click the link to go to myZyXEL.com where you can register your UAG and activate the service.This link is available only when the service is not activated yet.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes to the UAG.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Bandwidth Management

30.1 Overview

Bandwidth management provides a convenient way to manage the use of various services on the network. It manages general protocols (for example, HTTP and FTP) and applies traffic prioritization to enhance the performance of delay-sensitive applications like voice and video.

30.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the BWM screens (see Section 30.2 on page 279) to control bandwidth for services passing through the UAG, and it identifies the conditions that refine this.

30.1.2 What You Need to Know

When you allow a service, you can restrict the bandwidth it uses. It controls TCP and UDP traffic. Use policy routes to manage other types of traffic (like ICMP).

Note: Bandwidth management in policy routes has priority over policy routes to manage the bandwidth of TCP and UDP traffic.

If you want to use a service, make sure both the firewall allow the service's packets to go through the UAG.

Note: The UAG checks firewall rules before it checks bandwidth management rules for traffic going through the UAG.

Bandwidth management examines every TCP and UDP connection passing through the UAG. Then, you can specify, by port, whether or not the UAG continues to route the connection.

BWM Type

The UAG supports two types of bandwidth management: Shared and Per-user.

The Shared BWM type is selected by default in a bandwidth management rule. All users to which the rule is applied need to share the bandwidth configured in the rule.

If the BWM type is set to Per-uer in a rule, every user that matches the rule can use up to the configured bandwidth by his/her own.

In the following example, you configure a Per-user bandwidth management rule for billing-users to limit outgoing traffic to 300 kbs. Then all billing-users (A, B and C) can send 300 kbps of traffic.

DiffServ and DSCP Marking

QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types.

DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.

Connection and Packet Directions

Bandwidth management looks at the connection direction, that is from which interface the connection was initiated and to which interface the connection is going.

A connection has outbound and inbound packet flows. The UAG controls the bandwidth of traffic of each flow as it is going out through an interface.

• The outbound traffic flows from the connection initiator to the connection responder.
• The inbound traffic flows from the connection responder to the connection initiator.

For example, a LAN1 to WAN connection is initiated from LAN1 and goes to the WAN.

• Outbound traffic goes from a LAN1 device to a WAN device. Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out a WAN interface on the UAG.
• Inbound traffic comes back from the WAN device to the LAN1 device. Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out a LAN1 interface.

Figure 184 LAN1 to WAN Connection and Packet Directions

Outbound and Inbound Bandwidth Limits

You can limit an application's outbound or inbound bandwidth. This limit keeps the traffic from using up too much of the out-going interface's bandwidth. This way you can make sure there is bandwidth for other applications. When you apply a bandwidth limit to outbound or inbound traffic, each member of the out-going zone can send up to the limit. Take a LAN1 to WAN policy for example.

• Outbound traffic is limited to 200 kbps. The connection initiator is on the LAN1 so outbound means the traffic traveling from the LAN1 to the WAN. Each of the WAN zone's two interfaces can send the limit of 200 kbps of traffic.
• Inbound traffic is limited to 500 kbs. The connection initiator is on the LAN1 so inbound means the traffic traveling from the WAN to the LAN1.

Figure 185 LAN1 to WAN, Outbound 200 kbps, Inbound 500 kbps

Bandwidth Management Priority

• The UAG gives bandwidth to higher-priority traffic first, until it reaches its configured bandwidth rate.
• Then lower-priority traffic gets bandwidth.
• The UAG uses a fairness-based (round-robin) scheduler to divide bandwidth among traffic flows with the same priority.
• The UAG automatically treats traffic with bandwidth management disabled as priority 7 (the lowest priority).

Maximize Bandwidth Usage

Maximize bandwidth usage allows applications with maximize bandwidth usage enabled to "borrow" any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface.

After each application gets its configured bandwidth rate, the UAG uses the fairness- based scheduler to divide any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface amongst applications that need more bandwidth and have maximize bandwidth usage enabled.

Unused bandwidth is divided equally. Higher priority traffic does not get a larger portion of the unused bandwidth.

Bandwidth Management Behavior

The following sections show how bandwidth management behaves with various settings. For example, you configure LAN1 to WAN policies for FTP servers A and B. Each server tries to send 1000 kbps, but the WAN is set to a maximum outgoing speed of 1000 kbps. You configure policy A for server A's traffic and policy B for server B's traffic.

Figure 186 Bandwidth Management Behavior

Configured Rate Effect

In the following table the configured rates total less than the available bandwidth and maximize bandwidth usage is disabled, both servers get their configured rate.

Table 130 Configured Rate Effect

POLICY	CONFIGURED RATE	MAX. B. U.	PRIORITY	ACTUAL RATE
A	300 kbps	No	1	300 kbps
B	200 kbps	No	1	200 kbps

Priority Effect

Here the configured rates total more than the available bandwidth. Because server A has higher priority, it gets up to its configured rate (800 kbps), leaving only 200 kbps for server B.

Table 131 Priority Effect

POLICY	CONFIGURED RATE	MAX. B. U.	PRIORITY	ACTUAL RATE
A	800 kbps	Yes	1	800 kbps
B	1000 kbps	Yes	2	200 kbps

Maximize Bandwidth Usage Effect

With maximize bandwidth usage enabled, after each server gets its configured rate, the rest of the available bandwidth is divided equally between the two. So server A gets its configured rate of 300 kbps and server B gets its configured rate of 200 kbps. Then the UAG divides the remaining bandwidth (1000 - 500 = 500) equally between the two (500 / 2 = 250 kbps for each). The priority has no effect on how much of the unused bandwidth each server gets.

So server A gets its configured rate of 300 kbps plus 250 kbps for a total of 550 kbps. Server B gets its configured rate of 200 kbps plus 250 kbps for a total of 450 kbps.

Table 132 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Effect

POLICY	CONFIGURED RATE	MAX. B. U.	PRIORITY	ACTUAL RATE
A	300 kbps	Yes	1	550 kbps
B	200 kbps	Yes	2	450 kbps

Priority and Over Allotment of Bandwidth Effect

Server A has a configured rate that equals the total amount of available bandwidth and a higher priority. You should regard extreme over allotment of traffic with different priorities (as shown here) as a configuration error. Even though the UAG still attempts to let all traffic get through and not be lost, regardless of its priority, server B gets almost no bandwidth with this configuration.

Table 133 Priority and Over Allotment of Bandwidth Effect

POLICY	CONFIGURED RATE	MAX. B. U.	PRIORITY	ACTUAL RATE
A	1000 kbps	Yes	1	999 kbps
B	1000 kbps	Yes	2	1 kbps

Finding Out More

• See DSCP Marking and Per-Hop Behavior on page 156 for a description of DSCP marking.

30.2 The Bandwidth Management Screen

The Bandwidth management screens control the bandwidth allocation for TCP and UDP traffic. You can use source interface, destination interface, destination port, schedule, user, source, destination information, DSCP code and service type as criteria to create a sequence of specific conditions, similar to the sequence of rules used by firewalls, to specify how the UAG handles the DSCP value and allocate bandwidth for the matching packets.

Click Configuration > BWM to open the following screen. This screen allows you to enable/disable bandwidth management and add, edit, and remove user-defined bandwidth management policies.

The default bandwidth management policy is the one with the priority of "default". It is the last policy the UAG checks if traffic does not match any other bandwidth management policies you have configured. You cannot remove, activate, deactivate or move the default bandwidth management policy.

Figure 187 Configuration >BWM

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 30.2.1 on page 281 for more information as well.

Table 134 Configuration > BWM

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable BWM	Select this check box to activate management bandwidth.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it.
Remove	Select an entry and click this to delete it.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select it and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that entry and press [ENTER] to move the entry to the number that you typed.
Status	The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. The status icon is not available for the default bandwidth management policy.
Priority	This is the position of your bandwidth management policy in the list. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence. This field displays default for the default bandwidth management policy that the UAG performs on traffic that does not match any other bandwidth management policy.
Description	This is the descriptive name of the policy.
BWM Type	This is the bandwidth management type of the policy.
User	This is the user name or user group to which the policy applies. If any displays, the policy applies to all users.
Schedule	This is the schedule that defines when the policy applies. none means the policy always applies.
Incoming Interface	This is the source interface of the traffic to which this policy applies.
Outgoing Interface	This is the destination interface of the traffic to which this policy applies.
Source	This is the source address or address group for whom this policy applies. If any displays, the policy is effective for every source.
Destination	This is the destination address or address group for whom this policy applies. If any displays, the policy is effective for every destination.
DSCP Code	This is the DSCP value of the incoming or outgoing packets to which this policy applies. any means all DSCP values or no DSCP marker. default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort traffic.
Service	This is the service object to which this policy applies. If any displays, the policy is effective for every service.
BWM In/Pri/Out/Pri	This field shows the amount of bandwidth the traffic can use. In - This is how much inbound bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the matching traffic to use. Inbound refers to the traffic the UAG sends to a connection's initiator. If no displays here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the inbound traffic. Out - This is how much outgoing bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the matching traffic to use. Outbound refers to the traffic the UAG sends out from a connection's initiator. If no displays here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the outbound traffic. Pri - This is the priority for the incoming (the first Pri value) or outgoing (the second Pri value) traffic that matches this policy. The smaller the number, the higher the priority. Traffic with a higher priority is given bandwidth before traffic with a lower priority. The UAG ignores this number if the incoming and outgoing limits are both set to 0. In this case the traffic is automatically treated as being set to the lowest priority (7) regardless of this field's configuration.
DSCP Marking	This is how the UAG handles the DSCP value of the incoming and outgoing packets that match this policy. preserve means the UAG does not modify the DSCP value of the route's packets. default means the UAG sets the DSCP value of the route's packets to 0. If this field displays a DSCP value, the UAG applies that DSCP value to the route's packets. The "af" choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the "af" identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Section 12.4 on page 163 for more details.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

30.2.1 The Bandwidth Management Add/Edit Screen

The Configuration > BWM Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new condition or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Configuration > BWM screen (see Section 30.2 on page 279), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon.

Figure 188 Configuration > BWM > Edit (For the Default Policy)
Figure 189 Configuration > BWM > Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 135 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Enable	Select this check box to turn on this policy.
Description	Enter a description of this policy. You can use alphanumeric and ( )+/:=?!*#@$-%-characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long.
BWM Type	Select Shared to have users that match this policy to share the bandwidth configured in this policy. Select Per user to allow every user that matches this policy to use up to the bandwidth configured in this policy.
User	Select a user name or user group to which to apply the policy. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new user account. Select any to apply the policy for every user.
Schedule	Select a schedule that defines when the policy applies or select Create new Object to configure a new one (see Chapter 35 on page 324 for details). Otherwise, select none to make the policy always effective.
Incoming Interface	Select the source interface of the traffic to which this policy applies.
Outgoing Interface	Select the destination interface of the traffic to which this policy applies.
Source	Select a source address or address group for whom this policy applies. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select any if the policy is effective for every source.
Destination	Select a destination address or address group for whom this policy applies. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select any if the policy is effective for every destination.
DSCP Code	Select a DSCP code point value of incoming or outgoing packets to which this policy applies or select User Define to specify another DSCP code point. The lower the number the higher the priority with the exception of 0 which is usually given only best-effort treatment. any means all DSCP value or no DSCP marker. default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort traffic. The “af” choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the “af” identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Section 12.4 on page 163 for more details.
User-Defined DSCP Code	Use this field to specify a custom DSCP code point.
Service Object	Select a service or service group to identify the type of traffic to which this policy applies.
DSCP Marking	Set how the UAG handles the DSCP value of the incoming and outgoing packets that match this policy.
Inbound Marking	Inbound refers to the traffic the UAG sends to a connection’s initiator. Outbound refers to the traffic the UAG sends out from a connection’s initiator.
Outbound Marking	Select one of the pre-defined DSCP values to apply or select User Defined to specify another DSCP value. The “af” choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the “af” identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Section 12.4 on page 163 for more details. Select preserve to have the UAG keep the packets’ original DSCP value. Select default to have the UAG set the DSCP value of the packets to 0.

Table 135 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Bandwidth Shaping	Configure these fields to set the amount of bandwidth the matching traffic can use.
Inbound kbps	Type how much inbound bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the traffic to use. Inbound refers to the traffic the UAG sends to a connection's initiator.If you enter 0 here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the matching traffic that the UAG sends to the initiator. Traffic with bandwidth management disabled (inbound and outbound are both set to 0) is automatically treated as the lowest priority (7).If the sum of the bandwidths for routes using the same next hop is higher than the actual transmission speed, lower priority traffic may not be sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth.
Outbound kbps	Type how much outbound bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the traffic to use. Outbound refers to the traffic the UAG sends out from a connection's initiator.If you enter 0 here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the matching traffic that the UAG sends out from the initiator. Traffic with bandwidth management disabled (inbound and outbound are both set to 0) is automatically treated as the lowest priority (7).If the sum of the bandwidths for routes using the same next hop is higher than the actual transmission speed, lower priority traffic may not be sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth.
Priority	Enter a number between 1 and 7 to set the priority for traffic that matches this policy. The smaller the number, the higher the priority.Traffic with a higher priority is given bandwidth before traffic with a lower priority.The UAG uses a fairness-based (round-robin) scheduler to divide bandwidth between traffic flows with the same priority.The number in this field is ignored if the incoming and outgoing limits are both set to 0. In this case the traffic is automatically treated as being set to the lowest priority (7) regardless of this field's configuration.
Maximize Bandwidth Usage	This field displays when the inbound or outbound bandwidth management is not set to 0. Enable maximize bandwidth usage to let the traffic matching this policy "borrow" any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface.After each application or type of traffic gets its configured bandwidth rate, the UAG uses the fairness- based scheduler to divide any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface amongst applications and traffic types that need more bandwidth and have maximize bandwidth usage enabled.
Related Setting
Log	Select whether to have the UAG generate a log (log), log and alert (log alert) or not (no) for packets that match the policy.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

31.1 Overview

This chapter describes how to set up user accounts, user groups, and user settings for the UAG. You can also set up rules that control when users have to log in to the UAG before the UAG routes traffic for them.

31.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• The User screen (see Section 31.2 on page 287) provides a summary of all user accounts.
• The Group screen (see Section 31.3 on page 291) provides a summary of all user groups. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove user groups. User groups may consist of access users and other user groups. You cannot put admin users in user groups
• The Setting screen (see Section 31.4 on page 292) controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the UAG. You can also use this screen to specify when users must log in to the UAG before it routes traffic for them.

31.1.2 What You Need To Know

User Account

A user account defines the privileges of a user logged into the UAG. User accounts are used in firewall rules, in addition to controlling access to configuration and services in the UAG.

User Types

These are the types of user accounts the UAG uses.

Table 136 Types of User Accounts

TYPE	ABILITIES	LOGIN METHOD(S)
Admin Users
admin	Change UAG configuration (web, CLI)	WWW, TELNET, SSH, FTP, Console
limited-admin	Look at UAG configuration (web, CLI)	WWW, TELNET, SSH, Console
	Perform basic diagnostics (CLI)
Access Users
ext-user	External user account	WWW
ext-group-user	External group user account	WWW
guest-manager	Create dynamic guest accounts	WWW
pre-subscriber	Access network services	Web Authentication Portal
dynamic-guest	Access network services	Web Authentication Portal

Note: The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the authentication method setting. (See Chapter 37 on page 332 for more information about authentication methods.)

Ext-User Accounts

Set up an ext-user account if the user is authenticated by an external server and you want to set up specific policies for this user in the UAG. If you do not want to set up policies for this user, you do not have to set up an ext-user account.

All ext-user users should be authenticated by an external server, such as RADIUS. If the UAG tries to use the local database to authenticate an ext-user, the authentication attempt always fails. (This is related to AAA servers and authentication methods, which are discussed in Chapter 36 on page 328 and Chapter 37 on page 332, respectively.)

Note: If the UAG tries to authenticate an ext-user using the local database, the attempt always fails.

Once an ext-user user has been authenticated, the UAG tries to get the user type (see Table 136 on page 285) from the external server. If the external server does not have the information, the UAG sets the user type for this session to User.

For the rest of the user attributes, such as reauthentication time, the UAG checks the following places, in order.

1 User account in the remote server.
2 User account (Ext-User) in the UAG.
3 Default user account for RADIUS users (radius-users) in the UAG.

See Setting up User Attributes in an External Server on page 297 for a list of attributes and how to set up the attributes in an external server.

Ext-Group-User Accounts

Ext-Group-User accounts are similar to ext-user accounts but allow you to group users by the value of the group membership attribute configured for the RADIUS server. See Section 36.2.1 on page 329 for more on the group membership attribute.

Dynamic-Guest Accounts

Dynamic guest accounts are guest accounts, but are created dynamically and stored in the UAG's local user database. A dynamic guest account has a dynamically-created user name and password. A dynamic guest account user can access the UAG's services only within a given period of time and will become invalid after the expiration date/time.

There are three types of dynamic guest accounts depending on how they are created or authenticated: billing-users, ua-users and trial-users.

billing-users are guest account created with the guest manager account or an external printer and paid by cash or created and paid via the on-line payment service. ua-users are users that log in

from the user agreement page. trial-users are free guest accounts that are created with the Free Time function.

Pre-Subscriber Accounts

Use the pre-subscriber account to test the Internet connection between the UAG and the ISP. The UAG does not impose time limitations or charges on this account. Thus, anyone who logs in with this account is able to gain Internet access for free.

User Groups

User groups may consist of user accounts or other user groups. Use user groups when you want to create the same rule for several user accounts, instead of creating separate rules for each one.

Note: You cannot put access users and admin users in the same user group.

Note: You cannot put the default admin account into any user group.

The sequence of members in a user group is not important.

User Awareness

By default, users do not have to log into the UAG to use the network services it provides. The UAG automatically routes packets for everyone. If you want to restrict network services that certain users can use via the UAG, you can require them to log in to the UAG first. The UAG is then aware' of the user who is logged in and you can createuser-aware policies' that define what services they can use. See Section 31.4.2 on page 296 for a user-aware login example.

Finding Out More

• See Section 31.5 on page 297 for some information on users who use an external authentication server in order to log in.

31.2 User Summary Screen

The User screen provides a summary of all user accounts. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User/Group.

Figure 190 Configuration > Object > User/Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 137 Configuration > Object > User/Group

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
User Name	This field displays the user name of each user.
User Type	This field displays the kind of account of each user. These are the kinds of user account the UAG supports. • admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the UAG • limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the UAG but not to change it • dynamic-guest - this user has access to the UAG's services but cannot look at the configuration. • ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. • ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. • guest-manager - this user can log in via the web configurator login screen and create dynamic guest accounts using the Account Generator screen that pops up. See Section 26.3.1 on page 250 for detailed information about the Account Generator screen. • pre-subscriber - this user has access to the UAG's services but cannot look at the configuration.
Description	This field displays the description for each user.

31.2.1 User Add/Edit Screen

The User Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user account or edit an existing one.

31.2.1.1 Rules for User Names

Enter a user name from 1 to 31 characters.

The user name can only contain the following characters:

• Alphanumeric A-z 0-9 (there is no unicode support)
• [underscores]
• • [dashes]

The first character must be alphabetical (A-Z a-z), an underscore (_), or a dash (-). Other limitations on user names are:

• User names are case-sensitive. If you enter a user 'bob' but use 'BOB' when connecting via CIFS or FTP, it will use the account settings used for 'BOB' not 'bob'.
• User names have to be different than user group names.
  Here are the reserved user names:

adm
- debug
- Idap-users
- operator
sync

admin
devicehaecived
- lp
- radius-users
uucp

• any
  ftp
  mail
• root
  zyxel

bin
games
news
- shutdown

• daemon
  halt
• nobody
• sshd

To access this screen, go to the User screen (see Section 31.2 on page 287), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon.

Figure 191 Configuration >User/Group >User >Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 138 Configuration > User/Group > User > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
User Name	Type the user name for this user account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. User names have to be different than user group names, and some words are reserved. See Section 31.2.1.1 on page 289.
User Type	This field displays the types of user accounts the UAG uses: • admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the UAG • limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the UAG but not to change it • ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. See Ext-User Accounts on page 286 for more information about this type. • ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 286 for more information about this type. • guest-manager - this user can log in via the web configurator login screen and create dynamic guest accounts using the Account Generator screen that pops up. See Section 26.3.1 on page 250 for detailed information about the Account Generator screen. • pre-subscriber - this user has access to the UAG's services but cannot look at the configuration.
Password	This field is not available if you select the ext-user or ext-group-user type. Enter the password of this user account. It can consist of 4 - 31 alphanumeric characters.
Retype	This field is not available if you select the ext-user or ext-group-user type.
Group Identifier	This field is available for a ext-group-user type user account. Specify the value of the RADIUS server's Group Membership Attribute that identifies the group to which this user belongs.
Associated AAA Server Object	This field is available for a ext-group-user type user account. Select the AAA server to use to authenticate this account's users.
Description	Enter the description of each user, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Default descriptions are provided.
Authentication Timeout Settings	If you want the system to use default settings, select Use Default Settings. If you want to set authentication timeout to a value other than the default settings, select Use Manual Settings then fill your preferred values in the fields that follow.
Lease Time	If you select Use Default Settings in the User Settings field, the default lease time is shown. If you select Use Manual Settings, you need to enter the number of minutes this user has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically (see Section 31.4 on page 292), the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires.
Reauthentication Time	If you select Use Default Settings in the User Settings field, the default lease time is shown. If you select Use Manual Settings, you need to type the number of minutes this user can be logged into the UAG in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

31.3 User Group Summary Screen

User groups consist of access users and other user groups. You cannot put admin users in user groups. The Group screen provides a summary of all user groups. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove user groups. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group.

Figure 192 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 31.3.1 on page 291 for more information as well.

Table 139 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Removing a group does not remove the user accounts in the group.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user group.
Group Name	This field displays the name of each user group.
Description	This field displays the description for each user group.
Member	This field lists the members in the user group. Each member is separated by a comma.

31.3.1 Group Add/Edit Screen

The Group Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Group screen (see Section 31.3 on page 291), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon.

Figure 193 Configuration > User/Group > Group > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 140 Configuration >User/Group >Group >Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Type the name for this user group. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores( ), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. User group names have to be different than user names.
Description	Enter the description of the user group, if any. You can use up to 60 characters, punctuation marks, and spaces.
Member List	The Member list displays the names of the users and user groups that have been added to the user group. The order of members is not important. Select users and groups from the Available list that you want to be members of this group and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. Move any members you do not want included to the Available list.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

31.4 The User/Group Setting Screen

The Setting screen controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the UAG. You can also use this screen to specify when users must log in to the UAG before it routes traffic for them.

To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting.

Figure 194 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 141 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
User Default Setting
Default Authentication Timeout Settings	These authentication timeout settings are used by default when you create a new user account. They also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user account's authentication timeout settings.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
User Type	These are the kinds of user account the UAG supports. • admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the UAG • limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the UAG but not to change it • ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. See Ext-User Accounts on page 286 for more information about this type. • ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 286 for more information about this type. • guest-manager - this user can log in via the web configurator login screen and create dynamic guest accounts using the Account Generator screen that pops up. • pre-subscriber - this user has access to the UAG's services but cannot look at the configuration.
Lease Time	This is the default lease time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the number of minutes the user has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically (see Section 31.4 on page 292), the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires.
Reauthentication Time	This is the default reauthentication time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the number of minutes the user can be logged into the UAG in one session before having to log in again. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
Miscellaneous Settings
Allow renewing lease time automatically	Select this check box if access users can renew lease time automatically, as well as manually, simply by selecting the Updating lease time automatically check box on their screen.
Enable user idle detection	This is applicable for access users. Select this check box if you want the UAG to monitor how long each access user is logged in and idle (in other words, there is no traffic for this access user). The UAG automatically logs out the access user once the User idle timeout has been reached.
User idle timeout	This is applicable for access users. This field is effective when Enable user idle detection is checked. Type the number of minutes each access user can be logged in and idle before the UAG automatically logs out the access user.
User Logon Settings
Limit number of simultaneous logons for administration account	Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins by admin users. If you do not select this, admin users can log in as many times as they want at the same time using the same or different IP addresses.
Maximum number per administration account	This field is effective when Limit number of simultaneous logons for administration account is checked. Type the maximum number of simultaneous logins by each admin user.
Limit number of simultaneous logons for access account	Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins by non-admin users. If you do not select this, access users can log in as many times as they want as long as they use different IP addresses.
Maximum number per access account	This field is effective when Limit number of simultaneous logons for access account is checked. Type the maximum number of simultaneous logins by each access user.
Reach maximum number per account	Select Block to stop new users from logging in when the Maximum number per access account is reached. Select Kick previous user and login to disassociate the first user that logged in and allow new user to log in when the Maximum number per access account is reached.
User Lockout Settings
Enable logon retry limit	Select this check box to set a limit on the number of times each user can login unsuccessfully (for example, wrong password) before the IP address is locked out for a specified amount of time.
Maximum retry count	This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the maximum number of times each user can login unsuccessfully before the IP address is locked out for the specified Lockout period. The number must be between 1 and 99.
Lockout period	This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the number of minutes the user must wait to try to login again, if logon retry limit is enabled and the Maximum retry count is reached. This number must be between 1 and 65,535 (about 45.5 days).
Apply	Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

31.4.1 Default User Settings Edit Screens

The Edit User Default Settings screen allows you to set the default authentication timeout settings for the selected type of user account. These default authentication timeout settings also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user account's authentication timeout settings.

To access this screen, go to the Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting screen (see Section 31.4 on page 292), and select one of the Default Settings section's entry and click the Edit icons.

Figure 195 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 142 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
User Type	This read-only field identifies the type of user account for which you are configuring the default settings. • admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the UAG • limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the UAG but not to change it. • ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. See Ext-User Accounts on page 286 for more information about this type. • ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 286 for more information about this type. • guest-manager - this user can log in via the web configurator login screen and create dynamic guest accounts using the Account Generator screen that pops up. • pre-subscriber - this user has access to the UAG's services but cannot look at the configuration.
Lease Time	Enter the number of minutes this type of user account has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically (see Section 31.4 on page 292), the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires.
Reauthentication Time	Select this option and type the number of minutes this type of user account can be logged into the UAG in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

31.4.2 User Aware Login Example

Access users cannot use the Web Configurator to browse the configuration of the UAG. Instead, after access users log into the UAG, the following screen appears.

Figure 196 Web Configurator for Non-Admin Users

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 143 Web Configurator for Non-Admin Users

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
User-defined lease time (max ... minutes)	Access users can specify a lease time shorter than or equal to the one that you specified. The default value is the lease time that you specified.
Renew	Access users can click this button to reset the lease time, the amount of time remaining before the UAG automatically logs them out. The UAG sets this amount of time according to the ·User-defined lease time field in this screen ·Lease time field in the User Add/Edit screen (see Section 31.2.1 on page 288) ·Lease time field in the Setting > Edit screen (see Section 31.4 on page 292)
Updating lease time automatically	This box appears if you checked the Allow renewing lease time automatically box in the Setting screen. (See Section 31.4 on page 292.) Access users can select this check box to reset the lease time automatically 30 seconds before it expires. Otherwise, access users have to click the Renew button to reset the lease time.
Remaining time before lease timeout	This field displays the amount of lease time that remains, though the user might be able to reset it.
Remaining time before auth. timeout	This field displays the amount of time that remains before the UAG automatically logs the access user out, regardless of the lease time.

31.5 User /Group Technical Reference

This section provides some information on users who use an external authentication server in order to log in.

Setting up User Attributes in an External Server

To set up user attributes, such as reauthentication time, in RADIUS servers, use the following keywords in the user configuration file.

Table 144 RADIUS: Keywords for User Attributes

KEYWORD	CORRESPONDING ATTRIBUTE IN WEB CONFIGURATOR
type	UserID. Possible Values: admin, limited-admin, pre-subscriber, dynamic-guest.
leaseTime	Lease Time. Possible Values: 1-1440 (minutes).
reauthTime	Reauthentication Time. Possible Values: 1-1440 (minutes).

The following example shows you how you might set up user attributes in RADIUS servers.

Figure 197 RADIUS Example: Keywords for User Attributes

type=user;leaseTime=222;reauthTime=222

Creating a Large Number of Ext-User Accounts

If you plan to create a large number of Ext-User accounts, you might use CLI commands, instead of the Web Configurator, to create the accounts. Extract the user names from the RADIUS server, and create a shell script that creates the user accounts. See Chapter 42 on page 410 for more information about shell scripts.

32.1 Overview

This chapter shows you how to configure preset profiles for the Access Points (APs) connected to your UAG's wireless network.

32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• The Radio screen (Section 32.2 on page 300) creates radio configurations that can be used by the APs.
• The SSID screen (Section 32.3 on page 305) configures three different types of profiles for your networked APs.

32.1.2 What You Need To Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.

Wireless Profiles

At the heart of all wireless AP configurations on the UAG are profiles. A profile represents a group of saved settings that you can use across any number of connected APs. You can set up the following wireless profile types:

• Radio - This profile type defines the properties of an AP's radio transmitter. You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the UAG.
• SSD - This profile type defines the properties of a single wireless network signal broadcast by an AP. Each radio on a single AP can broadcast up to 8 SSIDs. You can have a maximum of 32 SSD profiles on the UAG.
• Security - This profile type defines the security settings used by a single SSID. It controls the encryption method required for a wireless client to associate itself with the SSID. You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the UAG.
• MAC Filtering - This profile provides an additional layer of security for an SSID, allowing you to block access or allow access to that SSID based on wireless client MAC addresses. If a client's MAC address is on the list, then it is either allowed or denied, depending on how you set up the MAC Filter profile. You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the UAG.

SSID

The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the name that identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. In other words, it is the name of the wireless network that clients use to connect to it.

WEP

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption scrambles all data packets transmitted between the AP and the wireless stations associated with it in order to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key for data encryption and decryption.

WPA and WPA2

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication.

IEEE 802.1x

The IEEE 802.1x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management. Authentication is done using an external RADIUS server.

32.2 Radio Screen

This screen allows you to create radio profiles for the APs on your network. A radio profile is a list of settings that a supported managed AP (NWA5121-N for example) can use to configure either one of its two radio transmitters. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the UAG.

Figure 198 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 145 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to add a new radio profile.
Edit	Click this to edit the selected radio profile.
Remove	Click this to remove the selected radio profile.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Object Reference	Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected radio profile.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Profile Name	This field indicates the name assigned to the radio profile.
Frequency Band	This field indicates the frequency band which this radio profile is configured to use.
Channel ID	This field indicates the broadcast channel which this radio profile is configured to use.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

32.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile

This screen allows you to create a new radio profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a radio profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Figure 199 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 146 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Hide / Show Advanced Settings	Click this to hide or show the Advanced Settings in this window.
Create New Object	Select an item from this menu to create a new object of that type. Any objects created in this way are automatically linked to this radio profile.
General Settings
Activate	Select this option to make this profile active.
Profile Name	Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be used as this profile's name. Spaces and underscores are allowed.
802.11 Band	Select the wireless band which this radio profile should use.2.4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11a/n wireless clients.
Mode	Select how to let wireless clients connect to the AP.When using the 2.4 GHz band, select b/g to let IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices associate with the AP.When using the 2.4 GHz band, select b/g/n to let IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices associate with the AP.When using the 5 GHz band, select a to let only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices associate with the AP.When using the 5 GHz band, select a/n to let IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices associate with the AP.
Channel	Select the wireless channel which this radio profile should use.It is recommended that you choose the channel least in use by other APs in the region where this profile will be implemented. This will reduce the amount of interference between wireless clients and the AP to which this profile is assigned.Some 5 GHz channels include the label indoor use only. These are for use with an indoor AP only. Do not use them with an outdoor AP.
Advanced Settings
Channel Width	Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network-select Auto to allow the UAG to adjust the channel bandwidth to 40 MHz or 20 MHz depending on network conditions.Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood.
Guard Interval	Set the guard interval for this radio profile to either short or long.The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order to reduce interference. Reducing the interval increases data transfer rates but also increases interference. Increasing the interval reduces data transfer rates but also reduces interference.
Enable A-MPDU Aggregation	Select this to enable A-MPDU aggregation.Message Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames along with their 802.11n headers and wraps them in a 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput in environments that are prone to high error rates.
A-MPDU Limit	Enter the maximum frame size to be aggregated.
A-MPDU Subframe	Enter the maximum number of frames to be aggregated each time.
Enable A-MSDU Aggregation	Select this to enable A-MSDU aggregation. Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames without any of their 802.11n headers and wraps the header-less payload in a single 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput. It is also more efficient than A-MPDU except in environments that are prone to high error rates.
A-MSDU Limit	Enter the maximum frame size to be aggregated.
Disable-Channel Switch for DFS	This field is available when you select 5G in the 802.11 Band field. DFS (dynamic frequency selection) allows an AP to detect other devices in the same channel. If there is another device using the same channel, the AP changes to a different channel, so that it can avoid interference with radar systems or other wireless networks. Select this option to disable DFS on the AP.
RTS/CTS Threshold	Use RTS/CTS to reduce data collisions on the wireless network if you have wireless clients that are associated with the same AP but out of range of one another. When enabled, a wireless client sends an RTS (Request To Send) and then waits for a CTS (Clear To Send) before it transmits. This stops wireless clients from transmitting packets at the same time (and causing data collisions). A wireless client sends an RTS for all packets larger than the number (of bytes) that you enter here. Set the RTS/CTS equal to or higher than the fragmentation threshold to turn RTS/CTS off.
Beacon Interval	When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.
DTIM	Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255.
Output Power	Set the output power of the AP in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA5160N to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following 100%, 50%, 25%, or 12.5%. See the product specifications for more information on your UAG's output power. Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the UAG's effective broadcast radius.
Enable RSSI Threshold	Use the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) threshold to ensure wireless clients receive good throughput. This allows only wireless clients with a strong signal to connect to the AP. Select the check box and set a minimum client signal strength for connecting to the AP. -20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -76 is the weakest. Clear the check box to not require wireless clients to have a minimum signal strength to connect to the AP.
Rate Configuration	This section controls the data rates permitted for clients.For each Rate, select a rate option from its list. The rates are:Basic Rate (Mbps) - Set the basic rate configuration in Mbps.Support Rate (Mbps) - Set the support rate configuration in Mbps.MCS Rate - Set the MCS rate configuration. IEEE 802.11n supports many different data rates which are called MCS rates. MCS stands for Modulation and Coding Scheme. This is an 802.11n feature that increases the wireless network performance in terms of throughput.
Multicast Settings	Use this section to set a transmission mode and maximum rate for multicast traffic.
Transmission Mode	Set how the AP handles multicast traffic SELECT Multicast to Unicast to broadcast wireless multicast traffic to all of the wireless clients as unicast traffic. Unicast traffic dynamically changes the data rate based on the application's bandwidth requirements. The retransmit mechanism of unicast traffic provides more reliable transmission of the multicast traffic, although it also produces duplicate packets.Select Fixed Multicast Rate to send wireless multicast traffic at a single data rate. You must know the multicast application's bandwidth requirements and set it in the following field.
Multicast Rate (Mbps)	If you set the multicast transmission mode to fixed multicast rate, set the data rate for multicast traffic here. For example, to deploy 4 Mbps video, select a fixed multicast rate higher than 4 Mbps.
MBSSID Settings	This section allows you to associate an SSID profile with the radio profile.
Edit	Select and SSID and click this button to reassign it. The selected SSID becomes editable immediately upon clicking.
SSID Profile	Indicates which SSID profile is associated with this radio profile.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

32.3 SSD Screen

The SSID screens allow you to configure three different types of profiles for your networked APs: an SSID list, which can assign specific SSID configurations to your APs; a security list, which can assign specific encryption methods to the APs when allowing wireless clients to connect to them; and a MAC filter list, which can limit connections to an AP based on wireless clients MAC addresses.

32.3.1 SSD List

This screen allows you to create and manage SSID configurations that can be used by the APs. An SSID, or Service Set IDentifier, is basically the name of the wireless network to which a wireless client can connect. The SSID appears as readable text to any device capable of scanning for wireless frequencies (such as the WiFi adapter in a laptop), and is displayed as the wireless network name when a person makes a connection to it.

To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 SSID profiles on the UAG.

Figure 200 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 147 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to add a new SSID profile.
Edit	Click this to edit the selected SSID profile.
Remove	Click this to remove the selected SSID profile.
Object Reference	Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected SSID profile (for example, radio profile).
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Profile Name	This field indicates the name assigned to the SSID profile.
SSID	This field indicates the SSID name as it appears to wireless clients.
Security Profile	This field indicates which (if any) security profile is associated with the SSID profile.
QoS	This field indicates the QoS type associated with the SSID profile.
MAC Filtering Profile	This field indicates which (if any) MAC Filter Profile is associated with the SSID profile.
VLAN ID	This field indicates the VLAN ID associated with the SSID profile.

32.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile

This screen allows you to create a new SSID profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select an SSID profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Figure 201 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 148 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Select an object type from the list to create a new one associated with this SSID profile.
Profile Name	Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed.
SSID	Enter the SSID name for this profile. This is the name visible on the network to wireless clients. Enter up to 32 characters, spaces and underscores are allowed.
Security Profile	Select a security profile from this list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the Create new Object menu to create one.Note: It is highly recommended that you create security profiles for all of your SSIDs to enhance your network security.
MAC Filtering Profile	Select a MAC filtering profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can sue the Create new Object menu to create one.MAC filtering allows you to limit the wireless clients connecting to your network through a particular SSID by wireless client MAC addresses. Any clients that have MAC addresses not in the MAC filtering profile of allowed addresses are denied connections.The disable setting means no MAC filtering is used.
QoS	Select a Quality of Service (QoS) access category to associate with this SSID. Access categories minimize the delay of data packets across a wireless network. Certain categories, such as video or voice, are given a higher priority due to the time sensitive nature of their data packets.QoS access categories are as follows: disable: Turns off QoS for this SSID. All data packets are treated equally and not tagged with access categories.WMM: Enables automatic tagging of data packets. The UAG assigns access categories to the SSID by examining data as it passes through it and making a best guess effort. If something looks like video traffic, for instance, it is tagged as such.WMM_VOID: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as voice data. This is recommended if an SSID is used for activities like placing and receiving VoIP phone calls.WMM Video: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as video data. This is recommended for activities like video conferencing.WMM BEST EFFORT: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as "best effort," meaning the data travels the best route it can without displacing higher priority traffic. This is good for activities that do not require the best bandwidth throughput, such as surfing the Internet.WMM BACKGROUND: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as low priority or "background traffic", meaning all other access categories take precedence over this one. If traffic from an SSID does not have strict throughput requirements, then this access category is recommended. For example, an SSID that only has network printers connected to it.
VLAN ID	Enter the VLAN ID that will be used to tag all traffic originating from this SSID if the VLAN is different from the native VLAN.
Hidden SSID	Select this if you want to "hide" your SSID from wireless clients. This tells any wireless clients in the vicinity of the AP using this SSID profile not to display its SSID name as a potential connection. Not all wireless clients respect this flag and display it anyway.When an SSID is "hidden" and a wireless client cannot see it, the only way you can connect to the SSID is by manually entering the SSID name in your wireless connection setup screen(s) (these vary by client, client connectivity software, and operating system).
Enable Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking	Select this option to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID.
Local VAP Setting
VLAN Support	Select ON to tag traffic from the local Virtual AP (VAP) with the VLAN ID specified in this SSID profile. Otherwise, select Off.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

32.3.3 Security List

This screen allows you to manage wireless security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. Wireless security is implemented strictly between the AP broadcasting the SSID and the stations that are connected to it.

To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the UAG.

Figure 202 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 149 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to add a new security profile.
Edit	Click this to edit the selected security profile.
Remove	Click this to remove the selected security profile.
Object Reference	Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected security profile (for example, SSID profile).
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Profile Name	This field indicates the name assigned to the security profile.
Security Mode	This field indicates this profile's security mode (if any).

32.3.4 Add/Edit Security Profile

This screen allows you to create a new security profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a security profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Note: This screen's options change based on the Security Mode selected. Only the default screen is displayed here.

Figure 203 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 150 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Profile Name	Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed.
Security Mode	Select a security mode from the list: wep, wpa, wpa2, or wpa2-mix.

Table 150 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Radius Server Type	Select Internal to use the UAG's internal authentication database, or External to use an external RADIUS server for authentication.
Primary / Secondary Radius Server Activate	Select this to have the UAG use the specified RADIUS server.
Radius Server IP Address	Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Radius Server Port	Enter the port number of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Radius Server Secret	Enter the shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
802.1X	Select this to enable 802.1x secure authentication.
Auth. Method	This field is available only when you set the RADIUS server type to Internal. Select an authentication method if you have created any in the Configuration > Object > Auth. Method screen.
Reauthenticatio n Timer	Enter the interval (in seconds) between authentication requests. Enter a 0 for unlimited requests.
The following fields are available if you set Security Mode to wep.
Idle Timeout	Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is discontinued.
Authentication Type	Select a WEP authentication method. Choices are Open or Share key.
Key Length	Select the bit-length of the encryption key to be used in WEP connections. If you select WEP-64: • Enter 10 hexadecimal digits in the range of "A-F", "a-f" and "0-9" (for example, 0x11AA22BB33) for each Key used. or • Enter 5 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from "a-z", "A-Z" and "0-9" (for example, MyKey) for each Key used. If you select WEP-128: • Enter 26 hexadecimal digits in the range of "A-F", "a-f" and "0-9" (for example, 0x00112233445566778899AAABBCC) for each Key used. or • Enter 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from "a-z", "A-Z" and "0-9" (for example, MyKey12345678) for each Key used.
Key 1~4	Based on your Key Length selection, enter the appropriate length hexadecimal or ASCII key.
The following fields are available if you set Security Mode to wpa, wpa2 or wpa2-mix.
PSK	Select this option to use a Pre-Shared Key with WPA encryption.
Pre-Shared Key	Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.
Cipher Type	Select an encryption cipher type from the list. • auto - This automatically chooses the best available cipher based on the cipher in use by the wireless client that is attempting to make a connection. • tkip - This is the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol encryption method added later to the WEP encryption protocol to further secure. Not all wireless clients may support this. • aes - This is the Advanced Encryption Standard encryption method. It is a more recent development over TKIP and considerably more robust. Not all wireless clients may support this.

Table 150 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Idle Timeout	Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is discontinued.
Group Key Update Timer	Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the AP updates the group WPA encryption key.
Pre-Authentication	This field is available only when you set Security Mode to wpa2 or wpa2-mix and enable 802.1x authentication. Enable or Disable pre-authentication to allow the AP to send authentication information to other APs on the network, allowing connected wireless clients to switch APs without having to re-authenticate their network connection.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

32.3.5 MAC Filter List

This screen allows you to create and manage security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the UAG.

Figure 204 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 151 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile.
Edit	Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile.
Remove	Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.
Object Reference	Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for example, SSID profile).
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Profile Name	This field indicates the name assigned to the MAC filtering profile.
Filter Action	This field indicates this profile's filter action (if any).

32.3.6 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile

This screen allows you to create a new MAC filtering profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a MAC filter profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Figure 205 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 152 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Profile Name	Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed.
Filter Action	Select allow to permit the wireless client with the MAC addresses in this profile to connect to the network through the associated SSID; select deny to block the wireless clients with the specified MAC addresses.
Add	Click this to add a MAC address to the profile's list.
Edit	Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile's list.
Remove	Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile's list.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
MAC Address	This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile.
Description	This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores allowed.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

33.1 Overview

Address objects can represent a single IP address or a range of IP addresses. Address groups are composed of address objects and other address groups.

33.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• The Address screen (Section 33.2 on page 314) provides a summary of all addresses in the UAG. Use the Address Add/Edit screen to create a new address or edit an existing one.
• Use the Address Group summary screen (Section 33.3 on page 316) and the Address Group Add/Edit screen, to maintain address groups in the UAG.

33.1.2 What You Need To Know

Address objects and address groups are used in dynamic routes, firewall rules,and VPN 1-1 mapping profiles. Please see the respective sections for more information about how address objects and address groups are used in each one.

Address groups are composed of address objects and address groups. The sequence of members in the address group is not important.

33.2 Address Summary Screen

The address screens are used to create, maintain, and remove addresses. There are the types of address objects.

• HOST - a host address is defined by an IP Address.
• RANGE - a range address is defined by a Starting IP Address and an Ending IP Address.
• SUBNET - a network address is defined by a Network IP address and Netmask subnet mask.

The Address screen provides a summary of all addresses in the UAG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Address > Address. Click a column's heading cell to sort the table entries by that column's criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order.

Figure 206 Configuration > Object > Address > Address

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 33.2.1 on page 315 for more information as well.

Table 153 Configuration > Object > Address > Address

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Configuration
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Name	This field displays the configured name of each address object.
Type	This field displays the type of each address object. "INTERFACE" means the object uses the settings of one of the UAG's interfaces.
IPv4 Address	This field displays the IPv4 addresses represented by each address object. If the object's settings are based on one of the UAG's interfaces, the name of the interface displays first followed by the object's current address settings.

33.2.1 Address Add/Edit Screen

The Configuration > Object > Address Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new address or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Address screen (see Section 33.2 on page 314), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the Configuration section.

Figure 207 IPv4 Address Configuration > Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 154 IPv4 Address Configuration > Add/Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Type the name used to refer to the address. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores( ), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Address Type	Select the type of address you want to create. Choices are: HOST, RANGE, SUBNET, INTERFACE IP, INTERFACE SUBNET, and INTERFACE GATEWAY. Note: The UAG automatically updates address objects that are based on an interface's IP address, subnet, or gateway if the interface's IP address settings change. For example, if you change lan1's IP address, the UAG automatically updates the corresponding interface-based, LAN subnet address object.
IP Address	This field is only available if the Address Type is HOST. This field cannot be blank. Enter the IP address that this address object represents.
Starting IP Address	This field is only available if the Address Type is RANGE. This field cannot be blank. Enter the beginning of the range of IP addresses that this address object represents.
Ending IP Address	This field is only available if the Address Type is RANGE. This field cannot be blank. Enter the end of the range of IP address that this address object represents.
Network	This field is only available if the Address Type is SUBNET, in which case this field cannot be blank. Enter the IP address of the network that this address object represents.
Netmask	This field is only available if the Address Type is SUBNET, in which case this field cannot be blank. Enter the subnet mask of the network that this address object represents. Use dotted decimal format.
Interface	If you selected INTERFACE IP, INTERFACE SUBNET, or INTERFACE GATEWAY as the Address Type, use this field to select the interface of the network that this address object represents.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

33.3 Address Group Summary Screen

The Address Group screen provides a summary of all address groups. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Address > Address Group. Click a column's heading cell to sort the table entries by that column's criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order.

Figure 208 Configuration > Object > Address > Address Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 33.3.1 on page 317 for more information as well.

Table 155 Configuration > Object > Address > Address Group

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Configuration
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address group.
Name	This field displays the name of each address group.
Description	This field displays the description of each address group, if any.

33.3.1 Address Group Add/Edit Screen

The Address Group Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new address group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Address Group screen (see Section 33.3 on page 316), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the Configuration section.

Figure 209 Address Group Configuration > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 156 Address Group Configuration > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Enter a name for the address group. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes ( - ), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Description	This field displays the description of each address group, if any. You can use up to 60 characters, punctuation marks, and spaces.
Member List	The Member list displays the names of the address and address group objects that have been added to the address group. The order of members is not important. Select items from the Available list that you want to be members and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. Move any members you do not want included to the Available list.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

34.1 Overview

Use service objects to define TCP applications, UDP applications, and ICMP messages. You can also create service groups to refer to multiple service objects in other features.

34.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Service screens (Section 34.2 on page 320) to view and configure the UAG's list of services and their definitions.
• Use the Service Group screens (Section 34.2 on page 320) to view and configure the UAG's list of service groups.

34.1.2 What You Need to Know

IP Protocols

IP protocols are based on the eight-bit protocol field in the IP header. This field represents the next-level protocol that is sent in this packet. This section discusses three of the most common IP protocols.

Computers use Transmission Control Protocol (TCP, IP protocol 6) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP, IP protocol 17) to exchange data with each other. TCP guarantees reliable delivery but is slower and more complex. Some uses are FTP, HTTP, SMTP, and TELNET. UDP is simpler and faster but is less reliable. Some uses are DHCP, DNS, RIP, and SNMP.

TCP creates connections between computers to exchange data. Once the connection is established, the computers exchange data. If data arrives out of sequence or is missing, TCP puts it in sequence or waits for the data to be re-transmitted. Then, the connection is terminated.

In contrast, computers use UDP to send short messages to each other. There is no guarantee that the messages arrive in sequence or that the messages arrive at all.

Both TCP and UDP use ports to identify the source and destination. Each port is a 16-bit number. Some port numbers have been standardized and are used by low-level system processes; many others have no particular meaning.

Unlike TCP and UDP, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP, IP protocol 1) is mainly used to send error messages or to investigate problems. For example, ICMP is used to send the response if a computer cannot be reached. Another use is ping. ICMP does not guarantee delivery, but networks often treat ICMP messages differently, sometimes looking at the message itself to decide where to send it.

Service Objects and Service Groups

Use service objects to define IP protocols.

• TCP applications
• UDP applications
• ICMP messages
• user-defined services (for other types of IP protocols)

These objects are used in policy routes, and firewall rules.

Use service groups when you want to create the same rule for several services, instead of creating separate rules for each service. Service groups may consist of services and other service groups. The sequence of members in the service group is not important.

34.2 The Service Summary Screen

The Service summary screen provides a summary of all services and their definitions. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove services.

To access this screen, log in to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > Service > Service. Click a column's heading cell to sort the table entries by that column's criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order.

Figure 210 Configuration > Object > Service > Service

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 157 Configuration > Object > Service > Service

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific service.
Name	This field displays the name of each service.
Content	This field displays a description of each service.

34.2.1 The Service Add/Edit Screen

The Service Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new service or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Service screen (see Section 34.2 on page 320), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon.

Figure 211 Configuration > Object > Service > Service > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 158 Configuration > Object > Service > Service > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Type the name used to refer to the service. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
IP Protocol	Select the protocol the service uses. Choices are: TCP, UDP, ICMP, and User Defined.
Starting Port	This field appears if the IP Protocol is TCP or UDP. Specify the port number(s) used by this service. If you fill in one of these fields, the service uses that port. If you fill in both fields, the service uses the range of ports.
Ending Port
ICMP Type	This field appears if the IP Protocol is ICMP. Select the ICMP message used by this service. This field displays the message text, not the message number.
IP Protocol Number	This field appears if the IP Protocol is User Defined. Enter the number of the next-level protocol (IP protocol). Allowed values are 1 - 255.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

34.3 The Service Group Summary Screen

The Service Group summary screen provides a summary of all service groups. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove service groups.

To access this screen, log in to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group.

Figure 212 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 34.3.1 on page 322 for more information as well.

Table 159 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific service group.
Name	This field displays the name of each service group. By default, the UAG uses services starting with “Default_Acclar” in the firewall rules to allow certain services to connect to the UAG.
Description	This field displays the description of each service group, if any.

34.3.1 The Service Group Add/Edit Screen

The Service Group Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new service group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Service Group screen (see Section 34.3 on page 322), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon.

Figure 213 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 160 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Enter the name of the service group. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Description	Enter a description of the service group, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters.
Member List	The Member list displays the names of the service and service group objects that have been added to the service group. The order of members is not important. Select items from the Available list that you want to be members and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. Move any members you do not want included to the Available list.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

35.1 Overview

Use schedules to set up one-time and recurring schedules for policy routes, and firewall rules. The UAG supports one-time and recurring schedules. One-time schedules are effective only once, while recurring schedules usually repeat. Both types of schedules are based on the current date and time in the UAG.

Note: Schedules are based on the UAG's current date and time.

35.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Schedule summary screen (Section 35.2 on page 325) to see a list of all schedules in the UAG.
• Use the One-Time Schedule Add/Edit screen (Section 35.2.1 on page 326) to create or edit a one-time schedule.
• Use the Recurring Schedule Add/Edit screen (Section 35.2.2 on page 327) to create or edit a recurring schedule.

35.1.2 What You Need to Know

One-time Schedules

One-time schedules begin on a specific start date and time and end on a specific stop date and time. One-time schedules are useful for long holidays and vacation periods.

Recurring Schedules

Recurring schedules begin at a specific start time and end at a specific stop time on selected days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday). Recurring schedules always begin and end in the same day. Recurring schedules are useful for defining the workday and off-work hours.

Finding Out More

• See Section 40.4 on page 356 for information about the UAG's current date and time.

35.2 The Schedule Summary Screen

The Schedule summary screen provides a summary of all schedules in the UAG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Schedule.

Figure 214 Configuration > Object > Schedule

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 35.2.1 on page 326 and Section 35.2.2 on page 327 for more information as well.

Table 161 Configuration > Object > Schedule

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
One Time
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific schedule.
Name	This field displays the name of the schedule, which is used to refer to the schedule.
Start Day / Time	This field displays the date and time at which the schedule begins.
Stop Day / Time	This field displays the date and time at which the schedule ends.
Recurring
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.4.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific schedule.
Name	This field displays the name of the schedule, which is used to refer to the schedule.
Start Time	This field displays the time at which the schedule begins.
Stop Time	This field displays the time at which the schedule ends.

35.2.1 The One-Time Schedule Add/Edit Screen

The One-Time Schedule Add/Edit screen allows you to define a one-time schedule or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Schedule screen (see Section 35.2 on page 325), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the One Time section.

Figure 215 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (One Time)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 162 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (One Time)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Configuration
Name	Type the name used to refer to the one-time schedule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Date Time
StartDate	Specify the year, month, and day when the schedule begins. • Year - 1900 - 2999 • Month - 1 - 12 • Day - 1 - 31 (it is not possible to specify illegal dates, such as February 31.)
StartTime	Specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins. • Hour - 0 - 23 • Minute - 0 - 59
StopDate	Specify the year, month, and day when the schedule ends. • Year - 1900 - 2999 • Month - 1 - 12 • Day - 1 - 31 (it is not possible to specify illegal dates, such as February 31.)
StopTime	Specify the hour and minute when the schedule ends. • Hour - 0 - 23 • Minute - 0 - 59
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

35.2.2 The Recurring Schedule Add/Edit Screen

The Recurring Schedule Add/Edit screen allows you to define a recurring schedule or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Schedule screen (see Section 35.2 on page 325), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the Recurring section.

Figure 216 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (Recurring)

The Year, Month, and Day columns are not used in recurring schedules and are disabled in this screen. The following table describes the remaining labels in this screen.

Table 163 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (Recurring)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Configuration
Name	Type the name used to refer to the recurring schedule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Date Time
StartTime	Specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins each day. • Hour - 0 - 23 • Minute - 0 - 59
StopTime	Specify the hour and minute when the schedule ends each day. • Hour - 0 - 23 • Minute - 0 - 59
Weekly
Week Days	Select each day of the week the recurring schedule is effective.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

36.1 Overview

You can use a AAA (Authentication, Authorization, Accounting) server to provide access control to your network. The AAA server can be a RADIUS server. Use the AAA Server screens to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers. You use AAA server objects in configuring ext-group-user user objects and authentication method objects (see Chapter 37 on page 332).

36.1.1 RADIUS Server

RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In essence, RADIUS authentication allows you to validate a large number of users from a central location.

Figure 217 RADIUS Server Network Example

36.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS screen (Section 36.2 on page 329) to configure the default external RADIUS server to use for user authentication.

36.1.3 What You Need To Know

AAA Servers Supported by the UAG

The following lists the types of authentication server the UAG supports.

• Local user database

The UAG uses the built-in local user database to authenticate administrative users logging into the UAG's Web Configurator or network access users logging into the network through the UAG.

- RADIUS

RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external or built-in RADIUS server. RADIUS authentication allows you to validate a large number of users from a central location.

36.2 RADIUS Server Summary

Use the RADIUS screen to manage the list of RADIUS servers the UAG can use in authenticating users.

Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS to display the RADIUS screen.

Figure 218 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 164 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field displays the index number.
Name	This is the name of the RADIUS server entry.
Server Address	This is the address of the RADIUS server.

36.2.1 Adding a RADIUS Server

Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS to display the RADIUS screen. Click the Add icon or an Edit icon to display the following screen. Use this screen to create a new RADIUS entry or edit an existing one.

Figure 219 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 165 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Enter a descriptive name (up to 63 alphanumeric characters) for identification purposes.
Description	Enter the description of each server, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters.
Server Address	Enter the address of the RADIUS server.
Authentication Port	Specify the port number on the RADIUS server to which the UAG sends authentication requests. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.
Backup Server Address	If the RADIUS server has a backup server, enter its address here.
Backup Authentication Port	Specify the port number on the RADIUS server to which the UAG sends authentication requests. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.
Timeout	Specify the timeout period (between 1 and 300 seconds) before the UAG disconnects from the RADIUS server. In this case, user authentication fails. Search timeout occurs when either the user information is not in the RADIUS server or the RADIUS server is down.
NAS IP Address	If the RADIUS server requires the UAG to provide the Network Access Server (NAS) IP address attribute with a specific value, enter it here.
Case-sensitive User Names	Select this if the server checks the case of the usernames.
Key	Enter a password (up to 15 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the UAG.The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external authentication server and the UAG.
GroupMembershipAttribute	A RADIUS server defines attributes for its accounts. Select the name and number of the attribute that the UAG is to check to determine to which group a user belongs. If it does not display, select user-defined and specify the attribute's number.This attribute's value is called a group identifier; it determines to which group a user belongs. You can add ext-group-user user objects to identify groups based on these group identifier values.For example you could have an attribute named "memberOf" with values like "sales", "RD", and "management". Then you could also create a ext-group-user user object for each group. One with "sales" as the group identifier, another for "RD" and a third for "management".
OK	Click OK to save the changes.
Cancel	Click Cancel to discard the changes.

Authentication Method

37.1 Overview

Authentication method objects set how the UAG authenticates wireless, HTTP/HTTPS clients, and peer IPSec routers (extended authentication) clients. Configure authentication method objects to have the UAG use the local user database, and/or the authentication servers and authentication server groups specified by AAA server objects. By default, user accounts created and stored on the UAG are authenticated locally.

37.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Configuration > Object > Auth. Method screens (Section 37.2 on page 332) to create and manage authentication method objects.

37.1.2 Before You Begin

Configure AAA server objects (see Chapter 36 on page 328) before you configure authentication method objects.

37.2 Authentication Method Objects

Click Configuration > Object > Auth. Method to display the screen as shown.

Note: You can create up to four authentication method objects.

Figure 220 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 166 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field displays the index number.
Method Name	This field displays a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Method List	This field displays the authentication method(s) for this entry.

37.2.1 Creating an Authentication Method Object

Follow the steps below to create an authentication method object.

1 Click Configuration > Object > Auth. Method.
2 Click Add.
3 Specify a descriptive name for identification purposes in the Name field. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. For example, "My_Devic".
4 Click Add to insert an authentication method in the table.
5 Select a server object from the Method List drop-down list box.
6 You can add up to four server objects to the table. The ordering of the Method List column is important. The UAG authenticates the users using the databases (in the local user database or the external authentication server) in the order they appear in this screen.

If two accounts with the same username exist on two authentication servers you specify, the UAG does not continue the search on the second authentication server when you enter the username and password that doesn't match the one on the first authentication server.

Note: You can NOT select two server objects of the same type.

7 Click OK to save the settings or click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the previous screen.

Figure 221 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 167 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Specify a descriptive name for identification purposes.You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores( ), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. For example, "My_Devic".
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Move	To change a method's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.The ordering of your methods is important as UAG authenticates the users using the authentication methods in the order they appear in this screen.
#	This field displays the index number.
Method List	Select a server object from the drop-down list box. You can create a server object in the AAA Server screen (see Chapter 36 on page 328 for more information).The UAG authenticates the users using the databases (in the local user database or the external authentication server) in the order they appear in this screen.If two accounts with the same username exist on two authentication servers you specify, the UAG does not continue the search on the second authentication server when you enter the username and password that doesn't match the one on the first authentication server.
OK	Click OK to save the changes.
Cancel	Click Cancel to discard the changes.

38.1 Overview

The UAG can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner's identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.

38.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the My Certificates screens (see Section 38.2 on page 338 to Section 38.2.3 on page 344) to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the CA-signed certificates.
• Use the Trusted Certificates screens (see Section 38.3 on page 345 to Section 38.3.2 on page 349) to save CA certificates and trusted remote host certificates to the UAG. The UAG trusts any valid certificate that you have imported as a trusted certificate. It also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the certificates that you have imported as a trusted certificate.

38.1.2 What You Need to Know

When using public-key cryptography for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available. The other key is private and must be kept secure.

These keys work like a handwritten signature (in fact, certificates are often referred to as "digital signatures"). Only you can write your signature exactly as it should look. When people know what your signature looks like, they can verify whether something was signed by you, or by someone else. In the same way, your private key "writes" your digital signature and your public key allows people to verify whether data was signed by you, or by someone else. This process works as follows.

1 Tim wants to send a message to Jenny. He needs her to be sure that it comes from him, and that the message content has not been altered by anyone else along the way. Tim generates a public key pair (one public key and one private key).
2 Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. This means that anyone who receives a message seeming to come from Tim can read it and verify whether it is really from him or not.
3 Tim uses his private key to sign the message and sends it to Jenny.
4 Jenny receives the message and uses Tim's public key to verify it. Jenny knows that the message is from Tim, and that although other people may have been able to read the message, no-one can have altered it (because they cannot re-sign the message with Tim's private key).

5 Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to sign a message and Tim uses Jenny's public key to verify the message.

The UAG uses certificates based on public-key cryptography to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that you send after establishing a connection. The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection.

The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates.

A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The UAG does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked.

Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL (Certificate Revocation List). The UAG can check a peer's certificate against a directory server's list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure).

Advantages of Certificates

Certificates offer the following benefits.

• The UAG only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate.
  Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys.

Self-signed Certificates

You can have the UAG act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates.

Factory Default Certificate

The UAG generates its own unique self-signed certificate when you first turn it on. This certificate is referred to in the GUI as the factory default certificate.

Certificate File Formats

Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not included. The UAG currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate.

• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.

• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates. The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file's password is not connected to your certificate's public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the UAG.

Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default.

38.1.3 Verifying a Certificate

Before you import a trusted certificate into the UAG, you should verify that you have the correct certificate. You can do this using the certificate's fingerprint. A certificate's fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithm. The following procedure describes how to check a certificate's fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate.

1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer.
2 Make sure that the certificate has a ".cert" or ".crt" file name extension.

Figure 222 Remote Host Certificates

3 Double-click the certificate's icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields.

Figure 223 Certificate Details

4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may very based on your situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection.

38.2 The My Certificates Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen. This is the UAG's summary list of certificates and certification requests.

Figure 224 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 168 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
PKI Storage Space in Use	This bar displays the percentage of the UAG's PKI storage space that is currently in use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
Add	Click this to go to the screen where you can have the UAG generate a certificate or a certification request.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.
Remove	The UAG keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.
Object Reference	You cannot delete certificates that any of the UAG's features are configured to use. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
Name	This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name.
Type	This field displays what kind of certificate this is. REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request. SELF represents a self-signed certificate. CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
Subject	This field displays identifying information about the certificate's owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Issuer	This field displays identifying information about the certificate's issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.
Valid From	This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To	This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired.
Import	Click Import to open a screen where you can save a certificate to the UAG.
Refresh	Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates.

38.2.1 The My Certificates Add Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Add icon to open the My Certificates Add screen. Use this screen to have the UAG create a self-signed certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request.

Figure 225 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 169 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	Type a name to identify this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ‘~!@#$%^&(\_+[]{}\)',.=- characters.
Subject Information	Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do not have to fill in every field, although you must specify a Host IP Address, Host Domain Name, or E-Mail. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Select a radio button to identify the certificate's owner by IP address, domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. A domain name can be up to 255 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and periods. An e-mail address can be up to 63 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen, the @ symbol, periods and the underscore.
Organizational Unit	Identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Organization	Identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Town (City)	Identify the town or city where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
State (Province)	Identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Country	Identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Key Type	Select RSA to use the Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm. Select DSA to use the Digital Signature Algorithm public-key algorithm.
Key Length	Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should use (512 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI storage space.
Enrollment Options	These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated.
Create a self-signed certificate	Select this to have the UAG generate the certificate and act as the Certification Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates.
Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment	Select this to have the UAG generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the My Certificate Details screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority. Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Details screen (see Section 38.2.2 on page 341) and then send it to the certification authority.
OK	Click OK to begin certificate or certification request generation.
Cancel	Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

38.2.2 The My Certificates Edit Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Edit icon to open the My Certificate Edit screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificate's name.

Figure 226 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 170 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ‘~!@#$%^&(.)_+[]{}',.=- characters.
Certification Path	This field displays for a certificate, not a certification request. Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself). If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The UAG does not trust the certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh	Click Refresh to display the certification path.
Certificate Information	These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
Type	This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate's owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). "X.509" means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.
Version	This field displays the X.509 version number.
Serial Number	This field displays the certificate's identification number given by the certification authority or generated by the UAG.
Subject	This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O), State (ST), and Country (C).
Issuer	This field displays identifying information about the certificate's issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field. "none" displays for a certification request.
Signature Algorithm	This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. The UAG uses rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Some certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
Valid From	This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. "none" displays for a certification request.
Valid To	This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. "none" displays for a certification request.
Key Algorithm	This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate's key pair (the UAG uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example).
Subject Alternative Name	This field displays the certificate owner's IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL).
Key Usage	This field displays for what functions the certificate's key can be used. For example, "DigitalSignature" means that the key can be used to sign certificates and "KeyEncipherment" means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint	This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority's certificate and "Path Length Constraint=1" means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate's path. This field does not display for a certification request.
MD5 Fingerprint	This is the certificate's message digest that the UAG calculated using the MD5 algorithm.
SHA1 Fingerprint	This is the certificate's message digest that the UAG calculated using the SHA1 algorithm.
Certificate in PEM (Base-64) Encoded Format	This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority's web page, an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment. You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Export Certificate Only	Use this button to save a copy of the certificate without its private key. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
Password	If you want to export the certificate with its private key, create a password and type it here. Make sure you keep this password in a safe place. You will need to use it if you import the certificate to another device.
Export Certificate with Private Key	Use this button to save a copy of the certificate with its private key. Type the certificate's password and click this button. Click Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG. You can only change the name.
Cancel	Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

38.2.3 The My Certificates Import Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import to open the My Certificate Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the UAG.

Note: You can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the UAG. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the certificate's public and private keys.

The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen.

You must remove any spaces from the certificate's filename before you can import it.

Figure 227 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 171 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the UAG.
Browse	Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Password	This field only applies when you import a binary PKCS#12 format file. Type the file's password that was created when the PKCS #12 file was exported.
OK	Click OK to save the certificate on the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

38.3 The Trusted Certificates Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates to open the Trusted Certificates screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates that you have set the UAG to accept as trusted. The UAG also accepts any valid certificate signed by a certificate on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certificates.

Figure 228 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 172 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
PKI Storage Space in Use	This bar displays the percentage of the UAG's PKI storage space that is currently in use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.
Remove	The UAG keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.
Object Reference	You cannot delete certificates that any of the UAG's features are configured to use. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
Name	This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject	This field displays identifying information about the certificate's owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Issuer	This field displays identifying information about the certificate's issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.
Valid From	This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To	This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired.
Import	Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the UAG.
Refresh	Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.

38.3.1 The Trusted Certificates Edit Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates and then a certificate's Edit icon to open the Trusted Certificates Edit screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certificate, change the certificate's name and set whether or not you want the UAG to check a certification authority's list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority.

Figure 229 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 173 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name	This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can change the name. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;~!@#$%^&&(.)_+[]{}',= - characters.
Certification Path	Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity's certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entity's certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certificate, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the end entity's own certificate). The UAG does not trust the end entity's certificate and displays "Not trusted" in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh	Click Refresh to display the certification path.
LDAP Server	Select this check box if the directory server uses LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). LDAP is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of certificates and lists of revoked certificates.
Address	Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the directory server.
Port	Use this field to specify the LDAP server port number. You must use the same server port number that the directory server uses. 389 is the default server port number for LDAP.
ID	The UAG may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the CRL directory server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server (usually a certification authority).
Password	Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the CRL directory server (usually a certification authority).
Certificate Information	These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
Type	This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate's owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.
Version	This field displays the X.509 version number.
Serial Number	This field displays the certificate's identification number given by the certification authority.
Subject	This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).
Issuer	This field displays identifying information about the certificate's issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject Name field.
Signature Algorithm	This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
Valid From	This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
Valid To	This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
Key Algorithm	This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate's key pair (the UAG uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example).
Subject Alternative Name	This field displays the certificate's owner's IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL).
Key Usage	This field displays for what functions the certificate's key can be used. For example, "DigitalSignature" means that the key can be used to sign certificates and "KeyEncipherment" means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint	This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority's certificate and "Path Length Constraint=1" means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate's path.
MD5 Fingerprint	This is the certificate's message digest that the UAG calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate.
SHA1 Fingerprint	This is the certificate's message digest that the UAG calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate.
Certificate in PEM (Base-64) Encoded Format	This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Export Certificate	Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG. You can only change the name.
Cancel	Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Certificates screen.

38.3.2 The Trusted Certificates Import Screen

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import to open the Trusted Certificates Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certificate to the UAG.

Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate's filename before you can import the certificate.

Figure 230 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 174 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the UAG.
Browse	Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.
OK	Click OK to save the certificate on the UAG.
Cancel	Click Cancel to quit and return to the previous screen.

39.1 Overview

Use ISP accounts to manage Internet Service Provider (ISP) account information for PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. An ISP account is a profile of settings for Internet access using PPPoE or PPTP.

Finding Out More

• See Section 10.4 on page 120 for information about PPPoE/PPTP interfaces.

39.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the Object > ISP Account screens (Section 39.2 on page 351) to create and manage ISP accounts in the UAG.

39.2 ISP Account Summary

This screen provides a summary of ISP accounts in the UAG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > ISP Account.

Figure 231 Configuration > Object > ISP Account

The following table describes the labels in this screen. See the ISP Account Edit section below for more information as well.

Table 175 Configuration > Object > ISP Account

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so.
Object Reference	Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 10.3.2 on page 117 for an example.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Profile Name	This field displays the profile name of the ISP account. This name is used to identify the ISP account.
Protocol	This field displays the protocol used by the ISP account.
Authentication Type	This field displays the authentication type used by the ISP account.
UserID	This field displays the user name of the ISP account.

39.2.1 ISP Account Edit

The ISP Account Edit screen lets you add information about new accounts and edit information about existing accounts. To open this window, open the ISP Account screen. (See Section 39.2 on page 351.) Then, click on an Add icon or Edit icon to open the ISP Account Edit screen below.

Figure 232 Configuration > Object > ISP Account > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 176 Configuration > Object > ISP Account > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Profile Name	This field is read-only if you are editing an existing account. Type in the profile name of the ISP account. The profile name is used to refer to the ISP account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(____), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive.
Protocol	This field is read-only if you are editing an existing account. Select the protocol used by the ISP account. Options are:pppoe - This ISP account uses the PPPoE protocol.pptp - This ISP account uses the PPTP protocol.
Authentication Type	Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:CHAP/PAP - Your UAG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node.Chap - Your UAG accepts CHAP only.PAP - Your UAG accepts PAP only.MSCHAP - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP only.MSCHAP-V2 - Your UAG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only.
Encryption Method	This field is available if this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol. Use the drop-down list box to select the type of Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE). Options are:nomppe - This ISP account does not use MPPE.mppe-40 - This ISP account uses 40-bit MPPE.mppe-128 - This ISP account uses 128-bit MPPE.
User Name	Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password	Type the password associated with the user name above. The password can only consist of alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9). This field can be blank.
Retype to Confirm	Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.
Server IP	If this ISP account uses the PPPoE protocol, this field is not displayed.If this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol, type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID	This field is available if this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol. Type your identification name for the PPTP server. This field can be blank.
Service Name	If this ISP account uses the PPPoE protocol, type the PPPoE service name to access. PPPoE uses the specified service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server. This field can be blank.If this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol, this field is not displayed.
Compression	Select On button to turn on stac compression, and select Off to turn off stac compression.Stac compression is a data compression technique capable of compressing data by a factor of about four.
Idle Timeout	This value specifies the number of seconds that must elapse without outbound traffic before the UAG automatically disconnects from the PPPoE/PPTP server. This value must be an integer between 0 and 360. If this value is zero, this timeout is disabled.
OK	Click OK to save your changes back to the UAG. If there are no errors, the program returns to the ISP Account screen. If there are errors, a message box explains the error, and the program stays in the ISP Account Edit screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to return to the ISP Account screen without creating the profile (if it is new) or saving any changes to the profile (if it already exists).

40.1 Overview

Use the system screens to configure general UAG settings.

40.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the System > Host Name screen (see Section 40.2 on page 355) to configure a unique name for the UAG in your network.
• Use the System > USB Storage screen (see Section 40.3 on page 355) to configure the settings for the connected USB devices.
• Use the System > Date/Time screen (see Section 40.4 on page 356) to configure the date and time for the UAG.
• Use the System > Console Speed screen (see Section 40.5 on page 360) to configure the console port speed when you connect to the UAG via the console port using a terminal emulation program.
• Use the System > DNS screen (see Section 40.6 on page 361) to configure the DNS (Domain Name System) server used for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
• Use the System > WWW screens (see Section 40.7 on page 367) to configure settings for HTTP or HTTPS access to the UAG and how the login and access user screens look.
• Use the System > SSH screen (see Section 40.8 on page 383) to configure SSH (Secure SHell) used to securely access the UAG's command line interface. You can specify which zones allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come.
• Use the System > TELNET screen (see Section 40.9 on page 388) to configure Telnet to access the UAG's command line interface. Specify which zones allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.
• Use the System > FTP screen (see Section 40.10 on page 389) to specify from which zones FTP can be used to access the UAG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. You can upload and download the UAG's firmware and configuration files using FTP. Please also see Chapter 42 on page 410 for more information about firmware and configuration files.
• Your UAG can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the UAG through the network. Use the System > SNMP screen (see Section 40.11 on page 390) to configure SNMP settings, including from which zones SNMP can be used to access the UAG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come.
• The Language screen (Section 40.12 on page 394) sets the user interface language for the UAG's Web Configurator screens.

Note: See each section for related background information and term definitions.

40.2 Host Name

A host name is the unique name by which a device is known on a network. Click Configuration > System > Host Name to open the Host Name screen.

Figure 233 Configuration > System > Host Name

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 177 Configuration > System > Host Name

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
System Name	Enter a descriptive name to identify your UAG device. This name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes (-) underscores (___) and periods (. ) are accepted.
Domain Name	Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. This name is propagated to DHCP clients connected to interfaces with the DHCP server enabled. This name can be up to 254 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” are accepted.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.3 USB Storage

The UAG can use a connected USB device to store the system log and other diagnostic information. Use this screen to turn on this feature and set a disk full warning limit.

Note: Only connect one USB device. It must allow writing (it cannot be read-only) and use the FAT16, FAT32, EXT2, or EXT3 file system.

Click Configuration > System > USB Storage to open the screen as shown next.

Figure 234 Configuration > System > USB Storage

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 178 Configuration > System > USB Storage

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Activate USB storage service	Select this if you want to use the connected USB device(s).
Disk full warning when remaining space is less than	Set a number and select a unit (MB or %) to have the UAG send a warning message when the remaining USB storage space is less than the value you set here.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.4 Date and Time

For effective scheduling and logging, the UAG system time must be accurate. The UAG's Real Time Chip (RTC) keeps track of the time and date. There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server.

To change your UAG's time based on your local time zone and date, click Configuration > System > Date/Time. The screen displays as shown. You can manually set the UAG's time and date or have the UAG get the date and time from a time server.

Figure 235 Configuration > System > Date and Time

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 179 Configuration > System > Date and Time

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Current Time and Date
Current Time	This field displays the present time of your UAG.
Current Date	This field displays the present date of your UAG.
Time and Date Setup
Manual	Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the time zone and daylight saving will affect the new time and date you entered. When you enter the time settings manually, the UAG uses the new setting once you click Apply.
New Time (hh-mm-ss)	This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply.
New Date (yyyy-mm-dd)	This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply.
Get from Time Server	Select this radio button to have the UAG get the time and date from the time server you specify below. The UAG requests time and date settings from the time server under the following circumstances. · When the UAG starts up. · When you click Apply or Sync. Now in this screen. · 24-hour intervals after starting up.
Time Server Address	Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Sync. Now	Click this button to have the UAG get the time and date from a time server (see the Time Server Address field). This also saves your changes (except the daylight saving settings).
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone	Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Enable Daylight Saving	Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date	Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples: Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date	Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples: Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Offset	Specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends. Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments). For example, if you set this field to 3.5, a log occurred at 6 P.M. in local official time will appear as if it had occurred at 10:30 P.M.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List

When you turn on the UAG for the first time, the date and time start at 2003-01-01 00:00:00. The UAG then attempts to synchronize with one of the following pre-defined list of Network Time Protocol (NTP) time servers.

The UAG continues to use the following pre-defined list of NTP time servers if you do not specify a time server or it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified.

Table 180 Default Time Servers

0.pool.ntp.org

1.pool.ntp.org

2POOL.ntp.org

When the UAG uses the pre-defined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server and tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the UAG goes through the rest of the list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the pre-defined NTP time servers have been tried.

40.4.2 Time Server Synchronization

Click the Synchronize Now button to get the time and date from the time server you specified in the Time Server Address field.

When the Loading... screen appears, you may have to wait up to one minute.

Figure 236 Synchronization in Process

The Current Time and Current Date fields will display the appropriate settings if the synchronization is successful.

If the synchronization was not successful, a log displays in the View Log screen. Try re-configuring the Date/Time screen.

To manually set the UAG date and time.

1 Click System > Date/Time.
2 Select Manual under Time and Date Setup.
3 Enter the UAG's time in the New Time field.
4 Enter the UAG's date in the New Date field.
5 Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list.
As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the UAG clock for daylight savings.
7 Click Apply.

To get the UAG date and time from a time server

1 Click System > Date/Time.
2 Select Get from Time Server under Time and Date Setup.
3 Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list.
4 As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the UAG clock for daylight savings.
5 Under Time and Date Setup, enter a Time Server Address (Table 180 on page 359).
6 Click Apply.

40.5 Console Port Speed

This section shows you how to set the console port speed when you connect to the UAG via the console port using a terminal emulation program. See Table 1 on page 20 for default console port settings.

Click Configuration > System > Console Speed to open the Console Speed screen.

Figure 237 Configuration > System > Console Speed

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 181 Configuration > System > Console Speed

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Console Port Speed	Use the drop-down list box to change the speed of the console port. Your UAG supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps (default) for the console port.The Console Port Speed applies to a console port connection using terminal emulation software and NOT the Console in the UAG Web Configurator Status screen.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.6 DNS Overview

DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it.

40.6.1 DNS Server Address Assignment

The UAG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.

• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.
• If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the UAG's WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.
• You can manually enter the IP addresses of other DNS servers.

40.6.2 Configuring the DNS Screen

Click Configuration > System > DNS to change your UAG's DNS settings. Use the DNS screen to configure the UAG to use a DNS server to resolve domain names for UAG system features like DDNS and the time server. You can also configure the UAG to accept or discard DNS queries. Use the Network > Interface screens to configure the DNS server information that the UAG sends to the specified DHCP client devices.

Figure 238 Configuration > System > DNS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 182 Configuration > System > DNS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Address/PTR Record	This record specifies the mapping of a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to an IP address. An FQDN consists of a host and domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com.tw is a fully qualified domain name, where "www" is the host, "zyxel" is the third-level domain, "com" is the second-level domain, and "tw" is the top level domain.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
#	This is the index number of the address/PTR record.
FQDN	This is a host's fully qualified domain name.
IP Address	This is the IP address of a host.
Domain Zone Forwarder	This specifies a DNS server's IP address. The UAG can query the DNS server to resolve domain zones for features like DDNS and the time server.When the UAG needs to resolve a domain zone, it checks it against the domain zone forwarder entries in the order that they appear in this list.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This is the index number of the domain zone forwarder record. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence.A hyphen (-) displays for the default domain zone forwarder record. The default record is not configurable. The UAG uses this default record if the domain zone that needs to be resolved does not match any of the other domain zone forwarder records.
Domain Zone	A domain zone is a fully qualified domain name without the host. For example,zyxel.com.tw is the domain zone for the www.zyxel.com.tw fully qualified domain name.A"*" means all domain zones.
Type	This displays whether the DNS server IP address is assigned by the ISP dynamically through a specified interface or configured manually (User-Defined).
DNS Server	This is the IP address of a DNS server. This field displays N/A if you have the UAG get a DNS server IP address from the ISP dynamically but the specified interface is not active.
Query Via	This is the interface through which the UAG sends DNS queries to the entry's DNS server.
MX Record (for My FQDN)	A MX (Mail eXchange) record identifies a mail server that handles the mail for a particular domain.
Add	Click this to create a new entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
#	This is the index number of the MX record.
Domain Name	This is the domain name where the mail is destined for.
IP/FQDN	This is the IP address or Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a mail server that handles the mail for the domain specified in the field above.
Service Control	This specifies from which computers and zones you can send DNS queries to the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This the index number of the service control rule. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence.The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the UAG's (non-configurable) default policy. The UAG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the UAG will not have to use the default policy.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to send DNS queries.
Action	This displays whether the UAG accepts DNS queries from the computer with the IP address specified above through the specified zone (Accept) or discards them (Deny).

40.6.3 Address Record

An address record contains the mapping of a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to an IP address. An FQDN consists of a host and domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com is a fully qualified domain name, where "www" is the host, "zyxel" is the second-level domain, and "com" is the top level domain. mail.myZyXEL.com.tw is also a FQDN, where "mail" is the host, "myZyXEL" is the third-level domain, "com" is the second-level domain, and "tw" is the top level domain.

The UAG allows you to configure address records about the UAG itself or another device. This way you can keep a record of DNS names and addresses that people on your network may use frequently. If the UAG receives a DNS query for an FQDN for which the UAG has an address record, the UAG can send the IP address in a DNS response without having to query a DNS name server.

40.6.4 PTR Record

A PTR (pointer) record is also called a reverse record or a reverse lookup record. It is a mapping of an IP address to a domain name.

40.6.5 Adding an Address/PTR Record

Click the Add icon in the Address/PTR Record table to add an address/PTR record.

Figure 239 Configuration > System > DNS > Address/PTR Record Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 183 Configuration > System > DNS > Address/PTR Record Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
FQDN	Type a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a server. An FQDN starts with a host name and continues all the way up to the top-level domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com.tw is a fully qualified domain name, where "www" is the host, "zyxel" is the third-level domain, "com" is the second-level domain, and "tw" is the top level domain. Underscores are not allowed. Use "*." as a prefix in the FQDN for a wildcard domain name (for example, *.example.com).
IP Address	Enter the IP address of the host in dotted decimal notation.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving

40.6.6 Domain Zone Forwarder

A domain zone forwarder contains a DNS server's IP address. The UAG can query the DNS server to resolve domain zones for features like DDNS and the time server. A domain zone is a fully qualified domain name without the host. For example, zyxel.com.tw is the domain zone for the www.zyxel.com.tw fully qualified domain name.

40.6.7 Adding a Domain Zone Forwarder

Click the Add icon in the Domain Zone Forwarder table to add a domain zone forwarder record.

Figure 240 Configuration > System > DNS > Domain Zone Forwarder Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 184 Configuration > System > DNS > Domain Zone Forwarder Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Domain Zone	A domain zone is a fully qualified domain name without the host. For example, zyxel.com.tw is the domain zone for the www.zyxel.com.tw fully qualified domain name. For example, whenever the UAG receives needs to resolve a zyxel.com.tw domain name, it can send a query to the recorded name server IP address. Enter * if all domain zones are served by the specified DNS server(s).
DNS Server	Select DNS Server(s) from ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information. You also need to select an interface through which the ISP provides the DNS server IP address(es). The interface should be activated and set to be a DHCP client. The fields below display the (read-only) DNS server IP address(es) that the ISP assigns. N/A displays for any DNS server IP address fields for which the ISP does not assign an IP address. Select Public DNS Server if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. The DNS server could be on the Internet or one of the UAG's local networks. You cannot use 0.0.0.0. Use the Query via field to select the interface through which the UAG sends DNS queries to a DNS server.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving

40.6.8 MX Record

A MX (Mail eXchange) record indicates which host is responsible for the mail for a particular domain, that is, controls where mail is sent for that domain. If you do not configure proper MX records for your domain or other domain, external e-mail from other mail servers will not be able to be delivered to your mail server and vice versa. Each host or domain can have only one MX record, that is, one domain is mapping to one host.

40.6.9 Adding a MX Record

Click the Add icon in the MX Record table to add a MX record.

Figure 241 Configuration > System > DNS > MX Record Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 185 Configuration > System > DNS > MX Record Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Domain Name	Enter the domain name where the mail is destined for.
IP Address/FQDN	Enter the IP address or Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a mail server that handles the mail for the domain specified in the field above.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving

40.6.10 Adding a DNS Service Control Rule

Click the Add icon in the Service Control table to add a service control rule.

Figure 242 Configuration > System > DNS > Service Control Rule Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 186 Configuration > System > DNS > Service Control Rule Add

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Address Object	Select ALL to allow or deny any computer to send DNS queries to the UAG. Select a predefined address object to just allow or deny the computer with the IP address that you specified to send DNS queries to the UAG.
Zone	Select ALL to allow or prevent DNS queries through any zones. Select a predefined zone on which a DNS query to the UAG is allowed or denied.
Action	Select Accept to have the UAG allow the DNS queries from the specified computer. Select Deny to have the UAG reject the DNS queries from the specified computer.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving

40.7 WWW Overview

The following figure shows secure and insecure management of the UAG coming in from the WAN. HTTPS and SSH access are secure. HTTP and Telnet access are not secure.

Note: To allow the UAG to be accessed from a specified computer using a service, make sure you do not have a service control rule or to-Device firewall rule to block that traffic.

• See To-Device Rules on page 233 for more on To-Device firewall rules.

To stop a service from accessing the UAG, clear Enable in the corresponding service screen.

40.7.1 Service Access Limitations

A service cannot be used to access the UAG when:

1 You have disabled that service in the corresponding screen.
2 The allowed IP address (address object) in the Service Control table does not match the client IP address (the UAG disallows the session).
3 The IP address (address object) in the Service Control table is not in the allowed zone or the action is set to Deny.
4 There is a firewall rule that blocks it.

40.7.2 System Timeout

There is a lease timeout for administrators. The UAG automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling.

Each user is also forced to log in the UAG for authentication again when the reauthentication time expires.

You can change the timeout settings in the User/Group screens.

40.7.3 HTTPS

You can set the UAG to use HTTP or HTTPS (HTTPS adds security) for Web Configurator sessions. Specify which zones allow Web Configurator access and from which IP address the access can come.

HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if data has been changed).

It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys (see Chapter 38 on page 335 for more information).

HTTPS on the UAG is used so that you can securely access the UAG using the Web Configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the HTTPS server (the UAG) must always authenticate itself to the HTTPS client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the UAG), whereas the HTTPS client only should authenticate itself when the HTTPS server requires it to do so (select率达 Certificate in the WWW screen). Authenticate Client Certificates is optional and if selected means the HTTPS client must send the UAG a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the UAG.

Please refer to the following figure.

1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the UAG's web server.
2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the UAG's web server.

Figure 243 HTTP/HTTPS Implementation

Note: If you disable HTTP in the WWW screen, then the UAG blocks all HTTP connection attempts.

40.7.4 Configuring WWW Service Control

Click Configuration > System > WWW to open the WWW screen. Use this screen to specify from which zones you can access the UAG using HTTP or HTTPS. You can also specify which IP addresses the access can come from.

Note: Admin Service Control deals with management access (to the Web Configurator). User Service Control deals with user access to the UAG (logging into a web portal to access the Internet for example).

Figure 244 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 187 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
HTTPS
Enable	Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the UAG Web Configurator using secure HTTPS connections.
Server Port	The HTTPS server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the HTTPS server port to a different number on the UAG, for example 8443, then you must notify people who need to access the UAG Web Configurator to use “https://UAG IP Address:8443” as the URL.
Authentication Client Certificates	Select Authentication Client Certificates (optional) to require the SSL client to authenticate itself to the UAG by sending the UAG a certificate. To do that the SSL client must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a trusted CA on the UAG (see Section 40.7.7.5 on page 378 on importing certificates for details).
Server Certificate	Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the UAG) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen.
Redirect HTTP to HTTPS	To allow only secure Web Configurator access, select this to redirect all HTTP connection requests to the HTTPS server.
Admin/User Service Control	Admin Service Control specifies from which zones an administrator can use HTTPS to manage the UAG (using the Web Configurator). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the administrators can manage the UAG.User Service Control specifies from which zones a user can use HTTPS to log into the UAG (to log into a web portal to access the Internet for example). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the users can access the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This is the index number of the service control rule.The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the UAG's (non-configurable) default policy. The UAG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the UAG will not have to use the default policy.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access.
Action	This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the UAG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny).
HTTP
Enable	Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the UAG Web Configurator using HTTP connections.
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service to access the UAG.
Admin/User Service Control	Admin Service Control specifies from which zones an administrator can use HTTP to manage the UAG (using the Web Configurator). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the administrators can manage the UAG.User Service Control specifies from which zones a user can use HTTP to log into the UAG (to log into a web portal to access the Internet for example). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the users can access the UAG.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This is the index number of the service control rule. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the UAG's (non-configurable) default policy. The UAG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the UAG will not have to use the default policy.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access.
Action	This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the UAG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny).
Authentication
Client Authentication Method	Select a method the HTTPS or HTTP server uses to authenticate a client. You must have configured the authentication methods in the Auth. method screen.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.7.5 Service Control Rules

Click Add or Edit in the Service Control table in a WWW, SSH, Telnet, FTP or SNMP screen to add a service control rule.

Figure 245 Configuration > System > Service Control Rule > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 188 Configuration > System > Service Control Rule > Edit

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Create new Object	Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen.
Address Object	Select ALL to allow or deny any computer to communicate with the UAG using this service. Select a predefined address object to just allow or deny the computer with the IP address that you specified to access the UAG using this service.
Zone	Select ALL to allow or prevent any UAG zones from being accessed using this service. Select a predefined UAG zone on which a incoming service is allowed or denied.
Action	Select Accept to allow the user to access the UAG from the specified computers. Select Deny to block the user's access to the UAG from the specified computers.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving

40.7.6 Customizing the WWW Login Page

Click Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page to open the Login Page screen. Use this screen to customize the Web Configurator login screen. You can also customize the page that displays after an access user logs into the Web Configurator to access network services like the Internet. See Chapter 31 on page 285 for more on access user accounts.

Figure 246 Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page

The following figures identify the parts you can customize in the login and access pages.

Figure 247 Login Page Customization

Figure 248 Access Page Customization

You can specify colors in one of the following ways:

• Click Color to display a screen of web-safe colors from which to choose.
• Enter the name of the desired color.

• Enter a pound sign (#) followed by the six-digit hexadecimal number that represents the desired color. For example, use "#000000" for black.

• Enter "rgb" followed by red, green, and blue values in parenthesis and separate by commas. For example, use "rgb(0,0,0)" for black.

Your desired color should display in the preview screen on the right after you click in another field, click Apply, or press [ENTER]. If your desired color does not display, your browser may not support it. Try selecting another color.

The following table describes the labels in the screen.

Table 189 Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Select Type	Select whether the Web Configurator uses the default login screen or one that you customize in the rest of this screen.
Logo File	You can upload a graphic logo to be displayed on the upper left corner of the Web Configurator login screen and access page.Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it.Note: Use a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less.Click Upload to transfer the specified graphic file from your computer to the UAG.
Customized Login Page	Use this section to set how the Web Configurator login screen looks.
Title	Enter the title for the top of the screen.Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters Spaces are allowed.
Title Color	Specify the color of the screen's title text.
Message Color	Specify the color of the screen's text.
Note Message	Enter a note to display at the bottom of the screen.Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters Spaces are allowed.
Background	Set how the screen background looks.To use a graphic, select Picture and upload a graphic. Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it. The picture's size cannot be over 438 x 337 pixels.Note: Use a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less.To use a color, select Color and specify the color.
Customized Access Page	Use this section to customize the page that displays after an access user logs into the Web Configurator to access network services like the Internet.
Title	Enter the title for the top of the screen.Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters Spaces are allowed.
Message Color	Specify the color of the screen's text.
Note Message	Enter a note to display below the title.Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Background	Set how the window's background looks.To use a graphic, select Picture and upload a graphic. Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it. The picture's size cannot be over 438 x 337 pixels.Note: Use a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less.To use a color, select Color and specify the color.

Table 189 Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.7.7 HTTPS Example

If you haven't changed the default HTTPS port on the UAG, then in your browser enter "https://UAG IP Address/" as the web site address where "UAG IP Address" is the IP address or domain name of the UAG you wish to access.

40.7.7.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages

When you attempt to access the UAG HTTPS server, you will see the error message shown in the following screen.

Figure 249 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer)

Select Continue to this website to proceed to the Web Configurator login screen. Otherwise, select Click here to close this webpage to block the access.

40.7.7.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages

When you attempt to access the UAG HTTPS server, a The Connection is Untrusted screen appears as shown in the following screen. Click Technical Details if you want to verify more information about the certificate from the UAG.

Select I Understand the Risks and then click Add Exception to add the UAG to the security exception list. Click Confirm Security Exception.

Figure 250 Security Certificate 1 (Firefox)

This Connection is Untrusted

You have asked Firefox to connect securely to 172.10.26.9, but we can't confirm that your connection is secure.

Normally, when you try to connect securely, sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place. However, this site's identity can't be verified.

What Should I Do?

If you usually connect to this site without problems, this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site, and you shouldn't continue.

Get me out of here!

Technical Details
I Understand the Risks

Figure 251 Security Certificate 2 (Firefox)

40.7.7.3 Avoiding Browser Warning Messages

Here are the main reasons your browser displays warnings about the UAG's HTTPS server certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings:

• The issuing certificate authority of the UAG's HTTPS server certificate is not one of the browser's trusted certificate authorities. The issuing certificate authority of the UAG's factory default certificate is the UAG itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate.
• For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate.
• To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate authority's certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate.

40.7.7.4 Login Screen

After you accept the certificate, the UAG login screen appears. The lock displayed in the bottom of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection.

Figure 252 Login Screen (Internet Explorer)

40.7.7.5 Enrolling and Importing SSL Client Certificates

The SSL client needs a certificate if Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the UAG.

You must have imported at least one trusted CA to the UAG in order for the Authenticate Client Certificates to be active (see the Certificates chapter for details).

Apply for a certificate from a Certification Authority (CA) that is trusted by the UAG (see the UAG's Trusted CA Web Configurator screen).

Figure 253 UAG Trusted CA Screen

The CA sends you a package containing the CA's trusted certificate(s), your personal certificate(s) and a password to install the personal certificate(s).

40.7.7.5.1 Installing the CA's Certificate

1 Double click the CA's trusted certificate to produce a screen similar to the one shown next.

Figure 254 CA Certificate Example

2 Click Install Certificate and follow the wizard as shown earlier in this appendix.

40.7.7.5.2 Installing Your Personal Certificate(s)

You need a password in advance. The CA may issue the password or you may have to specify it during the enrollment. Double-click the personal certificate given to you by the CA to produce a screen similar to the one shown next

1 Click Next to begin the wizard.

Figure 255 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 1

2 The file name and path of the certificate you double-clicked should automatically appear in the File name text box. Click Browse if you wish to import a different certificate.

Figure 256 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 2

3 Enter the password given to you by the CA.

Figure 257 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 3

4 Have the wizard determine where the certificate should be saved on your computer or select Place all certificates in the following store and choose a different location.

Figure 258 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 4

5 Click Finish to complete the wizard and begin the import process.

Figure 259 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 5

6 You should see the following screen when the certificate is correctly installed on your computer.

Figure 260 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 6

40.7.7.6 Using a Certificate When Accessing the UAG Example

Use the following procedure to access the UAG via HTTPS.

1 Enter 'https://UAG IP Address/ in your browser's web address field.

Figure 261 Access the UAG Via HTTPS

2 When Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the UAG, the following screen asks you to select a personal certificate to send to the UAG. This screen displays even if you only have a single certificate as in the example.

Figure 262 SSL Client Authentication

3 You next see the Web Configurator login screen.

Figure 263 Secure Web Configurator Login Screen

40.8 SSH

You can use SSH (Secure SSH) to securely access the UAG's command line interface. Specify which zones allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come.

SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. In the following figure, computer A on the Internet uses SSH to securely connect to the WAN port of the UAG for a management session.

Figure 264 SSH Communication Over the WAN Example

40.8.1 How SSH Works

The following figure is an example of how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts using SSH v1.

Figure 265 How SSH v1 Works Example

1 Host Identification

The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server.

The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.

2 Encryption Method

Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use.

3 Authentication and Data Transmission

After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password) to the server to log in to the server.

40.8.2 SSH Implementation on the UAG

Your UAG supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA authentication and four encryption methods (AES, 3DES, Archfour, and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the UAG for management using port 22 (by default).

40.8.3 Requirements for Using SSH

You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is used to connect to the UAG over SSH.

40.8.4 Configuring SSH

Click Configuration > System > SSH to change your UAG's Secure Shell settings. Use this screen to specify from which zones SSH can be used to manage the UAG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come.

Figure 266 Configuration > System > SSH

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 190 Configuration > System > SSH

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the UAG CLI using this service.
Version 1	Select the check box to have the UAG use both SSH version 1 and version 2 protocols. If you clear the check box, the UAG uses only SSH version 2 protocol.
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Certificate	Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the UAG for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen (See Chapter 38 on page 335 for details).
Service Control	This specifies from which computers you can access which UAG zones.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 188 on page 372 for details on the screen that opens.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This the index number of the service control rule.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access.
Action	This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the UAG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny).
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.8.5 Secure Telnet Using SSH Examples

This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access the UAG. The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program user's guide.

40.8.5.1 Example 1: Microsoft Windows

This section describes how to access the UAG using the Secure Shell Client program.

1 Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number) for the UAG.
2 Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 1.
3 A window displays prompting you to store the host key in you computer. Click Yes to continue.

Figure 267 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key

Figure 269 SSH Example 2: Log in

Enter the password to log in to the UAG. The CLI screen displays next.

40.8.5.2 Example 2: Linux

This section describes how to access the UAG using the OpenSSH client program that comes with most Linux distributions.

1 Test whether the SSH service is available on the UAG.

Enter "telnet 172.16.0.1 22" at a terminal prompt and press [ENTER]. The computer attempts to connect to port 22 on the UAG (using the default IP address of 172.16.0.1).

A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the UAG.

Figure 268 SSH Example 2: Test

$ telnet 172.16.0.1 22
Trying 172.16.0.1...
Connected to 172.16.0.1.
Escape character is '^''
SSH-1.5-1.0.0 

2 Enter "ssh -1 172.16.0.1". This command forces your computer to connect to the UAG using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the UAG using SSH, a message displays prompting you to save the host information of the UAG. Type "yes" and press [ENTER].

Then enter the password to log in to the UAG.

$ ssh -1 172.16.0.1
The authenticity of host '172.16.0.1' (172.16.0.1)' can't be established.
RSA1 key fingerprint is 21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Warning: Permanently added '172.16.0.1' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts.
Administrator@172.16.0.1's password: 

3 The CLI screen displays next.

40.9 Telnet

You can use Telnet to access the UAG's command line interface. Specify which zones allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.

40.9.1 Configuring Telnet

Click Configuration > System > TELNET to configure your UAG for remote Telnet access. Use this screen to specify from which zones Telnet can be used to manage the UAG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come.

Figure 270 Configuration > System > TELNET

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 191 Configuration > System > TELNET

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the UAG CLI using this service.
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Service Control	This specifies from which computers you can access which UAG zones.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 188 on page 372 for details on the screen that opens.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This the index number of the service control rule.The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the UAG's (non-configurable) default policy. The UAG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the UAG will not have to use the default policy.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access.
Action	This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the UAG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny).
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.10 FTP

You can upload and download the UAG's firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. Please see Chapter 42 on page 410 for more information about firmware and configuration files.

40.10.1 Configuring FTP

To change your UAG's FTP settings, click Configuration > System > FTP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to specify from which zones FTP can be used to access the UAG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come.

Figure 271 Configuration > System > FTP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 192 Configuration > System > FTP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the UAG using this service.
TLS required	Select the check box to use FTP over TLS (Transport Layer Security) to encrypt communication. This implements TLS as a security mechanism to secure FTP clients and/or servers.
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Certificate	Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the UAG for FTP connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen (See Chapter 38 on page 335 for details).
Service Control	This specifies from which computers you can access which UAG zones.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 188 on page 372 for details on the screen that opens.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This the index number of the service control rule. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the UAG's (non-configurable) default policy. The UAG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the UAG will not have to use the default policy.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access.
Action	This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the UAG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny).
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.11 SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your UAG supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the UAG through the network. The UAG supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation.

Figure 272 SNMP Management Model

An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.

An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the UAG). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.

The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.

40.11.1 Supported MIBs

The UAG supports MIB II that is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The UAG also supports private MIBs (private.mib and enterprise.mib) to collect information about CPU and memory usage. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance. You can download the UAG's MIBs from www.zyxel.com.

40.11.2 SNMP Traps

The UAG will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs.

Table 193 SNMP Traps

OBJECT LABEL	OBJECT ID	DESCRIPTION
Cold Start	1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1	This trap is sent when the UAG is turned on or an agent restarts.
linkDown	1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3	This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.
linkUp	1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4	This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.
authenticationFailure	1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5	This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-authenticated hosts.

40.11.3 Configuring SNMP

To change your UAG's SNMP settings, click Configuration > System > SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings, including from which zones SNMP can be used to access the UAG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come.

Figure 273 Configuration > System > SNMP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 194 Configuration > System > SNMP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable	Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the UAG using this service.
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Get Community	Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Set Community	Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is private and allows all requests.
Trap
Community	Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests.
Destination	Type the IP address of the SNMP manager to which your SNMP traps are sent.
Trap CAPWAP Event	Select this option to have the UAG send a trap to the SNMP manager when a managed AP is connected to or disconnected from the UAG.
Service Control	This specifies from which computers you can access which UAG zones.
Add	Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 188 on page 372 for details on the screen that opens.
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry's settings.
Remove	To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The UAG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.
Move	To change an entry's position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed.
#	This the index number of the service control rule.The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the UAG's (non-configurable) default policy. The UAG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the UAG will not have to use the default policy.
Zone	This is the zone on the UAG the user is allowed or denied to access.
Address	This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access.
Action	This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the UAG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny).
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

40.12 Language

Click Configuration > System > Language to open this screen. Use this screen to select a display language for the UAG's Web Configurator screens.

Figure 274 Configuration > System > Language

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 195 Configuration > System > Language

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Language Setting	Select a display language for the UAG's Web Configurator screens. You also need to open a new browser session to display the screens in the new language.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Log and Report

41.1 Overview

Use these screens to configure daily reporting and log settings.

41.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter

• Use the Email Daily Report screen (Section 41.2 on page 395) to configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to send.
• Use the Log Settings screens (Section 41.3 on page 397) to specify settings for recording log messages and alerts, e-mailing them, storing them on a connected USB storage device, and sending them to remote syslog servers.

41.2 Email Daily Report

Use the Email Daily Report screen to start or stop data collection and view various statistics about traffic passing through your UAG.

Note: Data collection may decrease the UAG's traffic throughput rate.

Click Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report to display the following screen. Configure this screen to have the UAG e-mail you system statistics every day.

Figure 275 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 196 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Email Daily Report	Select this to send reports by e-mail every day.
Mail Server	Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.
Mail Subject	Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Append system name to add the UAG's system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the UAG's system date and time to the subject.
Mail From	Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in replies.
Mail To	Type the e-mail address (or addresses) to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.
SMTP Authentication	Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server.
UserID	This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Password	This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Retype to Confirm	Retype your new password for confirmation.
Send Report Now	Click this button to have the UAG send the daily e-mail report immediately.
Time For Sending Report	Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.
Report Items	Select the information to include in the report. Select Reset counters after sending report successfully if you only want to see statistics for a 24 hour period.
Reset All Counters	Click this to discard all report data and start all of the counters over at zero.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the UAG.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

41.3 Log Settings Screens

The Log Settings screens control log messages and alerts. A log message stores the information for viewing or regular e-mailing later, and an alert is e-mailed immediately. Usually, alerts are used for events that require more serious attention, such as system errors and attacks.

The UAG provides a system log and supports e-mail profiles and remote syslog servers. View the system log in the MONITOR > Log screen. Use the e-mail profiles to mail log messages to the specific destinations. You can also have the UAG store system logs on a connected USB storage device. The other four logs are stored on specified syslog servers.

The Log Settings screens control what information the UAG saves in each log. You can also specify which log messages to e-mail for the system log, and where and how often to e-mail them. These screens also set for which events to generate alerts and where to email the alerts.

The first Log Settings screen provides a settings summary. Use the Edit screens to configure settings such as log categories, e-mail addresses, and server names for any log. Use the Log

Category Settings screen to edit what information is included in the system log, USB storage, e-mail profiles, and remote servers.

41.3.1 Log Settings Summary

To access this screen, click Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings.

Figure 276 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 197 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Edit	Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify it.
Activate	To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate	To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log.
Status	This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive.
Name	This field displays the type of log setting entry (system log, logs stored on a USB storage device connected to the UAG, or one of the remote servers).
Log Format	This field displays the format of the log. Internal - system log; you can view the log on the View Log tab. VRPT/Syslog - ZyXEL's Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format. CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.
Summary	This field is a summary of the settings for each log. Please see Section 41.3.2 on page 399 for more information.
Log Category Settings	Click this button to open the Log Category Settings screen.
Apply	Click this button to save your changes (activate and deactivate logs) and make them take effect.

41.3.2 Edit System Log Settings

The Log Settings Edit screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the system log (which includes the e-mail profiles). Go to the Log Settings Summary screen (see Section 41.3.1 on page 398), and click the system log Edit icon.

Figure 277 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings > Edit (System Log)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 198 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings > Edit (System Log)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
E-Mail Server 1/2
Active	Select this to send log messages and alerts according to the information in this section. You specify what kinds of log messages are included in log information and what kinds of log messages are included in alerts in the Active Log and Alert section.
Mail Server	Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.
Mail Subject	Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail.
Send From	Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in replies.
Send Log To	Type the e-mail address to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.
Send Alerts To	Type the e-mail address to which alerts are delivered.
Sending Log	Select how often log information is e-mailed. Choices are: When Full, Hourly and When Full, Daily and When Full, and Weekly and When Full.
Day for Sending Log	This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly. Select the day of the week the log is e-mailed.
Time for Sending Log	This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly or daily. Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.
SMTPAuthentication	Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server.
UserID	This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Password	This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Retype to Confirm	Retype your new password for confirmation.
Active Log and Alert
System Log	Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the UAG will e-mail logs to them. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The UAG does not e-mail debugging information, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1	Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 1 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 1. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1.
E-mail Server 2	Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 2 for all log categories.Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings.enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 2.enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category	This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.
System log	Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices: disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category; the UAG does not e-mail debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1	Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The UAG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
E-mail Server 2	Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The UAG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
Log Consolidation
Active	Select this to activate log consolidation. Log consolidation aggregates multiple log messages that arrive within the specified Log Consolidation Interval. In the View Log tab, the text "[count=x]", where x is the number of original log messages, is appended at the end of the Message field, when multiple log messages were aggregated.
Log Consolidation Interval	Type how often, in seconds, to consolidate log information. If the same log message appears multiple times, it is aggregated into one log message with the text "[count=x]", where x is the number of original log messages, appended at the end of the Message field.
OK	Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel	Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

41.3.3 Edit Log on USB Storage Setting

The Edit Log on USB Storage Setting screen controls the detailed settings for saving logs to a connected USB storage device. Go to the Log Setting Summary screen (see Section 41.3.1 on page 398), and click the USB storage Edit icon.

Figure 278 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings > Edit (USB Storage)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 199 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings > Edit (USB Storage)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Duplicate logs to USB storage (if ready)	Select this to have the UAG save a copy of its system logs to a connected USB storage device. Use the Active Log section to specify what kinds of messages to include.
Enable log keep duration	Select this option to have the UAG save a copy of its system logs to a connected USB storage device on a daily basis.
Keep duration	Specify how long the UAG is to keep the copy of system logs in the connected USB storage device before discarding it.
Active Log
Selection	Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
Log Category	This field displays each category of messages. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.
Selection	Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below). Choices are: disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category
OK	Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel	Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

41.3.4 Edit Remote Server Log Settings

The Log Settings Edit screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the remote server (syslog). Go to the Log Settings Summary screen (see Section 41.3.1 on page 398), and click a remote server Edit icon.

Figure 279 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings > Edit (Remote Server)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 200 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (Remote Server)

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Log Settings for Remote Server
Active	Select this check box to send log information according to the information in this section. You specify what kinds of messages are included in log information in the Active Log section.
Log Format	This field displays the format of the log information. VRPT/Syslog - ZyXEL's Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format. CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.
Server Address	Type the server name or the IP address of the syslog server to which to send log information.
Log Facility	Select a log facility. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Please see the documentation for your syslog program for more information.
Active Log
Selection	Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category	This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.
Selection	Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below). Choices are: disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category
OK	Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel	Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

41.3.5 Log Category Settings Screen

This screen allows you to view and to edit what information is included in the system log, USB storage, e-mail profiles, and remote servers at the same time. It does not let you change other log settings (for example, where and how often log information is e-mailed or remote server names). To access this screen, go to the Log Settings Summary screen (see Section 41.3.1 on page 398), and click the Log Category Settings button.

Figure 280 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Log Category Settings

This screen provides a different view and a different way of indicating which messages are included in each log and each alert. Please see Section 41.3.2 on page 399, where this process is discussed. (The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.)

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 201 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Log Category Settings

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
System Log	Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the UAG will e-mail logs to them. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The UAG does not e-mail debugging information, even if this setting is selected.
USB Storage	Use the USB Storage drop-down list to change the log settings for saving logs to a connected USB storage device. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category to a connected USB storage device. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories and save them to a connected USB storage device. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories and save them to a connected USB storage device.
E-mail Server 1	Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 1 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 1. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1.
E-mail Server 2	Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 2 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 2. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2.
Remote Server 1~4	For each remote server, use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category	This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.
System Log	Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices: disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category; the UAG does not e-mail debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected.
USB Storage	Select which event log categories to save to a connected USB storage device. There are three choices: disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - save log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - save log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category.
E-mail Server 1 E-mail	Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The UAG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
E-mail Server 2 E-mail	Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The UAG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
Remote Server 1~4 Syslog	For each remote server, select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below). Choices are: disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category
OK	Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel	Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

42.1 Overview

Configuration files define the UAG's settings. Shell scripts are files of commands that you can store on the UAG and run when you need them. You can apply a configuration file or run a shell script without the UAG restarting. You can store multiple configuration files and shell script files on the UAG. You can edit configuration files or shell scripts in a text editor and upload them to the UAG. Configuration files use a .conf extension and shell scripts use a .zysh extension.

42.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Configuration File screen (see Section 42.2 on page 412) to store and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the UAG to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the UAG.
• Use the Firmware Package screen (see Section 42.3 on page 416) to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the UAG.
• Use the Shell Script screen (see Section 42.4 on page 418) to store, name, download, upload and run shell script files.

42.1.2 What you Need to Know

Configuration Files and Shell Scripts

When you apply a configuration file, the UAG uses the factory default settings for any features that the configuration file does not include. When you run a shell script, the UAG only applies the commands that it contains. Other settings do not change.

These files have the same syntax, which is also identical to the way you run CLI commands manually. An example is shown below.

Figure 281 Configuration File / Shell Script: Example

<h1 id="enter-configuration-mode">enter configuration mode</h1>
configure terminal
<h1 id="change-administrator-password">change administrator password</h1>
username admin password 4321 user-type admin
<h1 id="configure-wan1">configure wan1</h1>
interface wan1
ip address 10.16.17.240 255.255.255.0
ip gateway 10.16.17.254 metric 1
exit
<h1 id="create-address-objects-for-remote-management-to-device-firewall-rules">create address objects for remote management / to-Device firewall rules</h1>
<h1 id="use-the-address-group-in-case-we-want-to-open-up-remote-management-later">use the address group in case we want to open up remote management later</h1>
address-object TW_SUBNET 10.16.37.0/24
object-group address TW TEAM
address-object TW_SUBNET
exit
<h1 id="enable-telnet-access-not-enabled-by-default-unlike-other-services">enable Telnet access (not enabled by default, unlike other services)</h1>
ip telnet server
<h1 id="open-wan-to-device-firewall-for-twteam-for-remote-management">open WAN-to-Device firewall for TWTEAM for remote management</h1>
firewall WAN Device insert 4
sourceip TWTEAM
service TELNET
action allow
exit
write 

While configuration files and shell scripts have the same syntax, the UAG applies configuration files differently than it runs shell scripts. This is explained below.

Table 202 Configuration Files and Shell Scripts in the UAG

Configuration Files (.conf) Shell Scripts (.zysh)   
Resets to default configuration. Goes into CLI Configuration mode.. Runs the commands in the configuration file. Goes into CLI Privilege mode.. Runs the commands in the shell script. 

You have to run the example in Figure 281 on page 411 as a shell script because the first command is run in Privilege mode. If you remove the first command, you have to run the example as a configuration file because the rest of the commands are executed in Configuration mode.

Comments in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts

In a configuration file or shell script, use "#" or "#!" as the first character of a command line to have the UAG treat the line as a comment.

Your configuration files or shell scripts can use "exit" or a command line consisting of a single "!" to have the UAG exit sub command mode.

Note: "exit" or "!" must follow sub commands if it is to make the UAG exit sub command mode.

Line 3 in the following example exits sub command mode.

interface lan1  
ip address dhcp  
! 

Lines 1 and 3 in the following example are comments and line 4 exits sub command mode.

!   
interface lan1   
<h1 id="this-interface-is-a-dhcp-client">this interface is a DHCP client</h1>
! 

Lines 1 and 2 are comments. Line 5 exits sub command mode.

! this is from Joe
<h1 id="on-20080405">on 2008/04/05</h1>
interface lan1
ip address dhcp
! 

Errors in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts

When you apply a configuration file or run a shell script, the UAG processes the file line-by-line. The UAG checks the first line and applies the line if no errors are detected. Then it continues with the next line. If the UAG finds an error, it stops applying the configuration file or shell script and generates a log.

You can change the way a configuration file or shell script is applied. Include setenv stop-on-error off in the configuration file or shell script. The UAG ignores any errors in the configuration file or shell script and applies all of the valid commands. The UAG still generates a log for any errors.

42.2 The Configuration File Screen

Click Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File to open the Configuration File screen. Use the Configuration File screen to store, run, and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the UAG to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the UAG.

Once your UAG is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making further configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.

Configuration File Flow at Restart

• If there is not a startup-config.conf when you restart the UAG (whether through a management interface or by physically turning the power off and back on), the UAG uses the system-default.conf configuration file with the UAG's default settings.
• If there is a startup-config.conf, the UAG checks it for errors and applies it. If there are no errors, the UAG uses it and copies it to the lastgood.conf configuration file as a back up file. If there is an error, the UAG generates a log and copies the startup-config.conf configuration file to the startup-config-bad.conf configuration file and tries the existing lastgood.conf configuration file. If there isn't a lastgood.conf configuration file or it also has an error, the UAG applies the system-default.conf configuration file.
• You can change the way the startup-config.conf file is applied. Include the setenv-startup stop-on-error off command. The UAG ignores any errors in the startup-config.conf file and applies all of the valid commands. The UAG still generates a log for any errors.

Figure 282 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File

Do not turn off the UAG while configuration file upload is in progress.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 203 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Rename	Use this button to change the label of a configuration file on the UAG. You can only rename manually saved configuration files. You cannot rename the lastgood.conf, system-default.conf and startup-config.conf files. You cannot rename a configuration file to the name of another configuration file in the UAG. Click a configuration file's row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen. Figure 283 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File > Rename
	Specify the new name for the configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-9;~!@#$%^&( _+[])',=‐). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file.
Remove	Click a configuration file's row to select it and click Remove to delete it from the UAG. You can only delete manually saved configuration files. You cannot delete the system-default.conf, startup-config.conf and lastgood.conf files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the configuration file. Click OK to delete the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the configuration file.
Download	Click a configuration file's row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer.
Copy	Use this button to save a duplicate of a configuration file on the UAG. Click a configuration file's row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen. Figure 284 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File > Copy
	Copy File ? X Source file : htm-default.conf Target file : OK Cancel
	Specify a name for the duplicate configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-9;~!@#$%^&( _+[])',=‐). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file.
Apply	Use this button to have the UAG use a specific configuration file. Click a configuration file's row to select it and click Apply to have the UAG use that configuration file. The UAG does not have to restart in order to use a different configuration file, although you will need to wait for a few minutes while the system reconfigures. The following screen gives you options for what the UAG is to do if it encounters an error in the configuration file. Figure 285 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File > Apply
	Apply Configuration File ? X Apply Configuration File File Name: system-default.conf If applying the configuration file encounters an error: ◎ Immediately stop applying the configuration file ◎ Immediately stop applying the configuration file and roll back to the previous configuration ◎ Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file ◎ Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file and then roll back to the previous configuration
	OK Cancel
	Immediately stop applying the configuration file - this is not recommended because it would leave the rest of the configuration blank. If the interfaces were not configured before the first error, the console port may be the only way to access the device. Immediately stop applying the configuration file and roll back to the previous configuration - this gets the UAG started with a fully valid configuration file as quickly as possible. Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file and generates error logs for all of the configuration file's errors. This lets the UAG apply most of your configuration and you can refer to the logs for what to fix. Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file and then roll back to the previous configuration - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file, generates error logs for all of the configuration file's errors, and starts the UAG with a fully valid configuration file. Click OK to have the UAG start applying the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen
#	This column displays the number for each configuration file entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. The total number of configuration files that you can save depends on the sizes of the configuration files and the available flash storage space.
File Name	This column displays the label that identifies a configuration file.You cannot delete the following configuration files or change their file names.The system-default.conf file contains the UAG's default settings. Select this file and click Apply to reset all of the UAG settings to the factory defaults. This configuration file is included when you upload a firmware package.The startup-config.conf file is the configuration file that the UAG is currently using. If you make and save changes during your management session, the changes are applied to this configuration file. The UAG applies configuration changes made in the Web Configurator to the configuration file when you click Apply or OK. It applies configuration changes made via commands when you use the write command.The lastgood.conf is the most recently used (valid) configuration file that was saved when the device last restarted. If you upload and apply a configuration file with an error, you can apply lastgood.conf to return to a valid configuration.
Size	This column displays the size (in KB) of a configuration file.
Last Modified	This column displays the date and time that the individual configuration files were last changed or saved.
Upload Configuration File	The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your UAGYou cannot upload a configuration file named system-default.conf or lastgood.conf.If you upload startup-config.conf, it will replace the current configuration and immediately apply the new settings.
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse...	Click Browse... to find the .conf file you want to upload. The configuration file must use a“.conf” filename extension. You will receive an error message if you try to upload a file of a different format. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload	Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

42.3 The Firmware Package Screen

Click Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package to open the Firmware Package screen. Use the Firmware Package screen to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the UAG.

Note: The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it.

Find the firmware package at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a .bin extension, for example, "UAG.bin".

The firmware update can take up to five minutes. Do not turn off or reset the UAG while the firmware update is in progress!

Figure 286 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 204 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Boot Module	This is the version of the boot module that is currently on the UAG.
Current Version	This is the firmware version and the date created.
Released Date	This is the date that the version of the firmware was created.
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse...	Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload	Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the UAG again.

Figure 287 Firmware Upload In Process

Note: The UAG automatically reboots after a successful upload.

The UAG automatically restarts causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

Figure 288 Network Temporarily Disconnected

After five minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Dashboard screen.

If the upload was not successful, the following message appears in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

Figure 289 Firmware Upload Error

42.4 The Shell Script Screen

Use shell script files to have the UAG use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to create the shell script files. They must use a ".zysh" filename extension.

Click Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script to open the Shell Script screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store, name, download, upload and run shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the UAG at the same time.

Note: You should include write commands in your scripts. If you do not use the write command, the changes will be lost when the UAG restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script.

Figure 290 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 205 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Rename	Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the UAG.You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the UAG.Click a shell script's row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen.Figure 291 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script > Rename
	Rename ?X Source file: wiz-VPN-2.zysh Target file: OK Cancel
	Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-9;~!@#%^&()_+[]',=-).Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file.
Remove	Click a shell script file's row to select it and click Remove to delete the shell script file from the UAG.A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file.
Download	Click a shell script file's row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer.
Copy	Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the UAG.Click a shell script file's row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.Figure 292 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script > Copy
	Copy File Source file: wiz-VPN-2.zysh Target file: OK Cancel
	Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-9;~!@#%^&()_+[]{}',=-).Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file.
Apply	Use this button to have the UAG use a specific shell script file.Click a shell script file's row to select it and click Apply to have the UAG use that shell script file.You may need to wait awhile for the UAG to finish applying the commands.
#	This column displays the number for each shell script file entry.
File Name	This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file.
Size	This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file.
Last Modified	This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or saved.
Upload Shell Script	The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from your computer to your UAG.
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse...	Click Browse... to find the .zysh file you want to upload.
Upload	Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes.

43.1 Overview

Use the diagnostics screens for troubleshooting.

43.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Diagnostics screen (see Section 43.2 on page 421) to generate a file containing the UAG's configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during troubleshooting.
• Use the Packet Capture screens (see Section 43.3 on page 423) to capture packets going through the UAG.
• Use the Core Dump screens (see Section 43.4 on page 426) to have the UAG save a process's core dump to an attached USB storage device if the process terminates abnormally (crashes) so you can send the file to customer support for troubleshooting.
• Use the System Log screens (see Section 43.5 on page 427) to download files of system logs from a connected USB storage device to your computer.

43.2 The Diagnostics Screen

The Diagnostic screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the UAG's configuration and diagnostic information. You may need to send this file to customer support for troubleshooting.

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostic screen.

Figure 293 Maintenance > Diagnostics

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 206 Maintenance > Diagnostics

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Filename	This is the name of the most recently created diagnostic file.
Last modified	This is the date and time that the last diagnostic file was created. The format is yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss.
Size	This is the size of the most recently created diagnostic file.
Copy the diagnostic file to USB storage (if ready)	Select this to have the UAG create an extra copy of the diagnostic file to a connected USB storage device.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes.
Collect Now	Click this to have the UAG create a new diagnostic file.
Download	Click this to save the most recent diagnostic file to a computer.

43.2.1 The Diagnostics Files Screen

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Files to open the diagnostic files screen. This screen lists the files of diagnostic information the UAG has collected and stored in a connected USB storage device. You may need to send these files to customer support for troubleshooting.

Figure 294 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Files

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 207 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Files

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Remove	Select files and click Remove to delete them from the UAG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete.
Download	Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer.
#	This column displays the number for each file entry. The total number of files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available storage space.
File Name	This column displays the label that identifies the file.
Size	This column displays the size (in bytes) of a file.
Last Modified	This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved.

43.3 The Packet Capture Screen

Use this screen to capture network traffic going through the UAG's interfaces. Studying these packet captures may help you identify network problems. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture to open the packet capture screen.

Note: New capture files overwrite existing files of the same name. Change the File Suffix field's setting to avoid this.

Figure 295 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 208 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Interfaces	Enabled interfaces (except for virtual interfaces) appear under Available Interfaces. Select interfaces for which to capture packets and click the right arrow button to move them to the Capture Interfaces list. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple objects.
IP Version	Select the version of the Internet Protocol (IP) by which traffic is routed across the networks and Internet. Select any to capture packets for traffic sent by either IP version.
Protocol Type	Select the protocol type of traffic for which to capture packets. Select any to capture packets for all types of traffic.
Host IP	Select a host IP address object for which to capture packets. Select any to capture packets for all hosts. Select User Defined to be able to enter an IP address.
Host Port	This field is configurable when you set the Protocol Type to any, tcp, or udp. Specify the port number of traffic to capture.
Continuously capture and overwrite old ones	Select this to have the UAG keep capturing traffic and overwriting old packet capture entries when the available storage space runs out.
Save data to onboard storage only	Select this to have the UAG only store packet capture entries on the UAG. The available storage size is displayed as well.
	Note: The UAGL reserves some onboard storage space as a buffer.
Save data to USB storage	Select this to have the UAG store packet capture entries only on a USB storage device connected to the UAG.
	Status:
	Unused - the connected USB storage device was manually unmounted by using the Remove Now button or for some reason the UAG cannot mount it.
	none - no USB storage device is connected.
	available - you can have the UAG use the USB storage device. The available storage capacity also displays.
	service deactivated - the USB storage feature is disabled and the UAG cannot use a connected USB device to store the system log and other diagnostic information.
	Note: The UAG reserves some USB storage space as a buffer.
Captured Packet Files	When saving packet captures only to the UAG's onboard storage, specify a maximum limit in megabytes for the total combined size of all the capture files on the UAG.
	When saving packet captures to a connected USB storage device, specify a maximum limit in megabytes for each capture file.
	Note: If you have existing capture files and have not selected the Continuously capture and overwrite old ones option, you may need to set this size larger or delete existing capture files.
	The valid range depends on the available onboard/USB storage size. The UAG stops the capture and generates the capture file when either the file reaches this size or the time period specified in the Duration field expires.
Split threshold	Specify a maximum size limit in megabytes for individual packet capture files. After a packet capture file reaches this size, the UAG starts another packet capture file.
Duration	Set a time limit in seconds for the capture. The UAG stops the capture and generates the capture file when either this period of time has passed or the file reaches the size specified in the File Size field. 0 means there is no time limit.
File Suffix	Specify text to add to the end of the file name (before the dot and filename extension) to help you identify the packet capture files. Modifying the file suffix also avoids making new capture files that overwrite existing files of the same name.The file name format is "interface name-file suffix.cap", for example "vlan2-packet- capture.cap".
Number Of Bytes To Capture (Per Packet)	Specify the maximum number of bytes to capture per packet. The UAG automatically truncates packets that exceed this size. As a result, when you view the packet capture files in a packet analyzer, the actual size of the packets may be larger than the size of captured packets.
Capture	Click this button to have the UAG capture packets according to the settings configured in this screen.You can configure the UAG while a packet capture is in progress although you cannot modify the packet capture settings.The UAG's throughput or performance may be affected while a packet capture is in progress.After the UAG finishes the capture it saves a separate capture file for each selected interface. The total number of packet capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space. Once the flash storage space is full, adding more packet captures will fail.
Stop	Click this button to stop a currently running packet capture and generate a separate capture file for each selected interface.
Reset	Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

43.3.1 The Packet Capture Files Screen

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture > Files to open the packet capture files screen. This screen lists the files of packet captures stored on the UAG or a connected USB storage device. You can download the files to your computer where you can study them using a packet analyzer (also known as a network or protocol analyzer) such as Wireshark.

Figure 296 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture > Files

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 209 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture > Files

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Remove	Select files and click Remove to delete them from the UAG or the connected USB storage device. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete.
Download	Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer.
#	This column displays the number for each packet capture file entry. The total number of packet capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space.
File Name	This column displays the label that identifies the file. The file name format is interface name-file suffix.cap.
Size	This column displays the size (in bytes) of a configuration file.
Last Modified	This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved.

43.4 Core Dump Screen

Use the Core Dump screen to have the UAG save a process's core dump to an attached USB storage device if the process terminates abnormally (crashes). You may need to send this file to customer support for troubleshooting.

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump to open the following screen.

Figure 297 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 210 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Save core dump to USB storage (if ready)	Select this to have the UAG save a process's core dump to an attached USB storage device if the process terminates abnormally (crashes). If you clear this option the UAG only saves
Apply	Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset	Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

43.4.1 Core Dump Files Screen

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files to open the core dump files screen. This screen lists the core dump files stored on the UAG or a connected USB storage device. You may need to send these files to customer support for troubleshooting.

Figure 298 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 211 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Remove	Select files and click Remove to delete them from the UAG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete.
Download	Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer.
#	This column displays the number for each packet capture file entry. The total number of packet capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space.
File Name	This column displays the label that identifies the file.
Size	This column displays the size (in bytes) of a file.
Last Modified	This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved.

43.5 The System Log Screen

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Log to open the system log files screen. This screen lists the files of system logs stored on a connected USB storage device. The files are in comma

separated value (csv) format. You can download them to your computer and open them in a tool like Microsoft's Excel.

Figure 299 Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 212 Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Log

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Remove	Select files and click Remove to delete them from the UAG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete.
Download	Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer.
#	This column displays the number for each file entry. The total number of files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available storage space.
File Name	This column displays the label that identifies the file.
Size	This column displays the size (in bytes) of a file.
Last Modified	This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved.

Packet Flow Explore

44.1 Overview

Use this to get a clear picture on how the UAG determines where to forward a packet and how to change the source IP address of the packet according to your current settings. This function provides you a summary of all your routing and SNAT settings and helps troubleshoot any related problems.

44.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Routing Status screen (see Section 44.2 on page 429) to view the overall routing flow and each routing function's settings.
• Use the SNAT Status screen (see Section 44.3 on page 433) to view the overall source IP address conversion (SNAT) flow and each SNAT function's settings.

44.2 The Routing Status Screen

The Routing Status screen allows you to view the current routing flow and quickly link to specific routing settings. Click a function box in the Routing Flow section, the related routes (activated) will display in the Routing Table section. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore.

The order of the routing flow may vary depending on whether you:

• select use policy route to override direct route in the CONFIGURATION > Network > Routing > Policy Route screen.
• use policy routes to control 1-1 NAT by using the policy control-virtual-server-rules activate command.

Note: Once a packet matches the criteria of a routing rule, the UAG takes the corresponding action and does not perform any further flow checking.

Figure 300 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Direct Route)

Figure 301 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Policy Route)

Figure 302 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (VPN 1-1 Mapping Route)

Figure 303 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (1-1 SNAT)
Figure 304 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Default WAN Trunk)

Figure 305 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Main Route)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 213 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Routing Flow	This section shows you the flow of how the UAG determines where to route a packet. Click a function box to display the related settings in the Routing Table section.
Routing Table	This section shows the corresponding settings according to the function box you click in the Routing Flow section.
The following fields are available if you click Direct Route or Main Route in the Routing Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Destination	This is the destination IP address of a route.
Gateway	This is the IP address of the next-hop gateway or the interface through which the traffic is routed.
Interface	This is the name of an interface associated with the route.
Metric	This is the route's priority among the displayed routes.
Flags	This indicates additional information for the route. The possible flags are: • A - this route is currently activated. • S - this is a static route. • C - this is a direct connected route. • G - the route is to a gateway (router) in the same network. • I - this is a route which forces a route lookup to fail. • B - this is a route which discards packets. • L - this is a recursive route.
Persist	This is the remaining time of a dynamically learned route. The UAG removes the route after this time period is counted down to zero.
The following fields are available if you click Policy Route in the Routing Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
PR #	This is the number of an activated policy route. If you have configured a schedule for the route, this screen only displays the route at the scheduled time.
Incoming	This is the interface on which the packets are received.
Source	This is the source IP address(es) from which the packets are sent.
Destination	This is the destination IP address(es) to which the packets are transmitted.
Service	This is the name of the service object. any means all services.
Source Port	This is the name of a service object. The UAG applies the policy route to the packets sent from the corresponding service port. any means all service ports.
DSCP Code	This is the DSCP value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies. See Section 12.2 on page 156 for more information.
Next Hop Type	This is the type of the next hop to which packets are directed.
Next Hop Info	This is the main route if the next hop type is Auto. This is the interface name and gateway IP address if the next hop type is Interface / GW. This is the trunk name if the next hop type is Trunk.
The following fields are available if you click VPN 1-1 Mapping Route in the Routing Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Source	This is the original source IP address(es). any means any IP address.
Destination	This is the original destination IP address(es). any means any IP address.
Outgoing	This is the name of an interface which transmits packets out of the UAG.
Gateway	This is the IP address of the gateway in the same network of the outgoing interface.
The following fields are available if you click 1-1 SNAT in the Routing Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
NAT Rule	This is the name of an activated 1:1 or Many 1:1 NAT rule in the NAT table.
Source	This is the original source IP address(es). any means any IP address.
Destination	This is the original destination IP address(es). any means any IP address.
Outgoing	This is the name of an interface which transmits packets out of the UAG.
Gateway	This is the IP address of the gateway in the same network of the outgoing interface.
The following fields are available if you click Default WAN Trunk in the Routing Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Source	This is the source IP address(es) from which the packets are sent. any means any IP address.
Destination	This is the destination IP address(es) to which the packets are transmitted. any means any IP address.
Trunk	This is the name of the WAN trunk through which the matched packets are transmitted.

44.3 The SNAT Status Screen

The SNAT Status screen allows you to view and quickly link to specific source NAT (SNAT) settings. Click a function box in the SNAT Flow section, the related SNAT rules (activated) will display in the SNAT Table section. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status.

The order of the SNAT flow may vary depending on whether you:

• select use default SNAT in the Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk screen.
• use policy routes to control 1-1 NAT by using the policy control-virtual-server-rules activate command.

Note: Once a packet matches the criteria of an SNAT rule, the UAG takes the corresponding action and does not perform any further flow checking.

Figure 306 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (Policy Route SNAT)

Figure 307 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (VPN 1-1 Mapping Route)

Figure 308 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (1-1 SNAT)

Figure 309 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (Loopback SNAT)

Figure 310 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (Default SNAT)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 214 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
SNAT Flow	This section shows you the flow of how the UAG changes the source IP address for a packet according to the rules you have configured in the UAG. Click a function box to display the related settings in the SNAT Table section.
SNAT Table	The table fields in this section vary depending on the function box you select in the SNAT Flow section.
The following fields are available if you click Policy Route SNAT in the SNAT Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
PR #	This is the number of an activated policy route which uses SNAT.
Outgoing	This is the outgoing interface that the route uses to transmit packets.
SNAT	This is the source IP address(es) that the SNAT rule uses finally.
The following fields are available if you click VPN 1-1 Mapping SNAT in the SNAT Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Source	This is the original source IP address(es).
Destination	This is the original destination IP address(es).
Outgoing	This is the outgoing interface that the SNAT rule uses to transmit packets.
SNAT	This is the source IP address(es) that the SNAT rule uses finally.
The following fields are available if you click 1-1 SNAT in the SNAT Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
NAT Rule	This is the name of an activated NAT rule which uses SNAT.
Source	This is the original source IP address(es).
Destination	This is the original destination IP address(es).
Outgoing	This is the outgoing interface that the SNAT rule uses to transmit packets.
SNAT	This is the source IP address(es) that the SNAT rule uses finally.
The following fields are available if you click Loopback SNAT in the SNAT Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
NAT Rule	This is the name of an activated NAT rule which uses SNAT and enables NAT loopback.
Source	This is the original source IP address(es). any means any IP address.
Destination	This is the original destination IP address(es). any means any IP address.
SNAT	This indicates which source IP address the SNAT rule uses finally. For example, Outgoing Interface IP means that the UAG uses the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address for the matched packets it sends out through this rule.
The following fields are available if you click Default SNAT in the SNAT Flow section.
#	This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Incoming	This indicates internal interface(s) on which the packets are received.
Outgoing	This indicates external interface(s) from which the packets are transmitted.
SNAT	This indicates which source IP address the SNAT rule uses finally. For example, Outgoing Interface IP means that the UAG uses the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address for the matched packets it sends out through this rule.

45.1 Overview

Use this to restart the device (for example, if the device begins behaving erratically). See also Section 1.5 on page 31 for information on different ways to start and stop the UAG.

45.1.1 What You Need To Know

If you applied changes in the Web configurator, these were saved automatically and do not change when you reboot. If you made changes in the CLI, however, you have to use the write command to save the configuration before you reboot. Otherwise, the changes are lost when you reboot.

Reboot is different to reset; (see Section 47.1 on page 445) reset returns the device to its default configuration.

45.2 The Reboot Screen

The Reboot screen allows remote users to restart the device. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Reboot.

Figure 311 Maintenance >Reboot

Click the Reboot button to restart the UAG. Wait a few minutes until the login screen appears. If the login screen does not appear, type the IP address of the device in your Web browser.

You can also use the CLI command reboot to restart the UAG.

46.1 Overview

Use this to shutdown the device in preparation for disconnecting the power. See also Section 1.5 on page 31 for information on different ways to start and stop the UAG.

Always use the Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown screen or the "shutdown" command before you turn off the UAG or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.

46.1.1 What You Need To Know

Shutdown writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes.

46.2 The Shutdown Screen

To access this screen, click Maintenance > Shutdown.

Figure 312 Maintenance > Shutdown

Click the Shutdown button to shut down the UAG. Wait for the device to shut down before you manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power.

You can also use the CLI command shutdown to shutdown the UAG.

Troubleshooting

This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter.

• You can also refer to the logs (see Chapter 7 on page 92).
• For the order in which the UAG applies its features and checks, see Chapter 44 on page 429.

None of the LEDs turn on.

Make sure that you have the power cord connected to the UAG and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure you have the UAG turned on. Check all cable connections.

If the LEDs still do not turn on, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your local vendor.

Cannot access the UAG from the LAN.

• Check the cable connection between the UAG and your computer or switch.
• Ping the UAG from a LAN computer. Make sure your computer's Ethernet card is installed and functioning properly. Also make sure that its IP address is in the same subnet as the UAG's.
• In the computer, click Start, (All) Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ping" followed by the UAG's LAN IP address (172.16.0.1 or 172.17.0.1 is the default) and then press [ENTER]. The UAG should reply.
• If you've forgotten the UAG's password, use the RESET button. Press the button in for about 5 seconds (or until the PWR LED starts to blink), then release it. It returns the UAG to the factory defaults (password is 1234, LAN IP address 172.16.0.1 or 172.17.0.1 etc.; see your User's Guide for details).
• If you've forgotten the UAG's IP address, you can use the commands through the console port to check it. Connect your computer to the CONSOLE port using a console cable. Your computer should have a terminal emulation communications program (such as HyperTerminal) set to VT100 terminal emulation, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no flow control and 115200 bps port speed.

I cannot access the Internet.

• Check the UAG's connection to the Ethernet jack with Internet access. Make sure the Internet gateway device (such as a DSL modem) is working properly.

• Check the WAN interface's status in the Dashboard. Use the installation setup wizard again and make sure that you enter the correct settings. Use the same case as provided by your ISP.

I configured security settings but the UAG is not applying them for certain interfaces.

Many security settings are usually applied to zones. Make sure you assign the interfaces to the appropriate zones. When you create an interface, there is no security applied on it until you assign it to a zone.

The UAG is not applying the custom policy route I configured.

The UAG checks the policy routes in the order that they are listed. So make sure that your custom policy route comes before any other routes that the traffic would also match.

The UAG is not applying the custom firewall rule I configured.

The UAG checks the firewall rules in the order that they are listed. So make sure that your custom firewall rule comes before any other rules that the traffic would also match.

I cannot enter the interface name I want.

• The format of interface names other than the Ethernet interface names is very strict. Each name consists of 2-4 letters (interface type), followed by a number (x, limited by the maximum number of each type of interface). For example, VLAN interfaces are vlan0, vlan1, vlan2, ...; and so on.
• The names of virtual interfaces are derived from the interfaces on which they are created. For example, virtual interfaces created on Ethernet interface wan1 are called wan1:1, wan1:2, and so on. Virtual interfaces created on VLAN interface vlan2 are called vlan2:1, vlan2:2, and so on. You cannot specify the number after the colon(:) in the Web Configurator; it is a sequential number. You can specify the number after the colon if you use the CLI to set up a virtual interface.

I cannot set up a PPP interface, virtual Ethernet interface or virtual VLAN interface on an Ethernet interface.

You cannot set up a PPP interface, virtual Ethernet interface or virtual VLAN interface if the underlying interface is a member of a bridge. You also cannot add an Ethernet interface or VLAN interface to a bridge if the member interface has a virtual interface or PPP interface on top of it.

My rules and settings that apply to a particular interface no longer work.

The interface's IP address may have changed. To avoid this create an IP address object based on the interface. This way the UAG automatically updates every rule or setting that uses the object whenever the interface's IP address settings change. For example, if you change LAN1's IP address, the UAG automatically updates the corresponding interface-based, LAN1 subnet address object.

I cannot set up a PPP interface.

You have to set up an ISP account before you create a PPPoE or PPTP interface.

I cannot configure a particular VLAN interface on top of an Ethernet interface even though I have it configured it on top of another Ethernet interface.

Each VLAN interface is created on top of only one Ethernet interface.

The UAG is not applying an interface's configured ingress bandwidth limit.

At the time of writing, the UAG does not support ingress bandwidth management.

The UAG routes and applies SNAT for traffic from some interfaces but not from others.

The UAG automatically uses SNAT for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces. For example LAN to WAN traffic. You must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for an interface with the Interface Type set to General. You can also configure a policy route to override the default routing and SNAT behavior for an interface with the Interface Type set to Internal or External.

I cannot get Dynamic DNS to work.

• You must have a public WAN IP address to use Dynamic DNS.
• Make sure you recorded your DDNS account's user name, password, and domain name and have entered them properly in the UAG.

• You may need to configure the DDNS entry's IP Address setting to Auto if the interface has a dynamic IP address or there are one or more NAT routers between the UAG and the DDNS server.

• The UAG may not determine the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the UAG and the DDNS server.

I cannot create a second HTTP redirect rule for an incoming interface.

You can configure up to one HTTP redirect rule for each (incoming) interface.

The UAG keeps resetting the connection.

If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the UAG's LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the UAG. This is called an asymmetrical or "triangle" route. This causes the UAG to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.

You can set the UAG's firewall to permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (so it does not reset the connection) although this is not recommended since allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the UAG. A better solution is to use virtual interfaces to put the UAG and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See Asymmetrical Routes on page 234 and the chapter about interfaces for more information.

I changed the LAN IP address and can no longer access the Internet.

The UAG automatically updates address objects based on an interface's IP address, subnet, or gateway if the interface's IP address settings change. However, you need to manually edit any address objects for your LAN that are not based on the interface.

I cannot get the RADIUS server to authenticate the UAG's default admin account.

The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the authentication method setting. (See Chapter 36 on page 328 for more information about authentication methods.)

The UAG fails to authentication the ext-user user accounts I configured.

An external server such as RADIUS must authenticate the ext-user accounts. If the UAG tries to use the local database to authenticate an ext-user, the authentication attempt will always fail. (This is related to AAA servers and authentication methods, which are discussed in Chapter 36 on page 328 and Chapter 37 on page 332, respectively.)

I cannot add the admin users to a user group with access users.

You cannot put access users and admin users in the same user group.

I cannot add the default admin account to a user group.

You cannot put the default admin account into any user group.

The schedule I configured is not being applied at the configured times.

Make sure the UAG's current date and time are correct.

I cannot get a certificate to import into the UAG.

1 For My Certificates, you can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the UAG. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the certificate's public and private keys.
2 You must remove any spaces from the certificate's filename before you can import the certificate.
3 Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not included. The UAG currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates. The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file's password is not connected to your certificate's public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the UAG.

Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default.

I cannot access the UAG from a computer connected to the Internet.

Check the service control rules and to-UAG firewall rules.

I uploaded a logo to display on the upper left corner of the Web Configurator login screen and access page but it does not display properly.

Make sure the logo file is a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less.

I uploaded a logo to use as the screen or window background but it does not display properly.

Make sure the logo file is a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less.

The UAG's traffic throughput rate decreased after I started collecting traffic statistics.

Data collection may decrease the UAG's traffic throughput rate.

I can only see newer logs. Older logs are missing.

When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first.

The commands in my configuration file or shell script are not working properly.

• In a configuration file or shell script, use "#" or "#!" as the first character of a command line to have the UAG treat the line as a comment.
• Your configuration files or shell scripts can use "exit" or a command line consisting of a single "+" to have the UAG exit sub command mode.
• Include write commands in your scripts. Otherwise the changes will be lost when the UAG restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script.

Note: "exit" or "+" must follow sub commands if it is to make the UAG exit sub command mode.

See Chapter 42 on page 410 for more on configuration files and shell scripts.

I cannot get the firmware uploaded using the commands.

The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it.

My packet capture captured less than I wanted or failed.

The packet capture screen's File Size sets a maximum size limit for the total combined size of all the capture files on the UAG, including any existing capture files and any new capture files you generate. If you have existing capture files you may need to set this size larger or delete existing capture files.

The UAG stops the capture and generates the capture file when either the capture files reach the File Size or the time period specified in the Duration field expires.

My earlier packet capture files are missing.

New capture files overwrite existing files of the same name. Change the File Suffix field's setting to avoid this.

47.1 Resetting the UAG

If you cannot access the UAG by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and then on again. If you still cannot access the UAG by any method or you forget the administrator password(s), you can reset the UAG to its factory-default settings. Any configuration files or shell scripts that you saved on the UAG should still be available afterwards.

Use the following procedure to reset the UAG to its factory-default settings. This overwrites the settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file.

Note: This procedure removes the current configuration.

If you want to reboot the device without changing the current configuration, see Chapter 45 on page 437.

1 Make sure the SYS LED is on and not blinking.
2 Press the RESET button and hold it until the SYS LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about five seconds.)
3 Release the RESET button, and wait for the UAG to restart.

You should be able to access the UAG using the default settings.

47.2 Getting More Troubleshooting Help

Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting suggestions.

Customer Support

In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. Regional websites are listed below (see also http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel(Worldwide.shtml). Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.

Required Information

• Product model and serial number.
  Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.

Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)

Taiwan

ZyXEL Communications Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com

Asia

China

• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
  ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
  ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
  http://www.zyxel.cn

India

ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
- http://www.zyxel.in

Kazakhstan

ZyXEL Kazakhstan
- http://www.zyxel.kz

Korea

ZyXEL Korea Corp.
- http://www.zyxel.kr

Malaysia

ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
- http://www.zyxel.com.my

Pakistan

ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
http://www.zyxel.com.pk

Philippines

ZyXEL Philippines
http://www.zyxel.com.ph

Singapore

ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
http://www.zyxel.com.sg

Taiwan

ZyXEL Communications Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com

Thailand

ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
- http://www.zyxel.co.th

Vietnam

ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
- http://www.zyoxel.com/vn/vi

Europe

Austria

ZyXEL Lithuania
- http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml

Netherlands

ZyXEL Benelux
- http://www.zyxel.nl

Norway

ZyXEL Communications
- http://www.zyxel.no

Poland

ZyXEL Communications Poland
http://www.zyxel.pl

Romania

ZyXEL Romania
- http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro

Russia

ZyXEL Russia
- http://www.zyxel.ru

Slovakia

ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
- http://www.zyxel.sk

Spain

ZyXEL Spain
- http://www.zyxel.es

Sweden

ZyXEL Communications
- http://www.zyxel.se

Switzerland

• Studerus AG
• http://www.zyxel.ch/

Turkey

ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
- http://www.zyxel.com.tr

UK

ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
http://www.zyxel.co.uk

Ukraine

ZyXEL Ukraine
http://www.ua.zyxel.com

Latin America

Argentina

ZyXEL Communication Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Ecuador

ZyXEL Communication Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Middle East

Egypt

ZyXEL Communication Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml

Middle East

ZyXEL Communication Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml

North America

USA

ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
- http://www.us.zyxel.com/

Oceania

Australia

ZyXEL Communications Corporation
- http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

Africa

South Africa

Nology (Pty) Ltd.
- http://www.zyxel.co.za

Legal Information

Copyright

Copyright © 2014 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

Certifications

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement

The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.

This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.

Industry Canada Statement

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and
2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device

Notices

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

ErP (Energy-related Products) Declaration of Conformity

All ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive).

Network standby power consumption < 12W and Off mode power consumption < 0.5W .

Viewing Certifications

Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product's documentation and certifications.

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.

To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.

Registration

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.

Open Source Licenses

This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact [e-mail] to get it.

Statement - Fully Modular Approval 2.4G and 5G

Industry Canada statement:

This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.

This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions: (For module device use)

1) The antenna must be installed such that 20cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and
2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna.

As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed.

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.

Avertissement: (5G)

Regulatory Information

European Union

The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.

Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)

Compliance Information for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)

[Czech]	ZyXEL tímtó prohlášuje, Že tento zařizení je ve shodě se základním i požadavky a dalšími prěslužnám iustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/EC.
[Danish]	Undertegnede ZyXEL erkräcer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
[German]	Hiermit erklart ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlögigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.
[Estonian]	Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ pöhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sātetele.
English	Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
[Spanish]	Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esencias y cualesquiera除外as dispositions aplicables o exigibles de la Directive 1999/5/CE.
[Greek]	ME ΘΝΗ ΑΝΟΥ ξΑ ZγXEL ΔΗΩANEI OTI Εξολιαύς ΣΥΜΜΟΦΩNETAΙ ΠΡΟΣ TΙΣ ΜΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ KAI TΙΣ ΛΟΙΝΕΣ ΣχETAIKEΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΘΗ ΕΟΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/EC.
[French]	Par laprésente ZyXEL declare que l'appareil éc Equipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.
[Italian]	Con la presente ZyXEL dichiar che dato attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
[Latvian]	Ar šo ZyXEL deklare, ka ikërías atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prisibām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
[Lithuanian]	Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis jranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus irKitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
[Dutch]	Hierbij verkaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiele eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen vanrichtlijn 1999/5/EC.
[Maltese]	Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan taghmir jikkonforma mal-htigijiet essenjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
[Hungarian]	Aluliörett, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hagy a berendezés megfelel a vonaţkoź alapvető követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EK irányelv egyé elörásainak.
[Polish]	Niniejszym ZyXEL oswiadzca,Že spręt jest zgodny zzasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalyymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
[Portuguese]	ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e'autres disposções da Directive 1999/5/EC.
[Slovenian]	ZyXEL izjavla, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahévelem i ostalimi relevantnimi dolovičili direktive 1999/5/EC.
[Slovak]	ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje,Že zariadenia spína základné požiadavya v šetky príslůné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC.
[Finnish]	ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten etta laitteet typpinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
[Swedish]	Härmed intygår ZyXEL attenna utrustning står I overensstammelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmlser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.
[Bulgarian]	С насточтоу ZγXEL.Dečknapira, чу Това оборуване в Сьотоветспье Сбс Сьцесвени и дугите пруложима разиюдөтne на Діректува 1999/5/EC.
[Icelandic]	Hér með lýsvir, ZyXELþvi ðfir áð pessi búnadur er i samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur vðeigandi ákvædi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
[Norwegian]	Erklaer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelse I direktiv 1999/5/EF.
[Romanian]	Prin preventa, ZyXEL declaraă că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerințele esentțaleși alte prederi relevante ale Direktevi 1999/5/EC.

National Restrictions

This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2, 4- and 5-GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable.

The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2,4- and 5-GHz wireless LANs.

The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled "Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs":.

Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs
Frequency Band (MHz)	Max Power Level (EIRP)1(mW)	Indoor ONLY	Indoor and Outdoor
2400-2483.5	100		V
5150-5350	200	V
5470-5725	1000		V

Belgium

The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.

In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.

This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a "general authorization." Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.

The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http:// www.esd.lv for more details.

2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoōanai árpus telpám nepiečoama atiauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairak informácijs: http://www.esd.lv.

Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries.
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).

List of national codes

COUNTRY	ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE	COUNTRY	ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria	AT	Malta	MT
Belgium	BE	Netherlands	NL
Cyprus	CY	Poland	PL
Czech Republic	CR	Portugal	PT
Denmark	DK	Slovakia	SK
Estonia	EE	Slovenia	SI
Finland	FI	Spain	ES
France	FR	Sweden	SE
Germany	DE	United Kingdom	GB
Greece	GR	Iceland	IS
Hungary	HU	Liechtenstein	LI
Ireland	IE	Norway	NO
Italy	IT	Switzerland	CH
Latvia	LV	Bulgaria	BG
Lithuania	LT	Romania	RO
Luxembourg	LU	Turkey	TR

SafetyWarnings

• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to a power outlet.
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispse them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.

Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.

Environmental Product Declaration

English		Deutsch (German)		Espanol (Spanish)		François (French)
Environmental product declaration		Produkt-Umweltdeklaration		Declaraciones Ambientales de Producto		Profil environnemental de produit
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU		RoHS Richtlinke 2011/65/EU		RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU		RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU		WEEE Richtlinke 2012/19/EU		WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU		WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU
PPW Directive 94/62/EC		PPW Richtlinke 94/62/EG		PPW Directive 94/62/CE		PPW Directive 94/62/CE
REACH Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006		REACH VERORDNUNG (EG) Nr. 1907/2006		REACH REGLEMENTO (CE) n° 1907/2006		REACH REGLEMENT (CE) N° 1907/2006
ErP Directive 2009/125/EC		ErP Richtlinke 2009/125/EG		ErP Directive 2009/125/CE		ErP Directive 2009/125/CE
Name/ title: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer Service Division Assistant VP		Name/ titel: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer Service Division Assistant VP		Nombre/ Service Division Assistant VP		Nom/ titre: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer Service Division Assistant VP
Signature: Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 01/10/2013		Unterschrift: Datum (jj/mm/dd): 2013/10/01		Firma: Fecha (aaaa/mm/dd): 2013/10/01		Signature: Date (aaaa/mm/dd): 2013/10/01
Raymond Hagg		Raymond Hagg		Raymond Hagg		Raymond Hagg
RoHSVerified		RoHSVerified		RoHSVerified		RoHSVerified
Italiano (Italian)		Nederland (Dutch)		Svenska (Swedish)		Suomi (Finnish)
Dichiarazione ambientale di prodotto		Mileuaproductverklaring		Miljöproduktdeklaration		Standardin perustuva ympäristotuoteseleste
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU		RoHS Richtlinke 2011/65/EU		RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU		RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU		WEEE Richtlinke 2012/19/EU				WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU
PPW Directive 94/62/CE		PPW Richtlinke 94/62/EG		PPW Directive 94/62/EG		PPW Directive 94/62/EY
REACH REGOLAMENTO (CE) n. 1907/2006		REACH Verordnung (EG) nr. 1907/2006		REACH Forordnung (EG) nr 1907/2006		ASSETUS (EY) N o 1907/2006
ErP Directive 2009/125/CE		ErP Richtlinke 2009/125/EG		ErP Directive 2009/125/EG		ErP Directive 2009/125/EY
Nomel/titolo: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer Service Division Assistant VP		Naam/titel: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer Service Division Assistant VP		Namn/titel: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer Service Division Assistant VP		Nimil: Raymond Huang / Quality & Customer otsikko: Service Division Assistant VP
Firma: Data (aaaa/mm/gg): 2013/10/01		Handtekening: Datum (dd/mm/jaar): 01/10/2013		Namnteckning: Datum (dd/mm/äaà): 01/10/2013		Allekijcotitus: 01/10/2013
Raymond Hagg		Raymond Hagg		Raymond Hagg		Raymond Hagg

Index

Symbols

Numbers

3322 Dynamic DNS 168

A

AAA

port 330

AAA server 328

and users 286

local user database 328

RADIUS 328, 329

RADIUS group 329

see also RADIUS

access 20

access users 285, 287

custompage 372

forcing login 214

idle timeout 294

logging in 214

multiplelogins 294

see also users 285

Web Configurator 296

access users, see also force user authentication policies

account

user 285

accounting server 328

active sessions 62, 64, 75

address groups 314

and firewall 221

and FTP 390

andSNMP 393

and SSH 386

and Telnet 389

and WWW 372

address objects 314

and firewall 221

and FTP 390

and NAT 161, 176

and policy routes 160

andSNMP 393

and SSH 386

and Telnet 389

and WWW 372

HOST 314

RANGE 314

SUBNET 314

types of 314

address record 363

admin user

troubleshooting 443

admin users 285

multiplelogins 294

see also users 285

AF 163

errors 401, 402, 404, 406, 407, 408

ALG 193

and firewall 193

and NAT 193

and policy routes 193

andtrunks 193

FTP 193

H.323 193

see also VoIP pass through 193

SIP 193

Application Layer Gateway, see ALG

application patrol

vs firewall 232

asymmetrical routes 234

allowing through the firewall 236

vs virtual interfaces 234

authentication

server 328

authentication method objects 332

and users 286

and WWW 371

create 333

authentication policy exceptional services 219

authentication type 55, 353

Authentication, Authorization, Accounting servers, see AAA server

authorization server 328

B

backing up configuration files 412

bandwidth limit troubleshooting 441

bandwidth management 275
maximize bandwidth usage 279

boot module 417

bridge interfaces 107, 134
and virtual interfaces of members 135
basic characteristics 107
effect on routing table 134
member interfaces 134
virtual 140

bridges 133

C

CA and certificates 336

CA (Certificate Authority), see certificates

capturing packets 423

CEF (Common Event Format) 398, 406

certificatetroubleshooting 443

Certificate Authority (CA) see certificates

Certificate Revocation List (CRL) 336

certificates 335 advantages of 336

and CA 336

and FTP 390

and HTTPS 368

and SSH 386

and WWW 370

certification path 336, 342, 348

expired 336

factory-default 336

file formats 336

fingerprints 343, 349

importing 339

not used for encryption 336

revoked 336

self-signed 336, 341

serial number 343, 348

storage space 338, 345

thumbprint algorithms 337

thumbprints 337

used for authentication 336

verifying fingerprints 337

certification requests 341

certifications 453

notices 453

viewing 453

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) 353

CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) 353

CHAP/PAP 353

CLI 20, 23

button 23

messages 23

pickup window 23

Reference Guide 2

commands 20

sent by Web Configurator 23

Common Event Format (CEF) 398, 406

compression (stac) 353

computer names 116, 132, 139, 144

configuration

information 421, 426

configuration file

troubleshooting 444

configuration files 410

at restart 413

backing up 412

downloading 414

downloading with FTP 389

editing 410

how applied 411

lastgood.conf 413, 416

managing 412

startup-config.conf 416

startup-config-bad.conf 413

syntax 411

system-default.conf 416

uploading 416

uploading with FTP 389

use without restart 410

connection

troubleshooting 442

connectivity check 115, 125, 131, 139

console port

speed 360

contact information 447

cookies 20

copyright 453

CPU usage 62, 63

current date/time 60,356

and schedules 324

daylight savings 358

setting manually 359

time server 360

custom

access user page 372

login page 372

customer support 447

D

date 356

daylight savings 358

DDNS 168

backup mail exchanger 172

mail exchanger 172

service providers 168

troubleshooting 441

default

firewall behavior 233

device access

troubleshooting 439

DHCP 143,355

and DNS servers 144

anddomainname 355

and interfaces 144

client list 65

pool 144

static DHCP 144

diagnostics 421, 426

DiffServ 163

Digital Signature Algorithm public-key algorithm, see DSA

direct routes 157

disclaimer 453

DNS 361

address records 363

domain name forwarders 364

domain name to IP address 363

IP address to domain name 363

Mail eXchange (MX) records 365

pointer (PTR) records 363

DNS servers 56,361,364

and interfaces 144

documentation

related 2

domain name 355

Domain Name System, see DNS

DSA 341

DSCP 157, 160, 281, 283, 432

Dynamic Domain Name System, see DDNS

dynamic guest 82

dynamic guest account 82, 286

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP.

DynDNS 168

DynDNS see also DDNS 168

Dynu 168

E

e-mail

daily statistics report 395

encryption

RSA 343

encryption method 353

Ethernet interfaces 107

androuting protocols 110

basic characteristics 107

virtual 140

exceptional services 219

Extended Service Set IDentification 299

ext-user

troubleshooting 442

F

FCC interference statement 453

file extensions

configuration files 410

shell scripts 410

file manager 410

Firefox 20

firewall 232

actions 239

and address groups 221

and address objects 221

and ALG 193

and HTTP redirect 186

and logs 221, 239

and NAT 235

and schedules 221, 238, 280, 283

and service groups 238

and service objects 320

and services 238

and SMTP redirect 190

and user groups 238, 241

and users 238, 241

andVPN1-1 mapping 181

and zones 232, 236

asymmetrical routes 234, 236

global rules 233

priority 237

rule criteria 234

see also to-Device firewall 232

session limits 234, 239

to-Device, see to-Device firewall

triangle routes 234, 236

troubleshooting 440

vs application patrol 232

firmware

and restart 416

boot module, see boot module

current version 60, 417

gettingupdated 416

uploading 416, 417

uploading with FTP 389

firmware upload

troubleshooting 445

flash usage 62

forcing login 214

FQDN 363

free guest account 269

free time 269

configuration 269

enable 269

FTP 389

additional signaling port 194

ALG 193

and address groups 390

and address objects 390

and certificates 390

and zones 390

signaling port 194

with Transport Layer Security (TLS) 390

Fully-Qualified Domain Name, see FQDN

G

Generic Routing Encapsulation, see GRE.

GRE 145

Guide

CLI Reference 2

Quick Start 2

H

HTTP

over SSL, see HTTPS

redirect to HTTPS 370

VS HTTPS 368

HTTP redirect 185

and firewall 186

and interfaces 188

and policy routes 186

packet flow 186

troubleshooting 442

HTTPS 368

and certificates 368

authenticating clients 368

avoiding warning messages 377

example 376

VS HTTP 368

with Internet Explorer 376

with Netscape Navigator 376

HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket

Layer, see HTTPS

ICMP 319

IEEE 802.1q VLAN

IEEE 802.1x 300

interface

status 61, 72

troubleshooting 440

interfaces 106

and DNS servers 144

and HTTP redirect 188

and layer-3 virtualization 107

and NAT 176

and physical ports 106

and policy routes 160

and SMTP redirect 192

and static routes 162

and zones 106

as DHCP relays 144

as DHCP servers 144, 355

backup, see trunks

bandwidth management 143, 151, 153

bridge, see also bridge interfaces.

DHCP clients 142

Ethernet, see also Ethernet interfaces.

gateway 143

general characteristics 106

IP address 142

metric 143

MTU 143

overlapping IP address and subnet mask 142

port groups, see also port groups.

PPPoE/PPTP, see also PPPoE/PPTP interfaces.

prerequisites 108

relationships between 108

static DHCP 144

subset mask 142

trunks, see also trunks.

types 107

virtual, see also virtual interfaces.

VLAN, see also VLAN interfaces.

Internet access

troubleshooting 439, 442

Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP

Internet Explorer 20

IP policy routing, see policy routes

IP protocols 319

and service objects 320

ICMP, see ICMP

TCP, see TCP

UDP, see UDP

IP static routes, see static routes

IP/MAC binding

example 202

exempt list 205

monitor 78

overview 202

static DHCP 205

ISP account

CHAP 353

CHAP/PAP 353

MPPE 353

MSCHAP 353

MSCHAP-V2 353

PAP 353

ISP accounts 351

and PPPoE/PPTP interfaces 120,351

authentication type 353

encryption method 353

stac compression 353

Java

permissions 20

JavaScripts 20

key pairs 335

lastgood.conf 413, 416

layer-2 isolation 207

example 207

IP 208

LDAP

and users 286

least load first load balancing 147

LED troubleshooting 439

licensing 99

load balancing 146

algorithms 147, 151, 153

least load first 147

round robin 147

see also trunks 146

session-oriented 147

spillover 148

weighted round robin 148

local user database 328

log

troubleshooting 444

log messages

categories 402, 404, 406, 407, 408

debugging 92

regular 92

types of 92

logged in users 66

login

custompage 372

logo

troubleshooting 444

logout

Web Configurator 21

logs

and firewall 221,239

e-mail profiles 397

e-mailing log messages 94, 401

formats 398

log consolidation 402

settings 397

syslog servers 397

system 397

types of 397

M

MAC address

and VLAN 126

Ethernet interface 114

range 60

management access

troubleshooting 444

Management Information Base (MIB) 391

memory usage 62, 64

messages

CLI 23

metrics, see reports

Microsoft

Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MSCHAP) 353

Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol

Version 2 (MSCHAP-V2) 353

Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) 353

model name 60

MPPE (Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption) 353

MSCHAP (Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) 353

MSCHAP-V2 (Microsoft Challenge-Handshake

Authentication Protocol Version 2) 353

multicast 305

multicast rate 305

My Certificates, see also certificates 338

myZyXEL.com 99

accounts, creating 99

N

NAS 330

NAS IP 330

NAT 163,173

ALG, see ALG

and address objects 161

and address objects (HOST) 176

and ALG 193

and firewall 235

and interfaces 176

and policy routes 155, 161

and to-Device firewall 177

loopback 178

port forwarding, see NAT

port translation, see NAT

Name Server, see NBNS.

Netscape Navigator 20

Network Access Server 330

Network Address Translation, see NAT

Network Time Protocol (NTP) 359

No-IP 168

0

objects

AAA server 328

addresses and address groups 314

authentication method 332

certificates 335

schedules 324

services and service groups 319

users, user groups 285

other documentation 2

P

packet

statistics 69, 70, 85

packet capture 423

files 422, 425, 427

troubleshooting 445

packet captures

downloading files 422, 426, 427, 428

PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) 353

Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) 353

Peanut Hull 168

physical ports

packet statistics 69, 70, 85

pointer record 363

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, see PPPoE.

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol, see PPTP

policy route

troubleshooting 440

policy routes 154

actions 156

and address objects 160

and ALG 193

and HTTP redirect 186

and interfaces 160

and NAT 155

and schedules 160, 280, 283

and service objects 320

and SMTP redirect 190

and trunks 146, 160

and user groups 159, 160, 280, 283

and users 159, 160, 280, 283

andVPN1-1 mapping 181

benefits 155

criteria 156

overriding direct routes 157

pop-up windows 20

port forwarding, see NAT

port groups 107, 109

port roles 108

and Ethernet interfaces 108

and physical ports 108

port translation, see NAT

poweroff 438

PPP 145

troubleshooting 441

PPP interfaces

subset mask 142

PPPoE 145

and RADIUS 145

TCP port 1723 145

PPPoE/PPTP interfaces 107, 120

and ISP accounts 120,351

basic characteristics 107

gateway 120

subset mask 120

PPTP 145

and GRE 145

asVPN 145

pre-subscriber account 287

primer

status 90

primerfirmware 262

printer list 262

primer management 262

problems 439

product registration 454

proxy servers 185

web, see web proxy servers

PTR record 363

Public-Key Infrastructure (PKI) 336

public-private key pairs 335

Q

QoS 155,276

Quick Start Guide 2

R

RADIUS 328, 329

advantages 328

and PPPoE 145

and users 286

port 330

user attributes 297

RADIUS server

troubleshooting 442

reboot 437

vs reset 437

Reference Guide, CLI 2

registration 99

product 454

related documentation 2

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, see RADIUS

remote management

FTP, see FTP

see also service control 367

Telnet 388

to-Device firewall 233

WWW, see WWW

reports

collecting data 73

daily 395

daily e-mail 395

specifications 75

traffic statistics 73

reset 445

vs reboot 437

RESET button 445

RFC

1631 (NAT) 163

2131 (DHCP) 143

2132 (DHCP) 143

2516 (PPPoE) 145

2637 (PPTP) 145

2890 (GRE) 145

Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm (RSA) 341

round robin 147

routing

troubleshooting 441

routing protocols

and Ethernet interfaces 110

RSA 341, 343, 348

RSSI threshold 304

s

schedule

troubleshooting 443

schedules 324

and current date/time 324

and firewall 221,238,280,283

and policy routes 160, 280, 283

one-time 324

recurring 324

types of 324

screen resolution 20

Secure Socket Layer, see SSL

security settings

troubleshooting 440

serial number 60

service control 367

and to-Device firewall 367

and users 367

limitations 367

timeouts 367

service groups 320

and firewall 238

service objects 319

and firewall 320

and IP protocols 320

and policy routes 320

Service Set 299

service subscription status 101

services 319

and firewall 238

session limits 234, 239

sessions 75

sessions usage 62, 64

shell script

troubleshooting 444

shell scripts 410

and users 298

downloading 419

editing 418

how applied 411

managing 418

syntax 411

uploading 420

Short Message Service 273

shutdown 438

Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP

SMS 273

configuration 273

send account information 273

ViaNett account 273

SMS gateway 273

SMTP redirect

and firewall 190

and interfaces 192

and policy routes 190

packet flow 190

SNAT 163

troubleshooting 441

SNMP 390, 391

agents 391

and address groups 393

and address objects 393

and zones 393

Get 391

GetNext 391

Manager 391

managers 391

MIB 391

network components 391

Set 391

Trap 391

traps 392

versions 390

Source Network Address Translation, see SNAT

spillover (for load balancing) 148

SSH 383

and address groups 386

and address objects 386

and certificates 386

and zones 386

client requirements 385

encryption methods 385

for secure Telnet 386

how connection is established 384

versions 385

with Linux 387

with Microsoft Windows 386

SSL 368

stac compression 353

startup-config.conf 416

if errors 413

missing at restart 413

present at restart 413

startup-config-bad.conf 413

static DHCP 205

static routes 155

and interfaces 162

metric 163

statistics

daily e-mail report 395

traffic 73

status 58

subscription services

status 101

supported browsers 20

syslog 406

syslog servers, see also logs

system log, see logs

system name 60,355

system reports, see reports

system uptime 60

system-default.conf 416

T

TCP 319

connections 319

port numbers 319

Telnet 388

and address groups 389

and address objects 389

and zones 389

with SSH 386

throughput rate

troubleshooting 444

time 356

time servers (default) 359

to-Device firewall 233

and NAT 177

and remote management 233

and service control 367

global rules 233

see also firewall 232

traffic statistics 73

Transmission Control Protocol, see TCP

Transport Layer Security (TLS) 390

triangle routes 234

allowing through the firewall 236

vs virtual interfaces 234

troubleshooting 421, 426, 439

admin user 443

bandwidth limit 441

certificate 443

configuration file 444

connection resets 442

DDNS 441

device access 439

ext-user 442

firewall 440

firmware upload 445

HTTP redirect 442

interface 440

Internet access 439, 442

LEDs 439

logo 444

logs 444

management access 444

packet capture 445

policy route 440

PPP 441

RADIUS server 442

routing 441

schedules 443

security settings 440

shell scripts 444

SNAT 441

throughput rate 444

VLAN 441

trunks 107, 146

and ALG 193

and policy routes 146, 160

member interface mode 151, 153

member interfaces 151, 153

see also load balancing 146

Trusted Certificates, see also certificates 345

U

UDP 319

messages 319

port numbers 319

Universal Plug and Play 195

Application 195

security issues 196

upgrading

firmware 416

uploading

configuration files 416

firmware 416

shell scripts 418

UPnP 195

usage

CPU 62, 63

flash 62

memory 62, 64

onboard flash 62

sessions 62, 64

USB storage

status 81

user authentication 285

external 286

local user database 328

user awareness 287

User Datagram Protocol, see UDP

user group objects 285

user groups 285, 287

and firewall 238,241

and policy routes 159, 160, 280, 283

user name

rules 289

user objects 285

user sessions, see sessions

user-aware 221

users 285

access, see also access users

admin (type) 285

admin, see also admin users

and AAA servers 286

and authentication method objects 286

and firewall 238,241

and LDAP 286

and policy routes 159, 160, 280, 283

and RADIUS 286

and service control 367

and shell scripts 298

attributes for Ext-User 286

attributes for RADIUS 297

attributes in AAA servers 297

currently logged in 61, 66

default lease time 294, 296

default reauthentication time 294, 296

default type for Ext-User 286

ext-group-user (type) 285

Ext-User (type) 286

ext-user (type) 285

groups, see user groups

guest-manager (type) 285

lease time 290

limited-admin (type) 285

lockout 295

reauthentication time 290

types of 285

user names 289

V

Vantage Report (VRPT) 406

virtual interfaces 107, 140

basic characteristics 107

not DHCP clients 142

types of 140

vs asymmetrical routes 234

vs triangle routes 234

Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN.

VLAN 126

advantages 127

and MAC address 126

ID 126

troubleshooting 441

VLAN interfaces 107, 127

and Ethernet interfaces 127, 441

basic characteristics 107

virtual 140

VoIP pass through

see also ALG 193

VPN 1-1 mapping 180

and firewall 181

and policy routes 181

example 180

introduction 180

packet flow 180

pool profile 183

VRPT (Vantage Report) 406

W

warranty 454

note 454

Web Configurator 19

access 20

access users 296

requirements 20

supported browsers 20

web proxy servers 186

see also HTTP redirect

weighted round robin (for load balancing) 148

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 300

Wi-Fi Protected Access 300

Windows Internet Naming Service, see WINS

Windows Internet Naming Service, see WINS.

WINS 116, 132, 139, 144

WINS server 116

Wizard Setup 44, 52

WPA 300

WPA2 300

WWW 368

and address groups 372

and address objects 372

and authentication method objects 371

and certificates 370

and zones 372

see also HTTP, HTTPS 368

Z

zones 164

and firewall 232,236

and FTP 390

and interfaces 164

andSNMP 393

and SSH 386

and Telnet 389

and WWW 372

extra-zone traffic 165

inter-zone traffic 165

intra-zone traffic 165

types of traffic 164